Nokia Solutions and Networks T6DY1 SC4812T-MC 1X/1X-DO @ 1.9GHz User Manual 1

Nokia Solutions and Networks SC4812T-MC 1X/1X-DO @ 1.9GHz 1

Contents

Manual B

BTS Equipment Identification – continued 1-38 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTNOTE 1. Figure 1-17 identifies which BBXs are used for Omni and2-Sector configurations.2. The fourth PA quadrant (quadrant D) is populated withCLPAs only when the 4x4 ETM is used.3. PHYSICAL APPEARANCE OF FRAMES: The physicalappearance of the frame, especially the location of theMCM, Power Amplifier cage, and PowerDistribution/Combiner cage, and the particular I/O plateused, may differ on frames converted from early versionSC4812T BTSs. Functionally however, and for the purposeof optimization and acceptance testing, those frames areidentical4. For an SC4812T BTS frame which has been converted tomulticarrier capability, a fourth three–sector carrier, usingBBX–10 through BBX–12, is supported in R16.4 and latersoftware releases. In a converted multicarrier frame, PA slot4 in all PA quadrants should never be populated. (seeFigure 1-21).Figure 1-18: BBXs Used for Omni and Two–Sector OperationBBX–1BBX–4BBX–RBBX–7BBX–10BBX–1BBX–2BBX–4BBX–5BBX–RBBX–7BBX–8BBX–10BBX–11C–CCP (Omni) C–CCP (2 Sector)1
BTS Equipment Identification – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 1-39DRAFTFigure 1-19: TX Filter and 50Ω Termination Requirements for Omni, Two–sector, and Three–sectorConfigurations – OEM Multicarrier and Converted Multicarrier Frames (Minimum Power ConfigurationShown)MCM1S1S2S3CLPACLPACLPA 1C 1A 1BOmniMCM1S1S2S3CLPA CLPACLPACLPA 1C 1D 1A 1BTwo–SectorThree–SectorTX FILTERSTX FILTER50WTERMINATORSTX FILTERS50WTERMINATORMCM1S1S2S3CLPACLPACLPA 1C 1A 1B1
BTS Equipment Identification – continued 1-40 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTFigure 1-20: Omni, Two–sector, and Three–sector PA Configurations – OEM Multicarrier FrameMCM1S1S2S3CLPACLPACLPA 1C 1A 1BMinimum Power Configuration3 x 3 ETMMCM1S1S2S3CLPA CLPACLPACLPA 1C 1D 1A 1BMinimum Power Configuration4 x 4 ETMMCM1S1S2S3CLPACLPACLPACLPACLPA CLPACLPACLPA 1C 2C 3C 4C 3A 2A 1A 1B 2B 3B 4B 4ACLPACLPACLPACLPAMaximum Power Configuration3 x 3 ETMMCM1S1S2S3CLPACLPACLPACLPACLPACLPACLPACLPACLPACLPACLPACLPA 1C 2C 3C 4C 1D 2D 3D 4D 3A 2A 1A 1B 2B 3B 4B 4ACLPACLPACLPACLPAMaximum Power Configuration4 x 4 ETM50 WTERMINATIONSand/orTX Filters(See NO TAG)50 WTERMINATIONSand/orTX Filters(See NO TAG)50 WTERMINATIONSand/orTX Filters(See NO TAG)50 WTERMINATIONSand/orTX Filters(See NO TAG)50 WTERMINATIONSand/orTX Filters(See NO TAG)50 WTERMINATIONSand/orTX Filters(See NO TAG)1
BTS Equipment Identification – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 1-41DRAFTFigure 1-21: Omni, Two–sector, and Three–sector PA Configurations – Converted Multicarrier FrameMCM1S1S2S3CLPACLPACLPA 1C 1A 1BMinimum Power Configuration3 x 3 ETMMCM1S1S2S3CLPA CLPACLPACLPA 1C 1D 1A 1BMinimum Power Configuration4 x 4 ETMMCM1S1S2S3CLPACLPACLPACLPA CLPACLPACLPA 1C 2C 3C 3A 2A 1A 1B 2B 3BCLPACLPAMaximum Power Configuration3 x 3 ETMMCM1S1S2S3CLPACLPACLPACLPACLPACLPACLPACLPACLPACLPA 1C 2C 3C 1D 2D 3D 3A 2A 1A 1B 2B 3BCLPACLPAMaximum Power Configuration4 x 4 ETM50 WTERMINATIONSand/orTX Filters(See NO TAG)50 WTERMINATIONSand/orTX Filters(See NO TAG)50 WTERMINATIONSand/orTX Filters(See NO TAG)50 WTERMINATIONSand/orTX Filters(See NO TAG)50 WTERMINATIONSand/orTX Filters(See NO TAG)50 WTERMINATIONSand/orTX Filters(See NO TAG)1
BTS Equipment Identification – continued 1-42 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTFigure 1-22: Six–sector PA Configurations – OEM Multicarrier Frames OnlyS4MCM1S5S6S1S2S3MCM2CLPACLPACLPA CLPACLPACLPA 1C 3C 3A 1A 1B 3BS4MCM1S5S6S1S2S3MCM2CLPACLPACLPACLPACLPACLPACLPACLPA 1C 3C 1D 3D 3A 1A 1B 3BMinimum Power Configuration3 x 3 ETMMinimum Power Configuration4 x 4 ETMTX FILTERSTX FILTERSS4MCM1S5S6S1S2S3MCM2CLPACLPACLPACLPACLPA CLPACLPACLPA 1C 2C 3C 4C 3A 2A 1A 1B 2B 3B 4B 4ACLPACLPACLPACLPAMaximum Power Configuration3 x 3 ETMS4MCM1S5S6S1S2S3MCM2CLPACLPACLPACLPACLPACLPACLPACLPACLPACLPACLPACLPA 1C 2C 3C 4C 1D 2D 3D 4D 3A 2A 1A 1B 2B 3B 4B 4ACLPACLPACLPACLPAMaximum Power Configuration4 x 4 ETMTX FILTERSTX FILTERS1
5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATPDRAFTChapter 2: Preliminary OperationsTable of ContentsGuide Book 1–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Document Overview 1–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What Is In This Guide? 1–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Book Catalogs and Organization 1–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Book Directory 1–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Catalogs 1–5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Physical Page Layouts 1–6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A/A4 Page and Margin Sizes 1–6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A/A4 Page Text Area 1–7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A/A4 Page Components 1–9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frame and Table Components 1–10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frames With Tools 1–10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flow Charts and Block Diagrams 1–10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line Drawings 1–11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table Types In This Template 1–12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Item/Description Table 1–12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Step Table 1–13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Step/Check Table 1–14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Component Descriptions 1–15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conclusions 1–16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Map Title Goes Here lkjsfdg Sfdkgj Msfd N lkas K lkjsdfl kB lkj fgcb 1–17. . . . . . Block Label Goes Here 1–17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Label Goes Here 1–17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Label Goes Here 1–18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Label Goes Here 1–19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Map Title Goes Here 1–22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Table of Contents – continued1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTNotes2
Overview5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 2-1DRAFTIntroductionThis section first verifies proper frame equipage. This includes verifyingmodule placement, jumper, and dual in–line package (DIP) switchsettings against the site-specific documentation supplied for each BTSapplication. Next, pre-power up and initial power-up procedures arepresented.Cell Site TypesSites are configured as Omni with a maximum of 4 carriers, 3–sectoredwith a maximum of 4 carriers, and 6–sectored with a maximum of 2carriers. Each type has unique characteristics and must be optimizedaccordingly. For more information on the differences in site types, pleaserefer to the 1X SC 4812T-MC BTS Hardware Installation manual.CDF or NECThe Configuration Data File (CDF) (circuit BTS) or Network ElementConfiguration (NEC) files (packet BTS) contains site type and equipagedata information and passes it directly to the LMF during optimization.The number of modem frames, C–CCP shelves, BBX boards, MCCboards (per cage), and power amplifier assignments are some of theequipage data included in the CDF or NEC files.Be sure that the correct bts–#.cdf and cbsc–#.cdf orNECB*bts#.xml and NECJ*bts#.xml files are used forthe BTS. These should be the CDF or NEC files that areprovided for the BTS by the OMC–R. Failure to use thecorrect CDF or NEC files can cause system errors. Failureto use the correct CDF or NEC files to log into a live(traffic carrying) site can shut down the site.CAUTIONSite Equipage VerificationReview the site documentation. Match the site engineering equipage datato the actual boards and modules shipped to the site. Physically inspectand verify the equipment provided for the BTS or Modem frame andancillary equipment frame.Always wear a conductive, high impedance wrist strapwhile handling any circuit card/module to prevent damageby ESD. After removal, the card/module should be placedon a conductive surface or back into the anti–staticshipping bag.CAUTION2
Overview – continued 2-2 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTInitial Installation ofBoards/ModulesFollow the procedure in Table 2-1 to verify the initial installation ofboards/modules.Table 2-1: Initial Installation of Boards/ModulesStep Action1Refer to the site documentation and install all boards and modules into the appropriate shelves asrequired. Verify they are NOT SEATED at this time.NOTEThe Switch Card has a configuration switch that must match the site configuration (see Figure 2-1).2As the actual site hardware is installed, record the serial number of each module on a “Serial NumberChecklist” in the site logbook.Configuration Switch in Figure 2-1 shown for 3 SectorMulticarrier BTS. (Switches 1 and 4 control configuration)For Multicarrier, switch 1 should be Down; switch 4depends on whether the frame supports 3 or 6 sector.NOTE2
Overview – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 2-3DRAFTFigure 2-1: Switch Cardti-CDMA-WP-00039-v01-ildoc-ftwSwitch Card1234ONBTSMF3 Sector6 SectorJ1J2J3J4J5SHIELDSConfigurationSwitchSetting Frame C–CCP ShelfConfiguration SwitchThe backplane switch settings behind the fan module nearest the breakerpanel should be set as shown in Figure 2-2.The switch setting must be verified and set before power is applied to theBTS equipment.SStarter Frame – all dip switches set to ON (UP)SExpansion Frame – all dip switches ON (UP) exceptMODEM_FRAME_ID_0 OFF (DOWN)2
Overview – continued 2-4 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTFigure 2-2: Backplane DIP Switch Settings19 mm Filter PanelPower SupplyAMR / MACHHSOCSMCSM39 mm Filter PanelAMR / MACHGLI–1GLI–2MCC–6BBX–1BBX–2BBX–3BBX–4BBX–5BBX–6BBX–RSwitchMPCMPCMCIOBBX–7BBX–8BBX–9BBX–10BBX–11BBX–12MCC–5MCC–4MCC–3MCC–2MCC–1MCC–12MCC–11MCC–10MCC–9MCC–8MCC–7Power SupplyPower SupplyCCD CCDONOFFSC 4812T C–CCP SHELFFAN MODULEREMOVEDSTARTERFRAMESETTINGONALL SWITCHES ON (UP) EXCEPT MO-DEM_FRAME_ID_0 OFF (DOWN)EXPANSIONFRAMESETTINGBOTTOM / TOPRIGHT / LEFTMODEM_FRAME_ID_1MODEM_FRAME_ID_0BOTTOM / TOPRIGHT / LEFTMODEM_FRAME_ID_1MODEM_FRAME_ID_0ti-CDMA-WP-00211-v01-ildoc-ftw REFSPEEDCONTROLLEDFA NMODULEREARFRONTPWR/ALMSPEEDCONTROLLEDFA NMODULEREARFRONTPWR/ALMALL SWITCHES ON (UP)OFF2
Pre–Power Up Tests5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 2-1DRAFTObjectiveThis procedure checks for any electrical short circuits and verifies theoperation and tolerances of the cellsite and BTS power supply units priorto applying power for the first time.Test EquipmentThe following test equipment is required to complete the pre–power–uptests:SDigital Multimeter (DMM)Always wear a conductive, high impedance wrist strapwhile handling the any circuit card/module to preventdamage by ESD.CAUTIONCabling InspectionUsing the site-specific documentation generated by Motorola SystemsEngineering, verify that the following cable systems are properlyconnected:SReceive RF cabling – up to 12 RX cablesSTransmit RF cabling – up to six TX cablesSGPSDC Power Pre-test (BTS Frame)Before applying any power to the BTS frame, follow the procedure inTable 2-2 while referring to Figure 2-3 to verify there are no shorts in theBTS frame DC distribution system.Table 2-2: DC Power Pre–test (BTS Frame)Step Action1Physically verify that all DC power sources supplying power to the frame are OFF or disabled.2On each frame:SUnseat all circuit boards (except CCD and CIO cards) in the C–CCP shelf and LPA shelves, butleave them in their associated slots.SSet C–CCP shelf breakers to the OFF position by pulling out power distribution breakers (labeledC–CCP 1, 2, 3) located on the power distribution panel.SSet LPA breakers to the OFF position by pulling out the LPA breakers (8 breakers, labeled 1A–1Bthrough 4C–4D) located on the power distribution panel.Continue with Step 3 for –48 V or Step 4 for +27 V.. . . continued on next page2
Pre–Power Up Tests – continued 2-2 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTTable 2-2: DC Power Pre–test (BTS Frame)Step Action3For –48 V configurations ONLY:Verify the resistance on the –48 V bus:– Remove the Power Supply Modules (PSMs).– Verify that the resistance from the power (–) feed terminal with respect to the ground terminal onthe top of the frame measures > 500 Ω (see Figure 2-3).Verify the resistance on the +27 V bus:– Remove PSM#1 or the filler panel.! CAUTIONDo not put probes inside Elcon connectors.– Place the Digital Multimeter probes on the mounting screws on the Elcon connector (bottom twoElcon connectors).– If reading is < 500 Ω, a short may exist somewhere in the DC distribution path supplied by thebreaker. Isolate the problem before proceeding. A reading > 3 MΩ could indicate an open (ormissing) bleeder resistor (installed across the filter capacitors behind the breaker panel).4For +27 V configurations ONLY:Verify that the resistance from the power (+ or –) feed terminals with respect to the ground terminal onthe top of the frame measures > 500 Ω (see Figure 2-3).– If reading is < 500 Ω, a short may exist somewhere in the DC distribution path supplied by thebreaker. Isolate the problem before proceeding. A reading > 3 MΩ could indicate an open (ormissing) bleeder resistor (installed across the filter capacitors behind the breaker panel).5Set the C–CCP breakers to the ON position by pushing them IN one at a time. Repeat Step 3 (for–48 V) or Step 4 (for +27 V) after turning on each breaker.NOTEIf the multimeter stays at 0 Ω after inserting any board/module, a short probably exists in thatboard/module. Replace the suspect board/module and repeat the test. If test still fails, isolate theproblem before proceeding.6Insert and lock the DC/DC converter modules for the C–CCP shelf and into their associated slots oneat a time. Repeat Step 3 (for –48 V) or Step 4 (for +27 V) after inserting each module.– A typical response is that the ohmmeter steadily climbs in resistance as capacitors charge, finallyindicating approximately 500 Ω.! CAUTIONVerify the correct power/converter modules by observing the locking/retracting tabs appear as follows:STPN4009BPWR C–CCP 4812 +27V7Insert and lock all remaining circuit boards and modules into their associated slots in the C–CCP shelf.Repeat Step 3 (for –48 V) or Step 4 (for +27 V) after inserting and locking each board or module.– A typical response is that the ohmmeter steadily climbs in resistance as capacitors charge,stopping at approximately 500 Ω... . . continued on next page2
Pre–Power Up Tests – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 2-3DRAFTTable 2-2: DC Power Pre–test (BTS Frame)Step Action8Set the LPA breakers ON by pushing them in. Repeat Step 3 (for –48 V) or Step 4 (for +27 V) afterturning on each breaker.– A typical response is that the ohmmeter will steadily climb in resistance as capacitors charge,stopping at approximately 500 Ω..NOTEEngage circuit breakers only for LPAs that are equipped.9In the –48V BTS, insert PSMs one at a time in their associated slots, verifying that LED is green.Repeat Step 3 after inserting each module.10 Seat all LPA and associated LPA fan modules into their associated slots in the shelves one at a time.Repeat Step 3 (for –48 V) or Step 4 (for +27 V) after seating each LPA and associated LPA fanmodule.SA typical response is that the ohmmeter will steadily climb in resistance as capacitors charge,stopping at approximately 500 Ω.. 2
Pre–Power Up Tests – continued 2-4 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTFigure 2-3: +27V Breaker Panel (–48V is similar)GNDLPACCCP2A4A2B4B2C4C2D4D1A3A1B3B1C3C1D3D5012350 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50INPUTTOP OF FRAMEFILLERti-CDMA-WP-00224-v01-ildoc-ftwPLATEDC FILTERCONNECTOR/DC FILTER 1 DC FILTER 22
Initial Power Up Tests & Procedures5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 2-5DRAFTPower-up ProceduresPotentially lethal voltage and current levels are routed tothe BTS equipment. This test must be performed with asecond person present, acting in a safety role. Remove allrings, jewelry, and wrist watches prior to beginning thistest.WARNINGDC Input PowerIn the tests to follow, power will first be verified at the input to eachBTS frame. After power is verified, cards and modules within the frameitself will be powered up and verified one at a time.Before applying any power, verify the correct power feed and returncables are connected between the power supply breakers and the powerconnectors at the top of each BTS frame. Verify correct cable positionreferring to Figure 2-3.NOTE For positive power applications (+27 V):SThe positive power cable is red.SThe negative power cable is black.For negative power applications (–48 V):SThe negative power cable is red or blue.SThe positive power cable (ground) is black.Motorola recommends that the DC input power cable used to connect theframe to the main DC power source conforms to the guidelines outlinedin Table 2-3.Table 2-3: DC Input Power Cable GuidelinesMaximum Cable Length Wire Size30.38 m (100 ft) 107 mm2 (AWG #4/0)54.864 m (180 ft) 185 mm2 (350 kcmil)Greater that 54.864 m (180 ft) Not recommendedMake sure the connector adapters are securely attached toeach of the BTS power feeds and returns. Also, make surethe cables have been properly installed into eachconnector.NOTE2
Initial Power Up Tests & Procedures – continued 2-6 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTCommon Power SupplyVerificationThe procedure in Table 2-4 must be performed on any BTS frameconnected to a common power supply at the site after the common powersupply has been installed and verified per the power supply OEMsuggested procedures.Perform the following steps to verify the power input is withinspecification before powering up the individual cards/modules with theframes themselves.While handling any circuit card/module, always wear aconductive, high impedance wrist strap to preventdamage by ESD. Extreme care should be taken during theremoval and installation of any card/module. Afterremoval, the card/module should be placed on a conductivesurface or back into the anti–static bag in which it wasshipped.CAUTIONTable 2-4: Common Power Supply VerificationStep Action1Physically verify that all DC power sources supplying the frame are OFF or disabled.2On each frame:SUnseat all circuit boards (except CCD and CIO cards) in the C–CCP shelf and LPA shelves, butleave them in their associated slots.SSet breakers to the OFF position by pulling out C–CCP and LPA breakers (see Figure 2-3 forbreaker panel layout if required).– C–CCP shelf breakers are labeled CCCP–1, 2, 3.– LPA breakers are labeled 1A–1B through 4C–4D.3On –48 V BTS: Remove the –48 V to +27 V Power Supply Modules.4Inspect input cables, verify correct input power polarity via decal on top of frame.5Apply power to BTS frames, one at a time, by setting the appropriate breaker in the power supply thatsupplies the frame to the ON position.6After power is applied to each frame, use a digital voltmeter to verify power supply output voltages atthe top of each BTS frame are within specifications:On –48 V BTS: –48 Vdc nominalOn +27 V BTS: +27 Vdc nominal7On –48 V BTS: Plug in PSMs one at a time and verify ’Green’ LEDs on PSMs light.Initial Power-up (BTS)The procedure must be performed on each frame after input power fromthe common power supply has been verified. Follow the steps inTable 2-5 to apply initial power to the cards/modules within the frameitself, verifying that each is operating within specification.2
Initial Power Up Tests & Procedures – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 2-7DRAFTTable 2-5: Initial Power–up (BTS)Step Action1At the BTS, set the C–CCP (POWER) power distribution breakers (see Figure 2-3) to the ON positionby pushing in the breakers.2Insert the C–CCP fan modules. Observe that the fan modules come on line.3! CAUTIONVerify the correct C–CCP power supplies by observing the locking/retracting tabs appear as follows:Insert and lock the power supplies into their associated slots one at a time.•If no boards have been inserted, all three PWR/ALM LEDs would indicate RED to notify the userthat there is no load on the power supplies.– If the LED is RED, do not be alarmed. After Step 4 is performed, the LEDs should turn GREEN;if not, then a faulty power supply is indicated and should be replaced before proceeding.STPN 4009BPWR C–CCP 4812 +27V4Seat and lock all remaining circuit cards and modules in the C–CCP shelf into their associated slots.5Seat the first equipped PA module pair into the assigned slot in the upper PA shelf including PA fan.6Repeat Step 5 for all remaining PAs.NOTEEngage circuit breakers only for PAs that are equipped.7Set the PA breakers to the ON position (per configuration) by pushing them IN. See NO TAG forbreaker panel layout.Engage (push) PA circuit breakers.SConfirm LEDs on PAs light.8After all cards/modules have been seated and verified, use a digital voltmeter to verify power supplyoutput voltages at the top of the frame remain within specifications:On –48 V BTS: –48 Vdc nominalOn +27 V BTS: +27 Vdc nominal9Repeat Steps 1 through 8 for additional co–located frames (if equipped). 2
Initial Power Up Tests & Procedures – continued 2-8 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTNotes2
5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATPDRAFTChapter 3: Optimization and CalibrationTable of ContentsGuide Book 1–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Document Overview 1–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What Is In This Guide? 1–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Book Catalogs and Organization 1–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Book Directory 1–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Catalogs 1–5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Physical Page Layouts 1–6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A/A4 Page and Margin Sizes 1–6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A/A4 Page Text Area 1–7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A/A4 Page Components 1–9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frame and Table Components 1–10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frames With Tools 1–10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flow Charts and Block Diagrams 1–10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line Drawings 1–11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table Types In This Template 1–12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Item/Description Table 1–12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Step Table 1–13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Step/Check Table 1–14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Component Descriptions 1–15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conclusions 1–16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Map Title Goes Here lkjsfdg Sfdkgj Msfd N lkas K lkjsdfl kB lkj fgcb 1–17. . . . . . Block Label Goes Here 1–17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Label Goes Here 1–17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Label Goes Here 1–18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Label Goes Here 1–19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Map Title Goes Here 1–22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Table of Contents – continued1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTNotes3
Introduction to Optimization & Calibration5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 3-1DRAFTOverviewThis section describes procedures for isolating the BTS from the spanlines, preparing and using the LMF, downloading system operatingsoftware, CSM reference verification/optimization, set up and calibrationof the supported test equipment, transmit/receive path verification, andverifying the customer defined alarms and relay contacts are functioningproperly.Before using the LMF, use an editor to view the“CAVEATS” section in the “readme.txt” file in the c:\wlmffolder for any applicable information.NOTEOptimization ProcessSummaryAfter a BTS is physically installed and the preliminary operations, suchas power up, have been completed, the LMF is used to optimize theBTS. The basic optimization process consists of the following:1. Download MGLI–1 with code and data and then enable MGLI–1.GLIs may be GLI2s or GLI3s.NOTE2. Use the status function and verify that all of the installed devices ofthe following types respond with status information: CSM, BBX,GLI, and MCC. If a device is installed and powered up but is notresponding and is colored gray in the BTS display, the device is notlisted in the CDF or NEC files. The CDF or NEC files must becorrected before the device can be accessed by the LMF.3. Download code and data to all devices of the following types:– CSM– BBX (multicarrier uses BBX–1X)– GLI (other than MGLI–1)– MCC (may be MCC–8E, MCC24, or MCC–1X)4. Verify the operation of the GPS and HSO signals.5. Enable the following devices (in the order listed):– Secondary CSM– Primary CSM– All MCCs6. Connect the required test equipment for a full optimization.7. Select the test equipment.3
Introduction to Optimization & Calibration – continued 3-2 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFT8. Calibrate the TX and RX test cables if they have not previously beencalibrated using the CDMA LMF that will be used for theoptimization/calibration. The cable calibration values can also beentered manually.All PAs must be INS during any TX testing.NOTE9. If the TX calibration fails, repeat the optimization for any failedpaths.10. If the TX calibration fails again, correct the problem that caused thefailure and repeat the optimization for the failed path.11. If the TX calibration and audit portion of the optimization passes fora path but some of the TX or RX tests fail, correct the problem thatcaused the failure and run the individual tests as required until allTX and RX tests have passed for all paths.Cell Site TypesSites are configured as Omni/Omni or Sector/Sector (TX/RX). Each typehas unique characteristics and must be optimized accordingly.For more information on the differences in site types, referto the applicable BTS Hardware Installation manual.NOTEConfiguration FilesThe Configuration Data File (CDF) and the Network ElementConfiguration (NEC) files contain information that defines the BTS anddata used to download files to the devices. The BTS CDF (bts–#.cdf)and CBSC CDF (cbsc–#.cdf) files are used by circuit BTSs. The NECBase (NECB – NECB*bts#.xml) and NEC Journaling (NECJ –NECJ*bts#.xml) files are used by packet BTSs. CDF or NEC filesmust be placed in the applicable BTS folder before the LMF can be usedto log into that BTS. CDF and NEC files are normally obtained from theCBSC using a floppy disk. A file transfer protocol (ftp) method can beused if the LMF computer has that capability. The CDF and NEC files include the following information:SDownload instructions and protocolSSite specific equipage informationSC–CCP shelf allocation plan– BBX equipage (based on cell–site type) including redundancy– CSM equipage including redundancy– MCC (MCC24E, MCC8E, or MCC–1X) channel element allocationplan. This plan indicates how the C–CCP shelf is configured, andhow the paging, synchronization, traffic, and access channelelements (and associated gain values) are assigned among the (up to12) MCCs in the shelf.3
Introduction to Optimization & Calibration – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 3-3DRAFTSCSM equipage including redundancySEffective Rated Power (ERP) table for all TX channels to antennasrespectively. Motorola System Engineering specifies the ERP of atransmit antenna based on site geography, antenna placement, andgovernment regulations. Working from this ERP requirement, theantenna gain, (dependent on the units of measurement specified) andantenna feed line loss can be combined to determine the requiredpower at the top of the BTS frame. The corresponding BBX outputlevel required to achieve that power level on any channel/sector canalso be determined.Refer to the LMF Help function on–line documentation foradditional information on the layout of the LMF directorystructure (including CDF or NEC file locations andformats).NOTEBTS System SoftwareDownloadBTS system software must be successfully downloaded to the BTSprocessor boards before optimization can be performed. BTS operatingcode is loaded from the LMF computer terminal.Before using the LMF for optimization/ATP, the correctbts–#.cdf and cbsc–#.cdf or NECB*bts#.xml andNECJ*bts#.xml files for the BTS must be obtained fromthe OMC–R and put in a bts–# folder in the LMF. Failureto use the correct CDF or NEC files can cause improper orunpredictable BTS operation. Failure to use the correctCDF or NEC files to log into a live (traffic carrying) sitecan shut down the site.CAUTIONThe CDF or NEC files are normally obtained from the OMC–R on aDOS formatted diskette, or through a file transfer protocol (ftp) if theLMF computer has ftp capability. Refer to the LMF Help functionon–line documentation for the procedure.Site Equipage VerificationIf it has not already done, use an editor to view the CDF or NEC files,and review the site documentation. Verify the site engineering equipagedata in the CDF or NEC files matches the actual site hardware using aCDF or NEC file conversion table.3
Introduction to Optimization & Calibration – continued 3-4 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTUse extreme care not to make any changes to the CDF orNEC file content while viewing the file. Changes to theCDF or NEC file can cause the site to operate unreliably orrender it incapable of operation.CAUTIONAlways wear an approved anti–static wrist strap whilehandling any circuit card/module to prevent damage byESD. Extreme care should be taken during the removal andinstallation of any card/module. After removal, thecard/module should be placed on a conductive surface orback into the anti–static container in which it was shipped.CAUTION3
Preparing the LMF5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 3-5DRAFTOverviewBefore optimization can be performed, the LMF application softwaremust be installed and configured on a computer platform meetingMotorola–specified requirements (see Recommended Test Equipmentand Software in Chapter 1).Software and files for installation and updating of the LMF are providedon CD ROM disks. The following installation items must be available:SLMF Program on CD ROM (see page NO TAG for current supportedversion of LMF)SCDF or NEC files for each supported BTS (on diskette or availablefrom the CBSC)SCBSC CDF file for each supported circuit BTS (on diskette oravailable from the CBSC)The following section provides information and instructions forinstalling and updating the LMF software and files.Overview of Packet BTS filesR16.0 and earlier software releases used the CDF configuration file foreach BTS and CBSC supported by the LMF. In a packet BTS operatingwith Software Release 16.1 or later, the CDF is replaced by the NECfiles. There are two NEC files. These are:SNEC Base (NECB) fileSNEC Journal (NECJ) fileThe NECB contains the baseline configuration information and isanalogous to the CDF, while the NECJ contains all the changes made tothe configuration since the last time the NECB was re–generated. Oncethe NECJ reaches 80% of its maximum size, the NECB is re–generatedby the OMC–R, and all updates from the NECJ file are rolled into it.The NEC files play much more extensive role than the previously–usedCDF files.Additional important, LMF–related facts about the the NEC files are:SBoth files (NECB and NECJ) are in eXtensible Markup Language(XML) format.SNECB contains all the up-to-date static configuration information andNECJ contains all the recent changes (including operations) which arenot updated in the NECB.SBoth files can be viewed in any XML viewer (most easily available isInternet Explorer V5.0 and higher). They can be also viewed by anyother word or text processor, but the XML tags will also be seen whenusing these types of applications.SThese files will be created by OMC–R from MIB and reflect the BTSprovisioning.SThese files will be regenerated for each software release upgrade onthe system for each BTS.3
Preparing the LMF – continued 3-6 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTSUnlike the CDF file, the NEC files will reside on both OMC–R andGLI3s operating in packet mode. The NEC files will be synchronizedperiodically between the OMC–R and GLI3s in each BTS.SBoth the NECB and NECJ files contain a “SoftwareVersion” field intheir header section indicating the system release version of thesefiles.SInstead of the bts–#.cdf file, the packet LMF usesNECB*bts#.xml and NECJ*bts#.xml files, which are copies of theNEC files.SA GLI3 operating in packet mode will need the NECB and NECJ filesfor site initialization.SThe scope of the NEC files has grown much broader than that of theCDF and has much more BTS–centric information. This is principallybecause the role of the GLI card has expanded significantly with theintroduction of the GLI3 card and packet backhaul.CAUTION Never use a generic NEC file. The specific, site–uniqueinformation for the BTS must be included in the NEC file for thesite to operate properly.LMF File Structure OverviewThe LMF uses a <x>:\lmf home directory> folder that contains all of theessential data for installing and maintaining the BTS. The following listoutlines the folder structure for LMF. Except for the bts–# folders, thesefolders are created as part of the the LMF installation. Refer to theCDMA LMF Operator’s Guide for a complete description of the folderstructure.Figure 3-1: LMF Folder Structureversion folder (A separate folder isrequired for each different version; forexample, a folder name 2.8.1.1.1.5.)loads folder(C:)x:\<lmf home directory> foldercdma foldercode folderdata folderbts–# folders (A separate folder is requiredfor each BTS where bts–# is the unique BTSnumber; for example, bts–163.)3
Preparing the LMF – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 3-7DRAFTThe “loads” folder and all the folders below it are notavailable from the LMF for Software Release R2.16.4.1.These folders may be present as as a legacy from previoussoftware versions or downloaded from the CBSC/OMC–R.Any existing code in the directory is not affected by an SR16.1 installation.The user will need to manually add the directories to anewly installed LMF when they add the code loads to bedownloaded.NOTELMF Home DirectoryThe CDMA LMF installation program creates the default homedirectory, c:\wlmf, and installs the application files and subdirectories(folders) in it. Because this can be changed at installation, the CDMALMF home directory will be referred to with the generic convention of:<x>:\<lmf home directory>Where:<x> = the LMF computer drive letter where the CDMA LMF homedirectory is located.<lmf home directory> = the directory path or name where the CDMALMF is installed.Filename Conventions andDirectory LocationNEC FilesThe naming conventions for the NECB and NECJ files are:NECB*bts#.xmlNECJ*bts#.xmlNECJ*bts#.xmlWhere:* = any characters can be substituted# = the actual integer BTS number; for example,NECB–2.16.4.1.40–bts480.xmlThe NECB and its corresponding NECJ must have the exact same name,except for the “B” and “J” after the initial NEC characters.The NECB and the NECJ must reside in the<LMF_HOME>\cdma\bts–# directory for the BTS to which they apply.Load Information File (LIF)The LIF contains all the devices binaries available for the specifiedSystem Software Release. It is the functional equivalent of the ObjectList File (OLF) file that was used pre–Packet.3
Preparing the LMF – continued 3-8 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTThe naming convention for the LIF is:NE_LIF.xmlThe LIF must reside in the <LMF_HOME>\cdma\loads\<SoftwareRelease Number> directory, where <LMF_HOME> = the homedirectory in which the LMF is installed, usually C:\wlmf <SoftwareRelease Number> = the System Software Release Number (e.g.2.16.1.0.10).Cal FileThe Cal File still resides in the <LMF_HOME>\cdma\bts–# directoryand is named bts–#.cal, where # is the actual integer number of theBTS.LMF Operating SystemInstallationThis section provides information and instructions for installing andupdating the LMF software and files.NOTE First Time Installation Sequence:1. Install Java Runtime Environment (JRE)2. Install U/WIN K–shell emulator3. Install LMF application programs4. Install/create BTS foldersNOTE Any time U/WIN is installed, the LMF application softwaremust also be installed. This is because the LMF applicationinstallation modifies some of the files that are installed duringthe U/Win installation. These modifications are necessary forproper LMF operation. Installing U/Win over–writes thesemodifications.There are multiple binary image packages for installation on theCD–ROM. When prompted, choose the load that corresponds tothe software release currently installed in the network. Performthe Device Images installation after the LMF installation.If applicable, a separate CD ROM of BTS Binaries may beavailable for binary updates.Follow the procedure in Table 3-1 to install the LMF applicationprogram using the LMF CD ROM.Table 3-1: LMF Application Program InstallationnStep Action1Insert the LMF Program CD ROM into the LMF CDROM drive.1a – If the Setup screen appears, follow the instructionsdisplayed on the screen.. . . continued on next page3
Preparing the LMF – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 3-9DRAFTTable 3-1: LMF Application Program InstallationnActionStep1b – If the Setup screen is not displayed, proceed to Step2.2Click on the Start button.3 Select Run.4 Enter d:\autorun In the Open box and click OK.NOTEIf applicable, replace the letter d with the correctCD ROM drive letter. Copy BTS and CBSC CDF orNEC Files to the LMF ComputerBefore logging on to a BTS with the LMF computer to executeoptimization/ATP procedures, the correct bts–#.cdf and cbsc–#.cdfor NECB*bts#.xml and NECJ*bts#.xml files must be obtained from theCBSC and put in a bts-# folder in the LMF computer. This requirescreating versions of the CBSC CDF files on a DOS–formatted floppydiskette and using the diskette to install the CDF or NEC files on theLMF computer.NOTE – If the LMF has ftp capability, the ftp method can be used tocopy the CDF files from the CBSC.– On Sun OS workstations, the unix2dos command can beused in place of the cp command (for example,unix2dos bts–248.cdf bts–248.cdf). This should be doneusing a copy of the CBSC CDF file so the original CBSCCDF file is not changed to DOS format.NOTE When copying CDF or NEC files, comply with the following toprevent BTS login problems with the LMF:– The numbers used in the bts–#.cdf and cbsc–#.cdf orNECB*bts#.xml and NECJ*bts#.xml filenames mustcorrespond to the locally assigned numbers for each BTSand its controlling CBSC.– The generic cbsc–1.cdf file supplied with the LMFworks with locally numbered circuit BTS CDF files. Usingthis file will not provide a valid optimization unless thegeneric file is edited to replace default parameters (forexample, channel numbers and corresponding set powerout) with the operational parameters used locally.The procedure in Table 3-2 lists the steps required to transfer the CDF orNEC files from the CBSC to the LMF computer. For furtherinformation, refer to the LMF Help function on line documentation.3
Preparing the LMF – continued 3-10 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTTable 3-2: Copying CBSC CDF or NEC Files to the LMFnStep ActionAT THE CBSC:1Login to the CBSC workstation.2Insert a DOS formatted diskette in the workstation drive.3 Type eject –q and press the <Enter> key.4 Type mount and press the <Enter> key.NOTESLook for the “floppy/no_name” message on the last line displayed.SIf the eject command was previously entered, floppy/no_name will be appended with anumber. Use the explicit floppy/no_name reference displayed when performing step 7.5Change to the directory containing the file by typing cd <directory name> (ex. cdbts–248) and pressing <Enter>.6 Type ls <Enter> to display the list of files in the directory.7 With Solaris versions of Unix, create DOS–formatted versions of the bts–#.cdf and cbsc–#.cdf orNECB*bts#.xml and NECJ*bts#.xml files on the diskette by entering the following command:unix2dos <source filename> /floppy/no_name/<target filename>For example, unix2dos bts–248.cdf or NECB–2.16.4.41–bts248.xml /floppy/no_name/bts–248.cdf.NOTESOther versions of Unix do not support the unix2dos and dos2unix commands. In these cases,use the Unix cp (copy) command. The copied files will be difficult to read with a DOS orWindows text editor because Unix files do not contain line feed characters. Editing copied CDFor NEC files on the LMF computer is, therefore, not recommended.SUsing cp, multiple files can be copied in one operation by separating each filename to be copiedwith a space and ensuring the destination directory (floppy/no_name) is listed at the end of thecommand string following a space (for example, cp bts–248.cdf cbsc–6.cdf /floppy/no_name).8Repeat steps 5 through 7 for each bts–# that must be supported by the LMF.9When all required files have been copied to the diskette, type eject and press the <Enter> key.10 Remove the diskette from the CBSC.AT THE LMF:11 Start the Windows operating system.12 Insert the diskette into the LMF.. . . continued on next page3
Preparing the LMF – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 3-11DRAFTTable 3-2: Copying CBSC CDF or NEC Files to the LMFnActionStep13 Using Windows Explorer (or equivalent program), create a corresponding bts–# folder in the<lmf home directory>\cdma directory for each bts–#.cdf and cbsc–#.cdf or NECB*bts#.xmland NECJ*bts#.xml file pair copied from the CBSC.14 Use Windows Explorer (or equivalent program) to transfer the bts–#.cdf and cbsc–#.cdf orNECB*bts#.xml and NECJ*bts#.xml files from the diskette to the corresponding<lmf home directory>\cdma\bts–# folders created in step 13. Creating a NamedHyperTerminal Connection forMMI SessionsConfirming or changing the configuration data of certain BTS FieldReplaceable Units (FRUs) requires establishing an MMI communicationsession between the LMF and the FRU. Using features of the Windowsoperating system, the connection properties for an MMI session can besaved on the LMF computer as a named Windows HyperTerminalconnection. This eliminates the need for setting up connectionparameters each time an MMI session is required to supportoptimization.Once the named connection is saved, a shortcut for it can be created onthe Windows desktop. Double clicking the shortcut icon will start theconnection without the need to negotiate multiple menu levels.Follow the procedure in Table 3-3 to establish a named HyperTerminalconnection and create a WIndows desktop shortcut for it.Table 3-3: Creating a Named HyperTerminal Connection for MMI SessionsStep Action1From the Windows Start menu, select:Programs>Accessories2 Select Communications, double click the Hyperterminal folder, and then double click on theHyperterm.exe icon in the window that opens.NOTESIf a Location Information Window appears, enter the required information, then click Close.(This is required the first time, even if a modem is not to be used.)SIf a You need to install a modem..... message appears, click NO.3When the Connection Description box opens:– Type a name for the connection being defined (for example, MMI Session) in the Name: window.– Highlight any icon preferred for the named connection in the Icon: chooser window.– Click OK.. . . continued on next page3
Preparing the LMF – continued 3-12 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTTable 3-3: Creating a Named HyperTerminal Connection for MMI SessionsStep Action4NOTEFor LMF configurations where COM1 is used by another interface such as test equipment and aphysical port is available for COM2, select COM2 to prevent conflicts.From the Connect using: pick list in the Connect To box displayed, select the RS–232 port to be usedfor the connection (e.g., COM1 or COM2 (Win NT) – or Direct to Com 1 or Direct to Com 2 (Win98), and click OK.5In the Port Settings tab of the COM# Properties window displayed, configure the RS–232 portsettings as follows:SBits per second: 9600SData bits: 8SParity: NoneSStop bits: 1SFlow control: None6 Click OK.7Save the defined connection by selecting:File>Save8Close the HyperTerminal window by selecting:File>Exit9 Click Yes to disconnect when prompted.10 Perform one of the following:SIf the Hyperterminal folder window is still open (Win 98) proceed to step 12SFrom the Windows Start menu, select Programs > Accessories11 Perform one of the following:SFor Win NT, select Hyperterminal and release any pressed mouse buttons.SFor Win 98, select Communications and double click the Hyperterminal folder.12 Highlight the newly created connection icon by moving the cursor over it (Win NT) or clicking on it(Win 98).13 Right click and drag the highlighted connection icon to the Windows desktop and release the rightmouse button.14 From the pop–up menu displayed, select Create Shortcut(s) Here.15 If desired, reposition the shortcut icon for the new connection by dragging it to another location on theWindows desktop. 3
Span Lines – Interface & Isolation5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 3-13DRAFTT1/E1 Span InterfaceAt active sites, the OMC/CBSC must disable the BTS andplace it out of service (OOS). DO NOT remove the 50–pinTELCO cable connected to the BTS frame site I/O boardJ1 connector until the OMC/CBSC has disabled the BTS!NOTEEach frame is equipped with one Site I/O and two Span I/O boards. TheSpan I/O J1 connector provides connection for 25 wire pairs. A GLI cardcan support up to six spans. In SC4812T BTS frames, spans A, C, and Eterminate on the Span “A” I/O; and spans B, D, and F terminate on theSpan “B” I/O.Span Lines will interface to the BTS through the Span I/Ocards only in circuit mode with either circuit or splitbackhaul.NOTEBefore connecting the LMF to the frame LAN, the OMC–R must disablethe BTS and place it OOS to allow the LMF to control the CDMA BTS.This prevents the OMC–R from inadvertently sending controlinformation to the BTS during LMF–controlled tests. Refer toFigure 3-2and Figure 3-3 as required.3
Span Lines – Interface & Isolation – continued 3-14 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTIsolate BTS from T1/E1 SpansTo ensure the LMF will maintain control of the BTS, disable the BTSand isolate the spans as described in Table 3-4.Table 3-4: T1/E1 Span IsolationStep Action1Have the OMC/CBSC place the BTS OOS.2Remove the T1/E1 span 50–pin TELCO cable connected to the SPAN I/O cards(Figure 3-2).NOTE– If a third party is used for span connectivity, the third party must be informedbefore disconnecting the span line.– Verify that the SPAN cable connector is removed, not the “MODEM/TELCO”connector.Figure 3-2: Span I/O Board Span Isolation50–PIN TELCOCONNECTORSREMOVEDSPAN A CONNECTOR(TELCO) INTERFACETO SPAN LINESSPAN B CONNECTOR(TELCO) INTERFACETO SPAN LINESTOP of Frame (Site I/O and Span I/O boards)RS–232 9–PIN SUB DCONNECTOR SERIALPORT FOR EXTERNALDIAL UP MODEMCONNECTION (IF USED)FW002993
LMF to BTS Connection5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 3-15DRAFTConnect the LMF to the BTSThe LMF is connected to the LAN A or B connector located on the leftside of the frame’s lower air intake grill, behind the LAN Cable Accessdoor (see Figure 3-3).Table 3-5: LMF to BTS ConnectionStep Action1To gain access to the connectors on the BTS, open the LAN Cable Access door, then pull apart theVelcro® tape covering the BNC “T” connector (see Figure 3-3).2Connect the LMF to the LAN A BNC connector via PCMCIA Ethernet Adapter with an unshieldedtwisted–pair (UTP) Adapter and 10BaseT/10Base2 converter (powered by an external AC/DCtransformer).3Start the LMF application (see Table 3-6 or Table 3-7) and test the connection.– If there is no login response, connect the LMF to the LAN B connector.– If there is still no login response, see Table 6-1, Login Failure Troubleshooting Procedures.NOTE– Xircom Model PE3–10B2 or equivalent can also be used to interface the LMF Ethernetconnection to the frame connected to the PC parallel port, powered by an external AC/DCtransformer. In this case, the BNC cable must not exceed 91 cm (3 ft) in length.– The LAN shield is isolated from chassis ground. The LAN shield (exposed portion of BNCconnector) must not touch the chassis during optimization.3
LMF to BTS Connection – continued 3-16 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTFigure 3-3: LMF Connection DetailNOTE:Open LAN CABLE ACCESSdoor. Pull apart Velcro tape andgain access to the LAN A or LANB LMF BNC connector.LMF BNC “T” CONNECTIONSON LEFT SIDE OF FRAME(ETHERNET “A” SHOWN;ETHERNET “B” COVEREDWITH VELCRO TAPE)LMF COMPUTERTERMINAL WITHMOUSE PCMCIA ETHERNETADAPTER & ETHERNETUTP ADAPTER10BASE–T/10BASE–2CONVERTER CONNECTSDIRECTLY TO BNC T 115 VAC POWERCONNECTIONUNIVERSAL TWISTED PAIR (UTP)CABLE (RJ45 CONNECTORS)ti-CDMA-WP-00076-v01-ildoc-ftw3
Using the LMF5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 3-17DRAFTBasic LMF OperationLMF Coverage in This Publication – There are LMF applicationprograms to support maintenance of both CDMA and SAS BTSs. Allreferences to the LMF in this publication are for the CDMA applicationprogram.Operating Environments – The LMF application program allows theuser to work in the two following operating environments which areaccessed using the specified desktop icons:SGraphical User Interface (GUI) using the WinLMF iconSCommand Line Interface (CLI) using the WinLMF CLI iconThe GUI is the primary optimization and acceptance testing operatingenvironment. The CLI environment provides additional capability to theuser to perform manually controlled acceptance tests and audit theresults of optimization and calibration actions.Basic Operation – Basic operation of the LMF in either environmentincludes performing the following:SSelecting and deselecting BTS devicesSEnabling devicesSDisabling devicesSResetting devicesSObtaining device statusThe following additional basic operation can be performed in a GUIenvironment:SSorting a status report windowFor detailed information on performing these and other LMF operations,refer to the LMF On-Line Help, Software Release 2.16.4.x .Unless otherwise noted, LMF procedures in this manualare performed using the GUI environment.NOTEOnline Help – Task oriented online help is available in the LMF byclicking on Help from the menu bar.The LMF Display and the BTSBTS Display – When the LMF is logged into a BTS, a frame tab isdisplayed for each BTS frames. The frame tab will be labeled with“CDMA” and the BTS number, a dash, and the frame number (forexample, BTS–812–1 for BTS 812, RFMF 1). If there is only one framefor the BTS, there will only be one tab.3
Using the LMF – continued 3-18 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTCDF or NEC file Requirements – For the LMF to recognize thedevices installed in the BTS, a BTS CDF or NEC files which includeequipage information for all the devices in the BTS must be located inthe applicable <x>:\<lmf home directory>\cdma\bts–# folder. Toprovide the necessary channel assignment data for circuit BTS operation,a CBSC CDF file which includes channel data for all BTS RFMFs isalso required in the folder.RFDS Display – If an RFDS is included in the CDF or NEC files, anRFDS tab labeled with “RFDS,” a dash and the BTS number–framenumber combination (for example, RFDS–812–1) will be displayed.Graphical User InterfaceOverviewThe LMF uses a Graphical User Interface (GUI), which supports thefollowing functions:SSelecting a device or devices.SSelecting an action to apply to selected device(s).SStatus report window displaying progress of actions taking place andrelated information.SNotification when an action is complete and related information suchas indication of success or failureSAn OK button to close the status report window.Understanding GUI OperationThe following screen captures are provided to help understand how theGUI operates:– Figure 3-4 shows the differences between packet and circuit BTSrepresentations on the LMF login screen. If there is a packetconfiguration file (NEC) for the BTS, the “(P)” is added as a suffixto the BTS number.– Figure 3-5 shows the Self-Managed Network Elements (NE) stateof a packet–mode BTS (SC4812T shown). An “X” is displayed onthe front of each card that is under Self–Managed NE control by theGLI3 card.– Figure 3-6 shows three of the available packet mode commands.Normally the GLI3 has Self-Managed NE control of all cards asshown inFigure 3-6 identified with an “X”. In that state, the LMFmay only status a card. In order to download code or test a card, theLMF must request Self-Managed NE control of the card by usingthe dropdown menu shown. The LMF also uses this menu to releasecontrol of the card back to the GLI3. The GLI3 will also assumecontrol of the cards after the LMF logs out of the BTS. The packetmode GLI3 normally is loaded with a tape release and NECB andNECJ files which point to a tape release stored on the GLI3. Whenthe GLI3 has control of a card it will maintain that card with thecode on that tape release.3
Using the LMF – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 3-19DRAFT– Figure 3-7 depicts a packet–mode BTS that has the MCC–1 and theBBX–1 cards under LMF control. Notice that the “X” is missingfrom the front of these two cards.Figure 3-4: BTS Login screen – identifying circuit and packet BTS filesFor detailed information on performing these and other LMF operations,refer to the LMF Help function on–line documentation.3
Using the LMF – continued 3-20 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTFigure 3-5: Self–Managed Network Elements (NEs) state of a packet mode SC4812T3
Using the LMF – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 3-21DRAFTFigure 3-6: Available packet mode commands3
Using the LMF – continued 3-22 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTFigure 3-7: cket mode BTS with MCC–1 and BBX–1 under LMF controlCommand Line InterfaceOverviewThe LMF also provides Command Line Interface (CLI) capability.Activate the CLI by clicking on a shortcut icon on the desktop. The CLIcannot be launched from the GUI, only from the desktop icon.Both the GUI and the CLI use a program known as the handler. Only onehandler can be running at one time. Due to architectural limitations, theGUI must be started before the CLI if it is desired that the GUI and CLIto use the same handler. When the CLI is launched after the GUI, theCLI automatically finds and uses an in–progress login session with aBTS initiated under the GUI. This allows the use of the GUI and the CLIin the same BTS login session. If a CLI handler is already running whenthe GUI is launched (this happens if the CLI window is already runningwhen the user starts the GUI, or if another copy of the GUI is alreadyrunning when the user starts the GUI), a dialog window displays thefollowing warning message:The CLI handler is already running.This may cause conflicts with the LMF.3
Using the LMF – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 3-23DRAFTAre you sure that you want to start the application?Yes NoSelecting the yes button starts the application. Selecting the no buttonterminates the application.CLI Format ConventionsThe CLI command can be broken down in the following way:SverbSdevice including device identifier parametersSswitchSoption parameters consisting of:– keywords– equals signs (=) between the keywords and the parameter values– parameter valuesSpaces are required between the verb, device, switch, and optionparameters. A hyphen is required between the device and its identifiers.Following is an example of a CLI command.measure bbx–<bts_id>–<bbx_id> rssi channel=6 sector=5Refer to the LMF CDMA CLI Reference, Software Release 2.16.4.xmanual for a complete explanation of the CLI commands and their use.Logging into a BTSLogging into a BTS establishes a communications link between the BTSand the LMF. An LMF session can be logged into only one BTS at atime.PrerequisitesBefore attempting to log into the BTS,Before attempting to login to a BTS, ensure the following have beencompleted:SThe LMF is properly connected to the BTS (see Figure 3-3).SThe LMF application program is correctly installed and prepared.SA bts-# folder with the correct CDF and CBSC files or NEC filesexists.SThe LMF computer was connected to the BTS before starting theWindows operating system and LMF software. If necessary, restart thecomputer after connecting it to the BTS in accordance with Table 3-5and Figure 3-3.3
Using the LMF – continued 3-24 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTBe sure that the correct bts–#.cdf and cbsc–#.cdf orNECB*bts#.xml and NECJ*bts#.xml files are used for theBTS. These should be the CDF or NEC files that areprovided for the BTS by the OMC–R. Failure to use thecorrect CDF or NEC files can result in invalidoptimization. Failure to use the correct CDF or NECfiles to log into a live (traffic carrying) site can shutdown the site.NOTEBTS Login from the GUI EnvironmentFollow the procedure in Table 3-6 to log into a BTS when using the GUIenvironment.Table 3-6: BTS GUI Login ProcedurenStep Action1Start the CDMA LMF GUI environment by double clicking on the WinLMF desktop icon (if theLMF is not running).NOTEIf a warning similar to the following is displayed, select No, shut down other LMF sessions whichmay be running, and start the CDMA LMF GUI environment again:The CLI handler is already running.This may cause conflicts with the LMFAre you sure you want to start the application?Yes No2Click on the Login tab (if not displayed).3If no base stations are displayed in the Available Base Stations pick list, double click on theCDMA icon.4Click on the desired BTS number.5Click on the Network Login tab (if not already in the forefront).6Enter the correct IP address (normally 128.0.0.2 for a field BTS) if not correctly displayed in theIP Address box.NOTE128.0.0.2 is the default IP address for MGLI–1 in field BTS units. 128.0.0.1 is the default IPaddress for MGLI–2.7Type in the correct IP Port number (normally 9216) if not correctly displayed in the IP Port box.. . . continued on next page3
Using the LMF – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 3-25DRAFTTable 3-6: BTS GUI Login ProcedurenActionStep8Click on Ping.– If the connection is successful, the Ping Display window shows text similar to the following:Reply from 128 128.0.0.2: bytes=32 time=3ms TTL=255– If there is no response the following is displayed:128.0.0.2:9216:Timed outIf the MGLI fails to respond, reset and perform the ping process again. If the MGLI still fails torespond, typical problems are shorted BNC to inter–frame cabling, open cables, crossed A and Blink cables, missing 50–Ohm terminators, or the MGLI itself.9Change the Multi-Channel Preselector (from the Multi-Channel Preselector pick list) selection,normally MPC, to correspond to the BTS configuration, if required.NOTEWhen performing RX tests on expansion frames, do not choose EMPC if the test equipment isconnected to the starter frame.NOTE“Use a Tower Top Amplifier” is not applicable to the SC4812T–MC.10 Click on Login.A BTS tab with a graphical representation of the BTS CCP cage is displayed.NOTESIf login is attempted to a BTS that is already logged on, all devices will be gray.SFor Software Release 2.16.4.0 and earlier, a Mode Selection box asking if the BTS is Trunkedor Multicarrier will pop up. Multicarrier must be selected for the SC4812T–MC BTS.SThere may be instances where the BTS initiates a log out due to a system error (than is, a devicefailure).SIf the MGLI is OOS_ROM (blue), it will have to be downloaded with code before other devicescan be seen.SIf the MGLI is OOS_RAM (yellow), it must be enabled before other installed devices can beseen. BTS Login from the CLI EnvironmentFollow the procedure in Table 3-7 to log into a BTS when using the CLIenvironment.3
Using the LMF – continued 3-26 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTIf the CLI and GUI environments are to be used at thesame time, the GUI must be started first and BTS loginmust be performed from the GUI. Refer to Table 3-6 tostart the GUI environment and log into a BTS.NOTETable 3-7: BTS CLI Login ProcedurenStep Action1Double click the WinLMF CLI desktop icon (if the LMF CLIenvironment is not already running).NOTEIf a BTS was logged into under a GUI session when the CLIenvironment was started, the CLI session will be logged into the sameBTS, and step 2 is not required.2At the /wlmf prompt, enter the following command:login bts–<bts#> host=<host> port=<port>where:host = MGLI card IP address (defaults to address last logged into forthis BTS or 128.0.0.2 if this is first login to this BTS).port = IP port of the BTS (defaults to port last logged into for thisBTS or 9216 if this is first login to this BTS).A response similar to the following will be displayed:LMF>13:08:18.882 Command Received and Accepted COMMAND=login bts–3313:08:18.882 Command In Progress13:08:21.275 Command Successfully Completed REASON_CODE=”No Reason” 3 Logging OutLogging out of a BTS is accomplished differently for the GUI and theCLI operating environments.3
Using the LMF – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 3-27DRAFTThe GUI and CLI environments use the same connection toa BTS. If a GUI and the CLI session are running for thesame BTS at the same time, logging out of the BTS ineither environment will log out of it for both. When eithera login or logout is performed in the CLI window, there isno GUI indication that logout has occurred.NOTELogging Out of a BTS from the GUI EnvironmentFollow the procedure in Table 3-8 to logout of a BTS when using theGUI environment.Table 3-8: BTS GUI Logout ProcedurenStep Action1Click on BTS on the BTS tab menu bar.2Click the Logout item in the pull–down menu (a Confirm Logoutpop–up message appears).3Click on Yes or press the <Enter> key to confirm logout.The screen display returns to the Login tab.NOTEIf a logout was previously performed on the BTS from a CLI windowrunning at the same time as the GUI, a Logout Error pop–upmessage appears stating the system should not log out of the BTS.When this occurs, the GUI must be exited and restarted before it canbe used for further operations.4If a Logout Error pop–up message appears stating that the systemcould not log out of the Base Station because the given BTS is notlogged in, perform the following actions:– Click OK.– Select File>Exit in the window menu bar.– Click Yes in the Confirm Logout pop–up.– Click Yes in the Logout Error pop–up which appears again.5If further work is to be done in the GUI, restart it.NOTESThe Logout item on the BTS menu bar will only log the LMF outof the displayed BTS.SLogging out of all BTS sessions and exiting the LMF can be doneby clicking on the File selection in the menu bar and selecting Exitfrom the File menu list. A Confirm Logout pop–up message willappear. 3
Using the LMF – continued 3-28 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTLogging Out of a BTS from the CLI EnvironmentFollow the procedure in Table 3-9 to logout of a BTS when using theCLI environment.Table 3-9: BTS CLI Logout ProcedurenStep ActionNOTEIf the BTS is also logged into from a GUI running at the same timeand further work must be done with it in the GUI, proceed to step 2.1Logout of a BTS by entering the following command:logout bts–<bts#>A response similar to the following is displayed:LMF>12:22:58.028 Command Received and Accepted Command=logout bts–3312:22:58.028 Command Received and Accepted12:22:58.028 Command Successfully Completed REASON_CODE=”No Reason” 2 If desired, close the CLI interface by entering the followingcommand:exitA response similar to the following is displayed before the windowcloses:Killing background processes.... Establishing an MMICommunication SessionFor those procedures that require MMI communications between theLMF and BTS FRUs, follow the procedure in Table 3-10 to initiate thecommunication session.Table 3-10: Establishing MMI CommunicationStep Action1Connect the LMF computer to the equipment as detailed in the applicable procedure that requires theMMI communication session and Figure 3-8 or Figure 3-9.2If the LMF computer has only one serial port (COM1) and the LMF is running, disconnect the LMFfrom COM1 by performing the following:2a – Click on Tools in the LMF window menu bar, and select Options from the pull–down menu list.–– An LMF Options dialog box will appear.2b – In the Test Equipment tab of the dialog box, select COM1 in the Comm Port pulldown on theSerial Connection tab.. . . continued on next page3
Using the LMF – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 3-29DRAFTTable 3-10: Establishing MMI CommunicationStep Action2c – ,Click the Disconnect Port button on the Serial Connection tab.3Start the named HyperTerminal connection for MMI sessions by double clicking on its Windowsdesktop shortcut.NOTEIf a Windows desktop shortcut was not created for the MMI connection, access the connection from theWindows Start menu by selecting:Programs > Accessories > Hyperterminal > HyperTerminal > <Named HyperTerminalConnection (e.g., MMI Session)>4Once the connection window opens, establish MMI communication with the BTS FRU by pressingthe LMF computer Enter key until the prompt identified in the applicable procedure is obtained. Figure 3-8:CDMA LMF Computer Common MMI Connections – Cable CGDSMMICABLE219112 orFabricated MMI CableCABLE PART NUMBErCGDSMMICABLE219112ORFABRICATED MMI CABLE(SEE APPENDIX J)DB–9CONNECTOR8–PINLMF COMPUTERTo FRU MMIConnectorCOM1ORCOM23
Using the LMF – continued 3-30 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTFigure 3-9: CDMA LMF Computer Common MMI Connections –Motorola MMI Interface Kit, SLN2006ANULL MODEMBOARD(TRN9666A)8–PIN TO 10–PINRS–232 CABLE(P/N 30–09786R01)RS–232 CABLE8–PINCDMA LMFCOMPUTERTo FRU MMI portDB9–TO–DB25ADAPTERCOM1ORCOM2FW00687Online HelpTask oriented online help is available in the LMF by clicking on Help inthe window menu bar, and selecting LMF Help from the pull–downmenu.3
Pinging the Processor5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 3-31DRAFTPinging the ProcessorFor proper operation, the integrity of the Ethernet LAN A and B linksmust be be verified. Figure 3-10 represents a typical BTS Ethernetconfiguration. The drawing depicts one (of two identical) links, A and B.Ping is a program that routes request packets to the LAN networkmodules to obtain a response from the specified “targeted” BTS.Figure 3-10: BTS LAN DiagramLMFCONNECTORBC–CCPCAGEABINABAOUTBTS(STARTER)LAN “IN” PORTS MUST HAVEGROUNDED 50 OHM TERMINATIONAT ALL TIMES IN A STARTERFRAME.IN EXPANSION FRAME ANDLOGICAL BTS, LAN “IN” PORTS ARENOT GROUNDEDUNUSED LAN “OUT” PORTS MUSTHAVE NON–GROUNDED 50 OHM BNCTERMINATORS INSTALLEDORBE CONNECTED TO EXPANSIONFRAME (WHERE USED) VIA COAXCABLESFollow the procedure in Table 3-11 and refer to Figure 3-10, as required,to ping each processor (on both LAN A and LAN B) and verify LANredundancy is operating correctly.3
Pinging the Processor – continued 3-32 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTAlways wear an approved anti–static wrist strap whilehandling any circuit card/module to prevent damage byESD.CAUTIONThe Ethernet LAN A and B cables must be installed oneach frame/enclosure before performing this test. All otherprocessor board LAN connections are made via thebackplanes.NOTETable 3-11: Pinging the ProcessorsnStep Action1If it has not already been done, connect the LMF to the BTS (see Table 3-5 on page3-15).2From the Windows desktop, click the Start button and select Run.3In the Open box, type ping and the <MGLI IP address> (for example, ping128.0.0.2).NOTE128.0.0.2 is the default IP address for MGLI–1 in field BTS units. 128.0.0.1 is thedefault IP address for MGLI–2.4Click on the OK button.5If the connection is successful, text similar to the following is displayed:Reply from 128 128.0.0.2: bytes=32 time=3ms TTL=255If there is no response the following is displayed:Request timed outIf the MGLI fails to respond, reset and perform the ping process again. If the MGLIstill fails to respond, typical problems are shorted BNC–to–inter-frame cabling, opencables, crossed A and B link cables, missing 50–Ohm terminators, or the MGLI itself.3
Download the BTS5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 3-33DRAFTOverviewBefore a BTS can operate, each equipped device must contain deviceinitialization (ROM) code. ROM code is loaded in all devices duringmanufacture or factory repair. Device application (RAM) code and datamust be downloaded to each equipped device by the user before the BTScan be made fully functional for the site where it is installed.ROM CodeDownloading ROM code to BTS devices from the LMF is NOT routinemaintenance nor a normal part of the optimization process. It is onlydone in unusual situations where the resident ROM code in the devicedoes not match the release level of the site operating software AND theCBSC cannot communicate with the BTS to perform the download. IfROM code must be downloaded, refer to Appendix H.Before ROM code can be downloaded from the LMF, the correct ROMcode file for each device to be loaded must exist on the LMF computer.ROM code must be manually selected for download.The ROM code file is not available for GLI3s. GLI3s areROM code loaded at the factory.NOTERAM CodeBefore RAM code can be downloaded from the CDMA LMF, the correctRAM code file for each device must exist on the LMF computer. RAMcode can be automatically or manually selected depending on the Devicemenu item chosen and where the RAM code file for the device is storedin the CDMA LMF file structure. The RAM code file is selectedautomatically if the file is in the \lmf\cdma\loads\n.n.n.n\code folder(where n.n.n.n is the version number of the download code). The RAMcode file in the code folder must have the correct hardware bin number.RAM code can be downloaded to a device that is in any state. After thedownload is started, the device being downloaded changes to OOS-ROM(blue). When the download is completed successfully, the devicechanges to OOS-RAM (yellow). When code is downloaded to an MGLI,the LMF automatically also downloads data, and then enables the MGLI.When enabled, the MGLI changes to INS (green).For non–MGLI devices, data must be downloaded after RAM code isdownloaded. To download data, the device state must be OOS–RAM(yellow).Prior to downloading a device, a code file must exist. The code file isselected automatically if the code file is in the /lmf/cdma/n.n.n.n/codefolder (where n.n.n.n is the version number of the download code thatmatches the “NextLoad” parameter in the CDF or NEC files). The codefile in the code folder must have the correct hardware bin number. Codecan be automatically or manually selected.3
Download the BTS – continued 3-34 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTThe devices to be loaded with RAM code and data are::SMaster Group Line Interface (MGLI)SGroup Line Interface (GLI)SClock Synchronization Module (CSM)SMulti Channel Card (MCC24E, MCC8E or MCC–1X)SBroadband Transceiver (BBX)The MGLI must be successfully downloaded with code anddata, and put INS before downloading any other device.The download code process for an MGLI automaticallydownloads data and enables the MGLI before downloadingother devices. The other devices can be downloaded in anyorder.NOTEVerify GLI ROM Code LoadsDevices should not be loaded with a RAM code version which is notcompatible with the ROM code with which they are loaded. Beforedownloading RAM code and data to the processor cards, follow theprocedure in Table 3-12 to verify the GLI devices are loaded with thecorrect ROM code for the software release used by the BSS.PrerequisiteIdentify the correct GLI ROM code load for the software release beingused on the BSS by referring to the Version Matrix section of the SCtCDMA Release Notes (supplied on the tapes or CD–ROMs containingthe BSS software).Table 3-12: Verify GLI ROM Code LoadsStep Action1If it has not already been done, start a GUI LMF session and log into theBTS ( refer to Table 3-6).2Select all GLI devices by clicking on them, and select Device > Statusfrom the BTS menu bar.3In the status report window which opens, note the number in the ROMVer column for each GLI.4If the ROM code loaded in the GLIs is not the correct one for the softwarerelease being used on the BSS, perform the following:4a – Log out of the BTS as described in Table 3-8 or Table 3-9, asapplicable.4b – Disconnect the LMF computer.4c – Reconnect the span lines as described in Table 5-7.. . . continued on next page3
Download the BTS – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 3-35DRAFTTable 3-12: Verify GLI ROM Code LoadsStep Action4d – Have the CBSC download the correct ROM code version to the BTSdevices.5When the GLIs have the correct ROM load for the software release beingused, be sure the span lines are disabled as outlined in Table 3-4 andproceed to downloading RAM code and data. Download RAM Code and Datato MGLI CardsPrerequisitePrior to performing this procedure, ensure a code file exists for each ofthe devices to be downloaded.ProcedureFollow the procedure in Table 3-13 to download the firmwareapplication code for the MGLI. The download code action downloadsdata and also enables the MGLI.Table 3-13: Download and Enable MGLInStep Action1Note the active LAN to which the LMF computer is connected.2At the top of the frame, remove the 50 Ω termination from the LANOUT connector of the LAN to which the LMF is not connected.3 Select Tools > Update Next Load > CDMA function to ensure theNext Load parameter is set to the correct code version level.4Note the LAN IP address in the Network Login section of the LMFLogin tab, and determine which GLI the LMF is logged into based onthe following IP addresses:– Card in GLI slot 1: 128.0.0.2– Card in GLI slot 2: 128.0.0.15Download code to the MGLI which the LMF is logged into byclicking on the MGLI.– From the Device pull down menu, select Download > Code/Data.A status report confirms change in the device(s) status.– Click OK to close the status window. (The MGLI shouldautomatically be downloaded with data and enabled.)6If the card accepts the download and enables, skip to step 10.7If the BTS connection is lost during or after the download process,click on the LMF Login tab and log into the BTS again using thesame IP address.. . . continued on next page3
Download the BTS – continued 3-36 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTTable 3-13: Download and Enable MGLInActionStep8If the log–in attempt fails, set the LAN IP address to the GLI cardwhich was not downloaded and log into the BTS through the otherGLI card.9Select the MGLI logged into in step 8, above, and download to it byrepeating step 5 for that card.10 Select the remaining GLI card and download to it, but do not enable itat this time.11 Re–install the 50 Ω termination removed from the frame–top LANOUT connector in step 2, above. Download Code and Data toNon–GLI DevicesNon–GLI devices can be downloaded individually or all equippeddevices can be downloaded with one action. Follow the procedure inTable 3-14 to download code and data to the non–GLI devices.When downloading multiple devices, the download mayfail for some of the devices (a time out occurs). Thesedevices can be downloaded separately after completing themultiple download.CSM devices are RAM code–loaded at the factory. RAMcode is downloaded to CSMs only if updating to a newersoftware version.NOTETable 3-14: Download Code and Data to Non–GLI DevicesnStep Action1Select all devices to be downloaded.2From the Device pull down menu, select Download>Code/Data.A status report displays the result of the download for each selecteddevice.3 Click OK to close the status window when downloading is complete.3
Download the BTS – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 3-37DRAFTTable 3-14: Download Code and Data to Non–GLI DevicesnActionStepNOTE– After the download has started, the device being downloadedchanges to blue. If the download is completed successfully, thedevice changes to yellow (OOS-RAM with code loaded).– After a BBX, CSM or MCC is successfully downloaded withcode and has changed to OOS-RAM, the status LED should berapidly flashing GREEN.– The command in Step 2 loads both code and data. Data can bedownloaded without doing a code download anytime a device isOOS–RAM using the command in Step 4.4To download the firmware application data to each device, select thetarget device and select: Device>Download>DataSelect CSM Clock Source andEnable CSMsA CSM can have three different clock sources. The Clock Sourcefunction can be used to select the clock source from each of the threeinputs. This function is only used if the clock source for a CSM needs tobe changed. The Clock Source function provides the following clocksource options:SLocal GPSSMate GPSSRemote GPSSHSO (only for sources 2 & 3)SHSOX (only for sources 2 & 3)S10 MHz (only for sources 2 & 3)SNONE (only for sources 2 & 3)PrerequisitesMGLI=INS_ACTCSM= OOS_RAM or INS_ACTFollow the procedure in Table 3-15 to select a CSM Clock Source.Table 3-15: Select CSM Clock SourcenStep Action1Select the applicable CSM(s).2Click on Device in the BTS menu bar and select CSM/MAWI > Select Clock Source... in the pull down menu – aclock source selection window is displayed.. . . continued on next page3
Download the BTS – continued 3-38 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTTable 3-15: Select CSM Clock SourcenActionStep3Select the applicable clock source in the Clock Reference Sourcepick lists. Uncheck the related check boxes for Clock ReferenceSources 2 and 3 if the displayed pick list items should not be used.4Click on the OK button – a status report window displays the resultsof the selection action.5Click on the OK button to close the status report window. For non–RGPS sites only, verify the CSM configured withthe GPS receiver “daughter board” is installed in theCSM–1 slot before continuing.NOTEEnable CSMsCSMs are code loaded at the factory. This data is retainedin EEPROM. The download code procedure is required inthe event it becomes necessary to code load CSMs withupdated software versions. Use the status function todetermine the current code load versions.The CSM(s) to be enabled must have been downloadedwith code (Yellow, OOS–RAM) and data.NOTEEach BTS CSM system features two CSM boards per site. In a typicaloperation, the primary CSM locks its Digital Phase Locked Loop(DPLL) circuits to GPS signals. These signals are generated by either anon–board GPS module (RF–GPS) or a remote GPS receiver (R–GPS).The CSM2 card is required when using the R–GPS. The GPS receiver(mounted on CSM–1) is the primary timing reference and synchronizesthe entire cellular system. CSM–2 provides redundancy but does nothave a GPS receiver.The BTS may be equipped with a remote GPS, LORAN–C, HSO 10MHz Rubidium source, or HSOX for expansion frames, which the CSMcan use as a secondary timing reference. In all cases, the CSM monitorsand determines what reference to use at a given time.Follow the procedure in Table 3-16 to enable the CSMs.3
Download the BTS – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 3-39DRAFTTable 3-16: Enable CSMsnStep Action1Verify the CSM(s) have been downloaded with code (Yellow, OOS–RAM) and data.2Click on the target CSM.From the Device pull down, select Enable.NOTE– If equipped with two CSMs, enable CSM–2 first and then CSM–1. A status report confirmschange in the device(s) status. Click OK to close the status window.– FAIL may be shown in the status table for enable action. If Waiting For Phase Lock is shownin the Description field, the CSM changes to the enabled state after phase lock is achieved.CSM–1 houses the GPS receiver. The enable sequence can take up to one hour to complete.– The GPS satellite system satellites are not in a geosynchronous orbit and are maintained andoperated by the United States Department of Defense (D.O.D.). The D.O.D. periodicallyalters satellite orbits; therefore, satellite trajectories are subject to change. A GPS receiver thatis INS contains an “almanac” that is updated periodically to take these changes into account.– If an installed GPS receiver has not been updated for a number of weeks, it may take up toone hour for the GPS receiver “almanac” to be updated.– Once updated, the GPS receiver must track at least four satellites and obtain (hold) a 3-Dposition fix for a minimum of 45 seconds before the CSM will come in-service. (In somecases, the GPS receiver needs to track only one satellite, depending on accuracy mode setduring the data load.)– If equipped with two CSMs, the LMF should display CSM-1 as bright GREEN (INS–ACT)and CSM–2 as dark green (INS–STB). After the CSMs have been successfully enabled, thePWR/ALM LEDs are steady green (alternating green/red indicates the card is in an alarmstate).3If more than an hour has passed, refer to Table 3-20 to determine the cause.Enable MCCsFollow the procedure in Table 3-17 to enable the MCCs.The MGLI, and primary CSM must be downloaded andenabled (IN–SERVICE ACTIVE), before downloading andenabling the MCC.NOTETable 3-17: Enable MCCsnStep Action1Verify the MCC(s) have been downloaded with code (Yellow,OOS–RAM) and data.2Select the MCCs to be enabled or from the Select pulldown menuchoose MCCs.3From the Device menu, select Enable – a status report confirmschange in the device(s) status.3
Download the BTS – continued 3-40 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTTable 3-17: Enable MCCsnActionStep4Click on OK to close the status report window.Enable Redundant GLIsFollow the procedure in Table 3-18 to enable the redundant GLI(s).Table 3-18: Enable Redundant GLIsnStep Action1Select the target redundant GLI(s).2From the Device menu, select Enable – a status report windowconfirms the change in the device(s) status and the enabled GLI(s) isgreen.3Click on OK to close the status report window.3
CSM System Time/GPS and HSO Verification5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 3-41DRAFTCSM & HSO BackgroundThe primary function of the Clock Synchronization Manager (CSM)boards (slots 1 and 2) is to maintain CDMA system time. The CSM inslot 1 is the primary timing source while slot 2 provides redundancy. TheCSM2 card (CSM second generation) is required when using the remoteGPS receiver (R–GPS). R–GPS uses a GPS receiver in the antenna headthat has a digital output to the CSM2 card. CSM2 can have a daughtercard as a local GPS receiver to support an RF–GPS signal.The CSM2 switches between the primary and redundant units (slots 1and 2) upon failure or command. CDMA Clock DistributionCards (CCDs) buffer and distribute even–second reference and 19.6608MHz clocks. CCD–1 is married to CSM–1 and CCD–2 is married toCSM 2. A failure on CSM–1 or CCD–1 cause the system to switch toredundant CSM–2 and CCD–2.In a typical operation, the primary CSM locks its Digital Phase LockedLoop (DPLL) circuits to GPS signals. These signals are generated byeither an on–board GPS module (RF–GPS) or a remote GPS receiver(R–GPS). The CSM2 card is required when using the R–GPS. DPLLcircuits employed by the CSM provide switching between the primaryand redundant unit upon request. Synchronization between the primaryand redundant CSM cards, as well as the HSO back–up source, providesexcellent reliability and performance.Each CSM board features an ovenized, crystal oscillator that provides19.6608 MHz clock, even second tick reference, and 3 MHz sinewavereference, referenced to the selected synchronization source (GPS,Receiver, or High Stability Oscillator (HSO), T1 Span, or externalreference oscillator sources). The 3 MHz signals are also routed to theRDM EXP 1A & 1B connectors on the top interconnect panel fordistribution to co–located frames at the site.Fault management has the capability of switching between the GPSsynchronization source and the HSO backup source in the event of aGPS receiver failure on CSM–1. During normal operation, the CSM–1board selects GPS as the primary source (see Table 3-20). The sourceselection can also be overridden via the LMF or by the system software.All boards are mounted in the C–CCP shelf at the top of the BTS frame.Figure 1-14 illustrates the location of the boards in the BTS frame.Front Panel LEDsThe status of the LEDs on the CSM boards are as follows:SSteady Green – Master CSM locked to GPS (INS).SRapidly Flashing Green – Standby CSM locked to GPS (STBY).SFlashing Green/Rapidly Flashing Red – CSM OOS_RAM attemptingto lock on GPS signal.SRapidly Flashing Green and Red – Alarm condition exists. TroubleNotifications (TNs) are currently being reported to the GLI.3
CSM System Time/GPS and HSO Verification – continued 3-42 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTHigh Stability OscillatorCSM and HSO – The CSM handles the overall configuration and statusmonitoring functions of the HSO. In the event of GPS failure, the HSOis capable of maintaining synchronization initially established by theGPS reference signal.HSO – The HSO is a high stability 10 MHz oscillator with the necessaryinterface to the CSMs. The HSO is typically installed in thosegeographical areas not covered by the LORAN–C system. Since theHSO is a free–standing oscillator, system time can only be maintainedfor 24 hours after 24 hours of GPS lock.Upgrades and Expansions: HSO2/HSOXHSO2 (second generation cards) both export a timing signal to theexpansion or logical BTS frames. The associated expansion or logicalframes require an HSO–expansion (HSOX). The HSOX accepts inputfrom the starter frame and interfaces with the CSM cards in theexpansion frame. HSO, HSO2, and HSOX use the same source code insource selection (see Table 3-19).Allow the base site and test equipment to warm up for60 minutes after any interruption in oscillator power. CSMboard warm-up allows the oscillator oven temperature andoscillator frequency to stabilize prior to test. Testequipment warm-up allows the Rubidium standardtimebase to stabilize in frequency before any measurementsare made.NOTECSM Frequency VerificationThe objective of this procedure is the initial verification of the CSMboards before performing the RF path verification tests. Parts of thisprocedure will be repeated for final verification after the overalloptimization has been completed.Null Modem CableA null modem cable is required. It is connected between the LMFCOM1 port and the RS232–GPIB Interface box. Figure 3-11 shows thewiring detail for the null modem cable.3
CSM System Time/GPS and HSO Verification – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 3-43DRAFTFigure 3-11: Null Modem Cable Detail53278146GNDRXTXRTSCTSRSD/DCDDTRGNDTXRXRTSCTSRSD/DCDDTRON BOTH CONNEC-TORS SHORT PINS 7, 8;SHORT PINS 1, 4, & 69–PIN D–FEMALE 9–PIN D–FEMALE52378146 DSR DSRFW00362PrerequisitesEnsure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:SThe LMF is NOT logged into the BTS.SThe COM1 port is connected to the MMI port of the primary CSM viaa null modem board.Test Equipment Setup: GPS &HSO VerificationFollow the procedure in Table 3-19 to set up test equipment whilereferring toFigure 3-12 as required.Table 3-19: Test Equipment Setup (GPS & HSO Verification)Step Action1Perform one of the following operations:– For local GPS (RF–GPS), verify a CSM board with a GPS receiver is installed in primary CSMslot 1 and that CSM–1 is INS.This is verified by checking the board ejectors for kit number SGLN1145 on the board in slot 1.– For Remote GPS (RGPS), verify a CSM2 board is installed in primary slot 1 and that CSM–1 isINS.This is verified by checking the board ejectors for kit number SGLN4132ED (or later).2Remove CSM–2 (if installed) and connect a serial cable from the LMF COM 1 port (via null modemboard) to the MMI port on CSM–1.3Reinstall CSM–2.4Start an MMI communication session with CSM–1 by using the Windows desktop shortcut icon (seeTable 3-3)NOTEThe LMF program must not be running when a Hyperterminal session is started if COM1 is beingused for the MMI session.5When the terminal screen appears, press the <Enter> key until the CSM> prompt appears. 3
CSM System Time/GPS and HSO Verification – continued 3-44 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTFigure 3-12: CSM MMI terminal connectionNULL MODEMBOARD(TRN9666A)RS–232 SERIALMODEM CABLEDB9–TO–DB25ADAPTERCOM1LMFNOTEBOOKFW00372CSM board shownremoved from frame19.6 MHZ TESTPOINT REFERENCE(NOTE 1)EVEN SECONDTICK TEST POINTREFERENCEGPS RECEIVERANTENNA INPUTGPS RECEIVERMMI SERIALPORTANTENNA COAXCABLEREFERENCEOSCILLATOR9–PIN TO 9–PINRS–232 CABLENOTES:1. One LED on each CSM:Green = IN–SERVICE ACTIVEFast Flashing Green = OOS–RAMRed = Fault ConditionFlashing Green & Red = FaultGPS Initialization/VerificationFollow the procedure in Table 3-20 to initialize and verify proper GPSreceiver operation.PrerequisitesEnsure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:SThe LMF is not logged into the BTS.SThe COM1 port is connected to the MMI port of the primary CSM viaa null modem board (see Figure 3-12).SThe primary CSM and HSO (if equipped) have been warmed up for atleast 15 minutes.3
CSM System Time/GPS and HSO Verification – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 3-45DRAFTConnect the GPS antenna to the GPS RF connector ONLY.Damage to the GPS antenna and/or receiver can result ifthe GPS antenna is inadvertently connected to any otherRF connector.CAUTIONTable 3-20: GPS Initialization/VerificationStep Action1To verify that Clock alarms (0000), Dpll is locked and has a reference source, andGPS self test passed messages are displayed within the report, issue the following MMIcommandbstatus– Observe the following typical response:Clock Alarms (0000):DPLL is locked and has a reference source.GPS receiver self test result: passedTime since reset 0:33:11, time since power on: 0:33:112Enter the following command at the CSM> prompt to display the current status of the Loran and theGPS receivers.sources– Observe the following typical response for systems equipped with HSO:Num Source Name Type TO Good Status Last Phase Target Phase Valid––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––0 Local GPS Primary 4 Yes Good 3 0 Yes1HSO Backup 4 No N/A timed–out* Timed–out* No*NOTE “Timed–out” should only be displayed while the HSO is warming up. “Not–Present” or“Faulty” should not be displayed. If the HSO does not appear as one of the sources, then configure theHSO as a back–up source by entering the following command at the CSM> prompt:ss 1 12After a maximum of 15 minutes, the Rubidium oscillator should reach operational temperature and theLED on the HSO should now have changed from red to green. After the HSO front panel LED haschanged to green, enter sources <cr> at the CSM> prompt. Verify that the HSO is now a validsource by confirming that the bold text below matches the response of the “sources” command.The HSO should be valid within one (1) minute, assuming the DPLL is locked and the HSO rubidiumoscillator is fully warmed.Num Source Name Type TO Good Status Last Phase Target Phase Valid––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––0 Local GPS Primary 4 Yes Good 3 0 Yes1HSO Backup 4 Yes N/A xxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxx Yes3HSO information (underlined text above, verified from left to right) is usually the #1 reference source.If this is not the case, have the OMCR determine the correct BTS timing source has been identified inthe database by entering the display bts csmgen command and correct as required using the editcsm csmgen refsrc command.. . . continued on next page3
CSM System Time/GPS and HSO Verification – continued 3-46 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTTable 3-20: GPS Initialization/VerificationStep Action4NOTEIf any of the above mentioned areas fail, verify:– If LED is RED, verify that HSO had been powered up for at least 5 minutes. After oscillatortemperature is stable, LED should go GREEN Wait for this to occur before continuing !– If “timed out” is displayed in the Last Phase column, suspect the HSO output buffer or oscillatoris defective– Verify the HSO is FULLY SEATED and LOCKED to prevent any possible board warpage5Verify the following GPS information (underlined text above):– GPS information is usually the 0 reference source.– At least one Primary source must indicate “Status = good” and “Valid = yes” to bring site up.6Enter the following command at the CSM> prompt to verify that the GPS receiver is in tracking mode.gstatus– Observe the following typical response:24:06:08 GPS Receiver Control Task State: tracking satellites.24:06:08 Time since last valid fix: 0 seconds.24:06:08 24:06:08 Recent Change Data:24:06:08 Antenna cable delay 0 ns.24:06:08 Initial position: lat 117650000 msec, lon –350258000 msec, height 0 cm (GPS)24:06:08 Initial position accuracy (0): estimated.24:06:08 24:06:08 GPS Receiver Status:24:06:08 Position hold: lat 118245548 msec, lon –350249750 msec, height 20270 cm24:06:08 Current position: lat 118245548 msec, lon –350249750 msec, height 20270 cm(GPS)24:06:08 8 satellites tracked, receiving 8 satellites, 8 satellites visible.24:06:08 Current Dilution of Precision (PDOP or HDOP): 0.24:06:08 Date & Time: 1998:01:13:21:36:1124:06:08 GPS Receiver Status Byte: 0x0824:06:08 Chan:0, SVID: 16, Mode: 8, RSSI: 148, Status: 0xa824:06:08 Chan:1, SVID: 29, Mode: 8, RSSI: 132, Status: 0xa824:06:08 Chan:2, SVID: 18, Mode: 8, RSSI: 121, Status: 0xa824:06:08 Chan:3, SVID: 14, Mode: 8, RSSI: 110, Status: 0xa824:06:08 Chan:4, SVID: 25, Mode: 8, RSSI: 83, Status: 0xa824:06:08 Chan:5, SVID: 3, Mode: 8, RSSI: 49, Status: 0xa824:06:08 Chan:6, SVID: 19, Mode: 8, RSSI: 115, Status: 0xa824:06:08 Chan:7, SVID: 22, Mode: 8, RSSI: 122, Status: 0xa824:06:08 24:06:08 GPS Receiver Identification:24:06:08 COPYRIGHT 1991–1996 MOTOROLA INC. 24:06:08 SFTW P/N # 98–P36830P 24:06:08 SOFTWARE VER # 8 24:06:08 SOFTWARE REV # 8 24:06:08 SOFTWARE DATE 6 AUG 1996 24:06:08 MODEL # B3121P1115 24:06:08 HDWR P/N # _ 24:06:08 SERIAL # SSG0217769 24:06:08 MANUFACTUR DATE 6B07 24:06:08 OPTIONS LIST IB 24:06:08 The receiver has 8 channels and is equipped with TRAIM.. . . continued on next page3
CSM System Time/GPS and HSO Verification – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 3-47DRAFTTable 3-20: GPS Initialization/VerificationStep Action7Verify the following GPS information (shown above in underlined text):– At least 4 satellites are tracked, and 4 satellites are visible.– GPS Receiver Control Task State is “tracking satellites”. Do not continue until this occurs!– Dilution of Precision indication is not more that 30.Record the current position base site latitude, longitude, height and height reference (height referenceto Mean Sea Level (MSL) or GPS height (GPS). (GPS = 0 MSL = 1).8If steps 1 through 7 pass, the GPS is good.NOTEIf any of the above mentioned areas fail, verify that:– If Initial position accuracy is “estimated” (typical), at least 4 satellites must be tracked andvisible (1 satellite must be tracked and visible if actual lat, log, and height data for this site hasbeen entered into CDF or NEC files).– If Initial position accuracy is “surveyed”, position data currently in the CDF or NEC files isassumed to be accurate. GPS will not automatically survey and update its position.– The GPS antenna is not obstructed or misaligned.– GPS antenna connector center conductor measures approximately +5 Vdc with respect to theshield.– There is no more than 4.5 dB of loss between the GPS antenna OSX connector and the BTS frameGPS input.– Any lightning protection installed between GPS antenna and BTS frame is installed correctly.9Enter the following commands at the CSM> prompt to verify that the CSM is warmed up and that GPSacquisition has taken place.debug dpllp Observe the following typical response if the CSM is not warmed up (15 minutes from application ofpower) (If warmed–up proceed to step 10)CSM>DPLL Task Wait. 884 seconds left.DPLL Task Wait. 882 seconds left.DPLL Task Wait. 880 seconds left. ...........etc.NOTEThe warm command can be issued at the MMI port used to force the CSM into warm–up, but thereference oscillator will be unstable.. . . continued on next page3
CSM System Time/GPS and HSO Verification – continued 3-48 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTTable 3-20: GPS Initialization/VerificationStep Action10 Observe the following typical response if the CSM is warmed up.c:17486 off: –11, 3, 6 TK SRC:0 S0: 3 S1:–2013175,–2013175c:17486 off: –11, 3, 6 TK SRC:0 S0: 3 S1:–2013175,–2013175c:17470 off: –11, 1, 6 TK SRC:0 S0: 1 S1:–2013175,–2013175c:17486 off: –11, 3, 6 TK SRC:0 S0: 3 S1:–2013175,–2013175c:17470 off: –11, 1, 6 TK SRC:0 S0: 1 S1:–2013175,–2013175c:17470 off: –11, 1, 6 TK SRC:0 S0: 1 S1:–2013175,–201317511 Verify the following GPS information (underlined text above, from left to right):– Lower limit offset from tracked source variable is not less than –60 (equates to 3µs limit).– Upper limit offset from tracked source variable is not more than +60 (equates to 3µs limit).– TK SRC: 0 is selected, where SRC 0 = GPS.12 Enter the following commands at the CSM> prompt to exit the debug mode display.debug dpllp HSO Initialization/VerificationThe HSO module is a full–size card that resides in the C–CCP Shelf.This completely self contained high stability 10 MHz oscillatorinterfaces with the CSM via a serial communications link. The CSMhandles the overall configuration and status monitoring functions of theHSO. In the event of GPS failure, the HSO is capable of maintainingsynchronization initially established by the GPS reference signal for alimited time.The HSO is typically installed in those geographical areas not coveredby the LORAN–C system and provides the following major functions:SReference oscillator temperature and phase lock monitor circuitrySGenerates a highly stable 10 MHz sine wave.SReference divider circuitry converts 10 MHz sine wave to 10 MHzTTL signal, which is divided to provide a 1 PPS strobe to the CSM.PrerequisitesSThe LMF is not logged into the BTS.SThe COM1 port is connected to the MMI port of the primary CSM viaa null modem board.SThe primary CSM and the HSO (if equipped) have warmed up for 15minutes.If the BTS is equipped with an HSO, follow the procedure in Table 3-21to configure the HSO.3
CSM System Time/GPS and HSO Verification – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 3-49DRAFTTable 3-21: HSO Initialization/VerificationStep Action1At the BTS, slide the HSO card into the cage.NOTEThe LED on the HSO should light red for no longer than 15-minutes, then switch to green. The CSMmust be locked to GPS.2On the LMF at the CSM> prompt, enter sources <cr>.– Observe the following typical response for systems equipped with HSO:Num Source Name Type TO Good Status Last Phase Target Phase Valid––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––0 Local GPS Primary 4 Yes Good 0 0 Yes1 HSO Backup 4 Yes N/A xxxxxxx –69532 Yes2 Not usedCurrent reference source number: 0When the CSM is locked to GPS, verify that the HSO “Good” field is Yes and the “Valid” field is Yes.3If source “1” is not configured as HSO, enter at the CSM> prompt: ss 1 12 <cr>Check for Good in the Status field.4At the CSM> prompt, enter sources <cr>.Verify the HSO valid field is Yes. If not, repeat this step until the “Valid” status of Yes is returned. TheHSO should be valid within one (1) minute, assuming the DPLL is locked and the HSO Rubidiumoscillator is fully warmed.3
Test Equipment Set Up 3-50 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTConnecting Test Equipment tothe BTSThe following equipment is required to perform optimization:SLMFSTest setSDirectional coupler and attenuatorSRF cables and connectorsSNull modem cable (see Figure 3-11)SGPIB interface boxRefer to Table 3-22 and Table 3-23 for an overview of connections fortest equipment currently supported by the LMF. In addition, see thefollowing figures:SFigure 3-15 and Figure 3-16 show the test set connections for TXcalibration.SFigure 3-18 and Figure 3-19 show test set connections for IS–95 A/Boptimization/ATP tests.SFigure 3-20 shows test set connections for IS–95 A/B andCDMA 2000 optimization/ATP tests.SFigure 3-22 and Figure 3-23 show typical TX and RX ATP setup witha directional coupler.Test Equipment GPIB AddressSettingsAll test equipment is controlled by the LMF through an IEEE–488/GPIBbus. To communicate on the bus, each piece of test equipment must havea GPIB address set which the LMF will recognize. The standard addresssettings used by the LMF for the various types of test equipment itemsare as follows:SSignal generator address: 1SPower meter address: 13SCommunications system analyzer: 18SSignal generator address: 19Using the procedures included in the Setting GPIB Addresses section ofAppendix F, verify and, if necessary, change the GPIB address of eachpiece of test equipment used to match the above.Supported Test EquipmentTo prevent damage to the test equipment, all TX testconnections must be through the directional coupler andin-line attenuator as shown in the test setup illustrations.CAUTION3
Test Equipment Set Up – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 3-51DRAFTIS–95 A/B TestingOptimization and ATP testing for IS–95A/B may be performed usingone of the following test sets:SCyberTestSHewlett–Packard HP 8935SHewlett–Packard HP 8921 and HP 437B or Gigatronics Power MeterSAdvantest R3465 and HP 437B or Gigatronics Power MeterThe equipment listed above cannot be used for CDMA 2000 testing.CDMA 2000 TestingIS–95 C is the same as CDMA 2000.NOTEOptimization and ATP testing for IS–95A/B and CDMA2000 1X sites orcarriers may be performed using the following test equipment:SAdvantest R3267 Analyzer with Advantest R3562 Signal GeneratorSAgilent E4406A with E4432B Signal GeneratorSAgilent 8935 series E6380A communications test set (formerly HP8935) with option 200 or R2K and with E4432B signal generator for1X FERSAgilent E7495A communications test setThe E4406A/E4432B pair, or the R3267/R3562 pair, should beconnected together using a GPIB cable. In addition, the R3562 andR3267 should be connected with a serial cable from the Serial I/O to theSerial I/O. This test equipment is capable of performing tests in bothIS–95 A/B mode and CDMA 2000 mode if the required options areinstalled.Optional test equipmentSSpectrum Analyzer (HP8594E) – can be used to perform cablecalibration.Test Equipment PreparationSee Appendix F for specific steps to prepare each type of test set andpower meter to perform calibration and ATP.The Agilent E7495A communications test set requires additional setupand preparation. This is described in detail in Appendix F.Test Equipment ConnectionChartsTo use the following charts to identify necessary test equipmentconnections, locate the communications system analyzer being used inthe COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM ANALYZER columns, and readdown the column. Where a dot appears in the column, connect one endof the test cable to that connector. Follow the horizontal line to locate theend connection(s), reading up the column to identify the appropriateequipment and/or BTS connector.3
Test Equipment Set Up – continued 3-52 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTIS–95A/B–only Test Equipment ConnectionsTable 3-22 depicts the interconnection requirements for currentlyavailable test equipment supporting IS–95A/B only which meetsMotorola standards and is supported by the LMF.Table 3-22: IS–95A/B–only Test Equipment InterconnectionCOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM ANALYZER ADDITIONAL TEST EQUIPMENTSIGNAL Cyber–TestAdvantestR3465 HP 8921AHP 8921W/PCSPowerMeterGPIBInterface LMFAttenuator&DirectionalCoupler BTSEVEN SECONDSYNCHRONIZATIONEVENSEC REFEVEN SECSYNC INEVENSECONDSYNC INEVENSECONDSYNC IN19.6608 MHZCLOCKTIMEBASE INCDMATIME BASEINCDMATIME BASEINCDMATIME BASEINCONTROLIEEE 488 BUSIEEE488 GPIB GPIB SERIALPORTHP–IBHP–IBTX TESTCABLESRFIN/OUTINPUT50WTX1–6RFIN/OUTRFIN/OUT20 DBATTEN.BTSPORTRX TESTCABLESRFGEN OUTRF OUT50WRX1–6DUPLEXOUTRF OUTONLYSYNCMON-ITORFREQMON-ITORHP–IBTX Test cables are set up as follows: TX 1–3 for 3-sectorBTS and TX 1–6 for 6-sector.RX Test Cables are set up as follows: RX 1–6 for 3-sectorand RX 1–12 for 6-sector.NOTE3
Test Equipment Set Up – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 3-53DRAFTCDMA2000 1X/IS–95A/B–capable Test EquipmentConnectionsTable 3-23 depicts the interconnection requirements for currentlyavailable test equipment supporting both CDMA 2000 1X and IS–95A/Bwhich meets Motorola standards and is supported by the LMF.Table 3-23: CDMA2000 1X/IS–95A/B Test Equipment InterconnectionCOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM ANALYZER ADDITIONAL TEST EQUIPMENTSIGNALAgilent8935 (Op-tion 200 or R2K)AgilentE7495AAdvantestR3267AgilentE4406AAgilentE4432BSignalGeneratorAdvant-estR3562SignalGenera-torPowerMeterGPIBInter-face LMF30 dBDirectionalCoupler &20 dB Pad* BTSEVEN SECOND SYNCHRONIZATION EXTTRIG INEXT TRIGTRIGGER IN19.6608 MHZCLOCKMOD TIMEBASE INEXT REFINCONTROLIEEE 488 BUSIEEE488 GPIB HP–IB GPIBSERIALPORTHP–IBTX TESTCABLES RFIN/OUT RF IN TX1–6RF INPUT50 OHM30 DB COUPLERAND20 DB ATTENRX TESTCABLES RF OUT50 OHMRF OUT50–OHM RX1–6RF OUTONLYSYNCMONITORFREQMONITORPATTERNTRIG INGPIBRF OUTPUT50 OHMRF OUTPUT50–OHM10 MHZ IN10 MHZ OUT(SWITCHED) 10 MHZ IN10 MHZOUT10 MHZSERIALI/OSERIALI/OSIGNAL SOURCECONTROLLEDSERIAL I/OEVENSECONDSYNC INEXT REFINHP–IBRF IN/OUTDUPLEXOUT *SYNTHEREF IN* WHEN USED ALONE, THE AGILENT 8935 WITH OPTION 200 OR R2K SUPPORTS IS–95A/B RX TESTING BUT NOT CDMA2000 1X RX TESTING.EVENSECONDSYNC INPORT 1RF OUTPORT 2RF IN3
Test Equipment Set Up – continued 3-54 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTEquipment Warm-upWarm-up BTS equipment for a minimum of 60 minutesprior to performing the BTS optimization procedure. Thisassures BTS site stability and contributes to optimizationaccuracy. (Time spent running initial power-up,hardware/firmware audit, and BTS download counts aswarm-up time.)NOTEBefore installing any test equipment directly to any BTSTX OUT connector, verify there are NO CDMA BBXchannels keyed. At active sites, have the OMC-R/CBSCplace the antenna (sector) assigned to the PA under testOOS. Failure to do so can result in serious personal injuryand/or equipment damage.WARNINGAutomatic Cable CalibrationSet–upFigure 3-13 and Figure 3-14 show the cable calibration setup for varioussupported test sets. The left side of the diagram depicts the location ofthe input and output ports of each test set, and the right side details theset up for each test.Manual Cable CalibrationIf manual cable calibration is required, refer to the procedures inAppendix F.3
Test Equipment Set Up – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 3-55DRAFTFigure 3-13: Cable Calibration Test SetupMotorola CyberTestHewlett–Packard Model HP 8935Advantest Model R3465DUPLEXOUTRF OUTPUT50–OHMRF INPUT50–OHMRF GEN OUTANT INANTINSUPPORTED TEST SETS100–WATT (MIN)NON–RADIATINGRF LOADTESTSETA. SHORT CABLE CALSHORTCABLEB. RX TEST SETUPTESTSETC. TX TEST SETUPCALIBRATION SET UPN–N FEMALEADAPTERTXCABLETXCABLESHORTCABLENote: The Directional Coupler is not used with theCybertest Test Set. The TX cable is connecteddirectly to the Cybertest Test Set.A 10dB attenuator must be used with the short testcable for cable calibration with the CyberTest TestSet. The 10dB attenuator is used only for the cablecalibration procedure, not with the test cables forTX calibration and ATP tests.TESTSETRXCABLESHORTCABLEFW00089Hewlett–Packard Model HP 8921ADIRECTIONAL COUPLER (30 DB)N–N FEMALEADAPTERDUPLEXOUTRF IN/OUT3
Test Equipment Set Up – continued 3-56 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTFigure 3-14: Cable Calibration Test Setup (Advantest R3267, Agilent E4406A)SUPPORTED TEST SETS100–WATT (MIN)NON–RADIATINGRF LOADTESTSETA. SHORT CABLE CALSHORTCABLEB. RX TEST SETUPTESTSETC. TX TEST SETUPCALIBRATION SET UPN–N FEMALEADAPTERTXCABLETXCABLESHORTCABLETESTSETRXCABLESHORTCABLEREF FW00089DIRECTIONAL COUPLER (30 DB)N–N FEMALEADAPTERRF INRF OUTAdvantest R3267 (Top) and R3562 (Bottom)EXT TRIG INMOD TIME BASE IN(EXT REF IN)RFINPUT 50OHMRFOUTPUT50 OHMAgilent E4432B (Top) and E4406A (Bottom)3
Test Equipment Set Up – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 3-57DRAFTSet-up for TX CalibrationFigure 3-15 and Figure 3-16 show the test set connections for TXcalibration.Figure 3-15: TX Calibration Test Setup (CyberTest, HP 8935, and Advantest)Motorola CyberTestHewlett–Packard Model HP 8935TEST SETS TRANSMIT (TX) SET UPFRONT PANELRFIN/OUTRF IN/OUTHP–IBTO GPIBBOXRS232–GPIBINTERFACE BOXINTERNAL PCMCIAETHERNET CARDGPIBCABLECOMMUNICATIONSTEST SETCONTROLIEEE 488GPIB BUSUNIVERSAL TWISTEDPAIR (UTP) CABLE(RJ45 CONNECTORS)RS232NULLMODEMCABLEOUTS MODEDATA FORMATBAUD RATEGPIB ADRSG MODEONTEST SETINPUT/OUTPUTPORTSBTS100–WATT (MIN)NON–RADIATINGRF LOADINTXTESTCABLECDMALMFDIP SWITCH SETTINGS10BASET/10BASE2CONVERTERLANBLANATX TESTCABLETX ANTENNAPORTPOWERMETER(OPTIONAL)*NOTE: THE DIRECTIONAL COUPLER IS NOT USED WITH THECYBERTEST TEST SET. THE TX CABLE IS CONNECTED DIRECTLYTO THE CYBERTEST TEST SET.Advantest Model R3465INPUT50–OHMGPIBCONNECTS TOBACK OF UNIT* A POWER METER CAN BE USED IN PLACEOF THE COMMUNICATIONS TEST SET FOR TXCALIBRATION/AUDITPOWERSENSORREF FW0009430 DBDIRECTIONALCOUPLER3
Test Equipment Set Up – continued 3-58 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTFigure 3-16: TX Calibration Test Setup (Advantest R3267 and Agilent E4406A)TEST SETS TRANSMIT (TX) SET UPRS232–GPIBINTERFACE BOXINTERNAL PCMCIAETHERNET CARDGPIBCABLECOMMUNICATIONSTEST SETCONTROLIEEE 488GPIB BUSUNIVERSAL TWISTEDPAIR (UTP) CABLE(RJ45 CONNECTORS)RS232NULLMODEMCABLEOUTS MODEDATA FORMATBAUD RATEGPIB ADRSG MODEONTEST SETINPUT/OUTPUTPORTSBTS100–WATT (MIN)NON–RADIATINGRF LOADINTXTESTCABLECDMALMFDIP SWITCH SETTINGS10BASET/10BASE2CONVERTERLANBLANATX TESTCABLETX ANTENNAPORTPOWERMETER(OPTIONAL)** A POWER METER CAN BE USED IN PLACEOF THE COMMUNICATIONS TEST SET FOR TXCALIBRATION/AUDITPOWERSENSORREF FW0009430 DBDIRECTIONALCOUPLERAgilent E4406AAdvantest Model R3267RF INRF INPUT50 Ω3
Test Equipment Set Up – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 3-59DRAFTFigure 3-17: TX Calibration Test Setup – Agilent E7495A (IS–95A/B and CDMA2000 1X)TEST SETS TRANSMIT (TX) SET UPINTERNAL PCMCIAETHERNET CARDBTSCDMALMF10BASET/10BASE2CONVERTERLANBLANARXANTENNACONNECTORSYNCMONITORCSMTXANTENNACONNECTOR50 ΩTERM.TX TESTCABLEDIRECTIONALCOUPLER(30 DB)100–WATT (MIN.)NON–RADIATINGRF LOADTX TESTCABLENOTE: IF BTS IS EQUIPPEDWITH DUPLEXED RX/TXSIGNALS, CONNECT THE TXTEST CABLE TO THEDUPLEXED ANTENNACONNECTOR.POWERSENSOR2O DB IN–LINEATTENUATORETHERNET HUBUNIVERSAL TWISTED PAIR (UTP)CABLE (RJ45 CONNECTORS)Agilent E7495APORT 1RF OUTPORT 2RF INSYNC MONITOREVEN SEC TICKPULSE REFERENCEFROM CSM BOARDUse onlyAgilent suppliedpower adapterGPSGPIOSerial 1Serial 2Power REF50 MHzSensorExt RefInEven SecondSync InAntennaPort 1RF Out / SWRPort 2RF InINTERNALETHERNETCARDCOMMUNICATIONSsystemanalyzerPOWER METERPORT 2RF INPORT 1RF OUT3
Test Equipment Set Up – continued 3-60 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTSetup for Optimization/ATPFigure 3-18 and Figure 3-19 show test set connections for IS–95 A/Boptimization/ATP tests. Figure 3-20 shows test set connections forIS–95 A/B and CDMA 2000 optimization/ATP tests.3
Test Equipment Set Up – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 3-61DRAFTFigure 3-18: IS–95 A/B Optimization/ATP Test Setup Calibration Using Directional Coupler(CyberTest, HP 8935 and Advantest)Motorola CyberTestHewlett–Packard Model HP 8935DUPLEX OUTTEST SETS Optimization/ATP SET UPRFIN/OUTSYNC MONITOREVEN SEC TICKPULSE REFERENCEFROM CSM BOARDFREQ MONITOR19.6608 MHZ CLOCKREFERENCE FROMCSM BOARDRF IN/OUTHP–IBTO GPIBBOXAdvantest Model R3465INPUT50–OHMGPIB CONNECTSTO BACK OF UNITNOTE: The Directional Coupler is not usedwith the Cybertest Test Set. The TX cable isconnected directly to the Cybertest Test set.RF OUTSYNC MONITOREVEN SEC TICKPULSE REFERENCEFROM CSM BOARDFREQ MONITOR19.6608 MHZ CLOCKREFERENCE FROMCSM BOARDSYNC MONITOREVEN SEC TICKPULSE REFERENCEFROM CSM BOARDFREQ MONITOR19.6608 MHZ CLOCKREFERENCE FROMCSM BOARDRFOUTRX ANTENNAPORT TX ANTENNAPORTRS232 NULLMODEMCABLEBTSTXTESTCABLE10BASET/10BASE2CONVERTERLANBLANARXTESTCABLECommunications testsetIEEE 488GPIB BUSINTEST SETINPUT/OUTPUTPORTSOUTNOTE: IF BTS RX/TX SIGNALS AREDUPLEXED (4800E): BOTH THE TX AND RXTEST CABLES CONNECT TO THE DUPLEXEDANTENNA GROUP.100–WATT (MIN)NON–RADIATINGRF LOAD10 DB PADEVENSECOND/SYNCINCDMATIMEBASE INFREQMONITORSYNCMONITORCSM30 DBDIRECTIONALCOUPLERRS232–GPIBINTERFACE BOXS MODEDATA FORMATBAUD RATEGPIB ADRS G MODEONDIP SWITCH SETTINGSINTERNAL PCMCIAETHERNET CARDUNIVERSAL TWISTEDPAIR (UTP) CABLE(RJ45 CONNECTORS)CDMALMFREF FW00096ADVANTEST NOT SUPPORTED3
Test Equipment Set Up – continued 3-62 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTFigure 3-19: Optimization/ATP Test Setup HP 8921ATEST SET Optimization/ATP SET UPRX ANTENNAPORTTX ANTENNAPORTRS232–GPIBINTERFACE BOXINTERNAL PCMCIAETHERNET CARDGPIBCABLEUNIVERSAL TWISTEDPAIR (UTP) CABLE(RJ45 CONNECTORS)RS232 NULLMODEMCABLES MODEDATA FORMATBAUD RATEGPIB ADRS G MODEONBTSTXTESTCABLECDMALMFDIP SWITCH SETTINGS10BASET/10BASE2CONVERTERLANBLANARXTESTCABLECommunications testsetIEEE 488GPIB BUSINTEST SETINPUT/OUTPUTPORTSOUTNOTE: IF BTS RX/TX SIGNALS AREDUPLEXED (4800E): BOTH THE TX AND RXTEST CABLES CONNECT TO THE DUPLEXEDANTENNA GROUP.100–WATT (MIN)NON–RADIATINGRF LOAD10 DB PADEVENSECOND/SYNCINCDMATIMEBASE INFREQMONITORSYNCMONITORCSMREF FW00097GPIBCONNECTSTO BACK OFUNITSYNC MONITOREVEN SEC TICKPULSE REFERENCEFROM CSM BOARDFREQ MONITOR19.6608 MHZ CLOCKREFERENCE FROMCSM BOARDHewlett–Packard Model HP 8921A30 DBDIRECTIONALCOUPLERRFIN/OUTRF OUTONLY3
Test Equipment Set Up – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 3-63DRAFTFigure 3-20: IS–95 A/B and CDMA 2000 Optimization/ATP Test Setup Using Directional CouplerTEST SETS Optimization/ATP SET UPRS232–GPIBINTERFACE BOXINTERNAL PCMCIAETHERNET CARDGPIBCABLEUNIVERSAL TWISTEDPAIR (UTP) CABLE(RJ45 CONNECTORS)RS232 NULLMODEMCABLES MODEDATA FORMATBAUD RATEGPIB ADRS G MODEONBTSCDMALMFDIP SWITCH SETTINGS10BASET/10BASE2CONVERTERLANBLANACommunicationstest setIEEE 488GPIB BUSINOUTNOTE: IF BTS RX/TX SIGNALS AREDUPLEXED: BOTH THE TX AND RX TESTCABLES CONNECT TO THE DUPLEXEDANTENNA GROUP.EVENSECOND/SYNC INEXTREF INFREQMONITORSYNCMONITORCSMREF FW00758RFINPUT50 ΩRFOUTPUT50 ΩAgilent E4432B (Top) and E4406A (Bottom)FREQ MONITOR19.6608 MHZ CLOCKREFERENCE FROMCSM BOARDSYNC MONITOREVEN SEC TICKPULSE REFERENCEFROM CSM BOARDBNC“T”TO TRIGGER INON REAR OFTRANSMITTERTESTERTO PATTERN TRIG INON REAR OF SIGNALGENERATOREXT REF INON REAR OFTRANSMITTERTESTER RF INRF OUTAdvantest R3267 (Top) and R3562 (Bottom)FREQ MONITOR19.6608 MHZ CLOCKREFERENCE FROMCSM BOARDSYNC MONITOREVEN SEC TICKPULSE REFERENCEFROM CSM BOARDBNC“T”SYNTHEREF INTO EXT TRIG ON REAR OFSPECTRUMANALYZERsIGNALGENERATORRX ANTENNAPORTTX ANTENNAPORTRXTESTCABLE100–WATT (MIN)NON–RADIATINGRF LOAD10 DB PAD30 DBDIRECTIONALCOUPLERTXTESTCABLEBNC“T”19.6608MHZCLOCKEXT TRIG INMOD TIME BASE IN(EXT REF IN)10 MHZREF OUTNOTE:SYNTHE REF IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR ISCONNECTED TO 10 MHZ REF OUT ON REAR OFSPECTRUM ANALYZER.10MHZIN10MHZOUTNOTE:FOR MANUAL TESTING, GPIB MUST BE CONNECTEDBETWEEN THE ANALYZER AND THE SIGNALGENERATOR3
Test Equipment Set Up – continued 3-64 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTFigure 3-21: IS–95A/B and CDMA2000 1X Optimization/ATP Test Setup – Agilent E7495ATEST SET ATP TEST SET UPINTERNAL PCMCIAETHERNET CARDUNIVERSAL TWISTED PAIR (UTP)CABLE (RJ45 CONNECTORS)BTSCDMALMF10BASET/10BASE2CONVERTERLANBLANAINTERNALETHERNETCARDRF INPUT 50 ΩOR INPUT 50 ΩSYNCMONITORCSMCOMMUNICATIONSsystemanalyzer50 ΩTERMTX TESTDIRECTIONALCOUPLER(30 DB)100–WATT (MIN.)NON–RADIATINGRF LOADTX TESTNOTE: IF BTS IS EQUIPPEDWITH DUPLEXED RX/TXSIGNALS, CONNECT THE TXTEST CABLE TO THE DUPLEXEDANTENNA CONNECTOR.2O DB IN–LINEATTENUATORETHERNET HUBRX TESTRX TESTRXANTENNACONNECTORTXANTENNACONNECTORTESTCABLESNOTE: USE THE SAMECABLE SET FOR TX AND RXATP. SWITCH THE CABLESDURING ALL ATP TESTS ASSHOWN.POWER METERPORT 2RF INPORT 1RF OUTAgilent E7495APORT 1RF OUTPORT 2RF INSYNC MONITOREVEN SEC TICKPULSE REFERENCEFROM CSM BOARDUse onlyAgilent suppliedpower adapterGPSGPIOSerial 1Serial 2Power REF50 MHzSensorExt RefInEven SecondSync InAntennaPort 1RF Out / SWRPort 2RF InTX ATP SetupFigure 3-22 shows a typical TX ATP setup and Figure 3-23 shows atypical RX ATP setup.3
Test Equipment Set Up – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 3-65DRAFTFigure 3-22: Typical TX ATP Setup with Directional Coupler (shown with and without RFDS)30 DBDIRECTIONALCOUPLER40W NON–RADIATINGRF LOADOUTPUTPORTRVS (REFLECTED)PORT 50–OHMTERMINATIONFWD(INCIDENT)PORTBTS INPUTPORT TX TESTCABLEConnect TX test cable betweenthe directional coupler input portand the appropriate TX antennadirectional coupler connector.TX ANTENNA DIRECTIONAL COUPLERSRFDS RX (RFM TX) COUPLEROUTPUTS TO RFDS FWD(BTS)ASU2 (SHADED) CONNECTORSRX(RFM TX)TX(RFM RX)COBRA RFDS Detail123RF FEED LINE TODIRECTIONALCOUPLERREMOVEDCommunications testset INAppropriate test sets and the portnames for all model test sets aredescribed in Table 3-22.TXTESTCABLETX RF FROM BTS FRAMETESTDIRECTIONALCOUPLERNOTE:THIS SETUP APPLIES TO BOTHSTARTER AND EXPANSION FRAMES. ti-CDMA-WP-00121-v01-ildoc-ftw3
Test Equipment Set Up – continued 3-66 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTFigure 3-23: Typical RX ATP Setup with Directional Coupler (shown with or without RFDS)RX RF FROM BTSFRAME341256Connect RX test cable betweenthe test set and the appropriateRX antenna directional coupler.RX ANTENNA DIRECTIONAL COUPLERSRF FEED LINE TOTX ANTENNAREMOVEDCommunications testsetRFDS TX (RFM RX) COUPLEROUTPUTS TO RFDS FWD(BTS)ASU1 (SHADED) CONNECTORSRX(RFM TX)TX(RFM RX)COBRA RFDS DetailOUTAppropriate test sets and the portnames for all model test sets aredescribed in Table 3-22.RX TestCableNOTE:THIS SETUP APPLIES TO BOTHSTARTER AND EXPANSION FRAMES.FW001153
Test Set Calibration5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 3-67DRAFTTest Set CalibrationBackgroundProper test equipment calibration ensures that the test equipment andassociated test cables do not introduce measurement errors, and thatmeasurements are correct.If the test set being used to interface with the BTS has beencalibrated and maintained as a set, this procedure does notneed to be performed. (Test Set includes LMF terminal,communications test set, additional test equipment,associated test cables, and adapters.)NOTEThis procedure must be performed prior to beginning the optimization.Verify all test equipment (including all associated test cables andadapters actually used to interface all test equipment and the BTS) hasbeen calibrated and maintained as a set.If any piece of test equipment, test cable, or RF adapter,that makes up the calibrated test equipment set, has beenreplaced, re-calibration must be performed. Failure to do socan introduce measurement errors, resulting in incorrectmeasurements and degradation to system performance.CAUTIONCalibration of the communications test set (or equivalenttest equipment) must be performed at the site beforecalibrating the overall test set. Calibrate the test equipmentafter it has been allowed to warm–up and stabilize for aminimum of 60 minutes.NOTECalibration ProceduresIncludedAutomaticProcedures included in this section use the LMF automated calibrationroutine to determine path losses of the supported communicationsanalyzer, power meter, associated test cables, adapters, and (if used)antenna switch that make up the overall calibrated test equipment set.After calibration, the gain/loss offset values are stored in a testmeasurement offset file on the LMF computer.3
Test Set Calibration – continued 3-68 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTManualAgilent E4406A Transmitter Tester – The E4406A does not supportthe power level zeroing calibration performed by the LMF. If thisinstrument is to be used for Bay Level Offset calibration and calibrationis attempted with the LMF Calibrate Test Equipment function, theLMF will return a status window failure message stating that zeroingpower is not supported by the E4406A. Refer to the EquipmentCalibration section of Appendix F for instructions on using theinstrument’s self–alignment (calibration) function prior to performingBay Level Offset calibration.Power Meters – Manual power meter calibration procedures to beperformed prior to automated calibration are included in the EquipmentCalibration section of Appendix F.Cable Calibration – Manual cable calibration procedures using the HP8921A and Advantest R3465 communications system analyzers areprovided in the Manual Cable Calibration section of Appendix F, ifneeded.GPIB AddressesGPIB addresses can range from 1 through 30. The LMF will accept anyaddress in that range, but the numbers entered in the LMF Optionswindow GPIB address box must match the addresses of the testequipment. Motorola recommends using 1 for a CDMA signal generator,13 for a power meter, and 18 for a communications system analyzer. Toverify and, if necessary, change the GPIB addresses of the testequipment, refer to the Setting GPIB Addresses section of Appendix F.IP AddressesThe E7495A communications test set uses IP over Ethernet connectionsfor communication rather than the GPIB. For the Agilent E7495A, setthe IP address and complete initial setup as described in Appendix F,Table F-1.Selecting Test EquipmentOther Than Agilent E7495AOpen the LMF Options window from the Tools > Options menu list toselect test equipment automatically (using the autodetect feature) ormanually.Serial Connection and Network Connection tabs are provided in theLMF Options window to specify the test equipment connection method.The Serial Connection tab is used when the test equipment items areconnected directly to the LMF computer through a GPIB box (normalsetup). The Network Connection tab is used when the test equipment isto be connected remotely through a network connection.PrerequisitesEnsure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:3
Test Set Calibration – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 3-69DRAFTSTest equipment is correctly connected and turned on.SGPIB addresses set in the test equipment have been verified as correctusing the applicable procedures in Appendix F.SCDMA LMF computer serial port and test equipment are connected tothe GPIB box.Selecting Test EquipmentTest equipment may be selected either manually with operator input orautomatically using the LMF autodetect feature.Manually Selecting Test Equipment in a Serial Connection Tab –Test equipment can be manually specified before, or after, the testequipment is connected. The LMF does not check to see if the testequipment is actually detected for manual specification. Follow theprocedure in Table 3-24 to select test equipment manually.Table 3-24: Selecting Test Equipment Manually in a Serial Connection TabnStep Action1From the Tools menu, select Options.The LMF Options window appears.2Click on the Serial Connection tab (if not in the forefront).3Select the correct serial port in the COMM Port pick list (normally COM1).4Click on the Manual Specification button (if not enabled).5Click on the check box corresponding to the test item(s) to be used.6NOTEGPIB addresses can range from 1 through 30. The LMF will accept any address in that range, butthe numbers in the GPIB address boxes must match the addresses of the test equipment.Motorola recommends using 1 for a CDMA signal generator, 13 for a power meter, and 18 for aCDMA analyzer. To verify and, if necessary, change the GPIB addresses of the test equipment,refer to Appendix F.Type the GPIB address in the corresponding GPIB address box.Recommended Addresses1 = CDMA Signal generator13 = Power Meter18 = CDMA Analyzer7Click on Apply. (The button darkens until the selection has been committed.)NOTEWith manual selection, the LMF does not detect the test equipment to see if it is connected andcommunicating with the LMF.To verify and, if necessary, change the GPIB address of the test equipment, refer to AppendixNO TAG.. . . continued on next page3
Test Set Calibration – continued 3-70 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTTable 3-24: Selecting Test Equipment Manually in a Serial Connection TabnActionStep8Click on Dismiss to close the test equipment window. Automatically Selecting Test Equipment in Serial Connection Tab –When using the auto-detection feature to select test equipment, the LMFexamines which test equipment items are actually communicating withthe LMF. Follow the procedure in Table 3-25 to use the auto-detectfeature.Table 3-25: Selecting Test Equipment Using Auto-DetectnStep Action1From the Tools menu, select Options.The LMF Options window appears.2Click on the Serial Connection tab (if not in the forefront).3Select the correct serial port in the COMM Port pick list (normally COM1).4Click on Auto–Detection (if not enabled).NOTEGPIB addresses can range from 1 through 30. The LMF will accept any address in that range, butthe numbers in the GPIB address to search box must match the addresses of the test equipment.Motorola recommends using 1 for a CDMA signal generator, 13 for a power meter, and 18 for aCDMA analyzer. To verify and, if necessary, change the GPIB addresses of the test equipment,refer to Appendix NO TAG.5Type the GPIB addresses in the box labeled GPIB address to search (if not already displayed).NOTEWhen both a power meter and an analyzer are selected, the LMF uses the first item that is capableof performing the test and is listed in the GPIB addresses to search box for RF powermeasurements (i.e., TX calibration). The address for a CDMA signal generator is normally 1, theaddress for a power meter is normally 13, and the address for a CDMA analyzer is normally 18. If1,13,18 is included in the GPIB addresses to search box, the power meter (13) is used for RFpower measurements. When the test equipment items are manually selected, the CDMA analyzeris used only if a power meter is not selected.6Click on Apply.NOTEThe button darkens until the selection has been committed. A check mark appears in the ManualConfiguration section for detected test equipment items.7 Click Dismiss to close the LMF Options window. 3
Test Set Calibration – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 3-71DRAFTDetecting Test EquipmentWhen Using Agilent E7495ABe sure that no other equipment is connected to the LMF. The AgilentE7495A must be connected to the LAN to detect it. Then perform theprocedures described in Appendix F, Table F-1, Table F-2, andTable F-3.Calibrating Test EquipmentThe calibrate test equipment function zeros the power measurement levelof the test equipment item that is to be used for TX calibration and audit.If both a power meter and an analyzer are connected, only the powermeter is zeroed.The Agilent E4406A transmitter tester does not supportpower measurement level zeroing. Refer to the EquipmentCalibration section of Appendix F for E4406A calibration.NOTEPrerequisitesSLMF computer serial port and test equipment are connected to theGPIB box.STest equipment to be calibrated has been connected correctly for teststhat are to be run.STest equipment has been selected in the LMF (Table 3-24 orTable 3-25).Calibrating test equipmentFollow the procedure in Table 3-26 to calibrate the test equipment.Table 3-26: Test Equipment CalibrationnStep Action1From the Util menu, select Calibrate Test Equipmentfrom the pull–down menu. A Directions window isdisplayed.2Follow the directions provided.3Click on Continue to close the Directions window andstart the calibration process. A status report window isdisplayed.4Click on OK to close the status report window.Calibrating Cables OverviewThe cable calibration function measures the loss (in dB) for the TX andRX cables that are to be used for testing. A CDMA analyzer is used to3
Test Set Calibration – continued 3-72 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTmeasure the loss of each cable configuration (TX cable configuration andRX cable configuration). The cable calibration consists of the following:SMeasuring the loss of a short cable – This is required to compensatefor any measurement error of the analyzer. The short cable (used onlyfor the calibration process) is used in series with both the TX and RXcable configuration when measuring. The measured loss of the shortcable is deducted from the measured loss of the TX and RX cableconfiguration to determine the actual loss of the TX and RX cableconfigurations. The result is then adjusted out of both the TX and RXmeasurements to compensate for the measured loss.SMeasuring the short cable plus the RX cable configuration loss –The RX cable configuration normally consists only of a coax cablewith type-N connectors that is long enough to reach from the BTS RXport of the test equipment.SMeasuring the short cable plus the TX cable configuration loss –The TX cable configuration normally consists of two coax cables withtype-N connectors and a directional coupler, a load, and an additionalattenuator (if required by the specified BTS). The total loss of the pathloss of the TX cable configuration must be as required for the BTS(normally 30 or 50 dB).Calibrate Test Cabling usingCommunications SystemAnalyzerCable Calibration is used to calibrate both TX and RX test cables.Appendix F covers the procedures for manual cable calibration.PrerequisitesEnsure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:SOne of the following:– LMF computer serial port and test equipment are connected to theGPIB box– For E7495A, the LMF computer network card and the E7495 areconnected to the Ethernet hub (Appendix NO TAG, AgilentE7495A Test Equipment Setup section, Connections subsection)STest equipment is turned on and has warmed up for at least 60minutes.STest equipment has been selected in the LMF (Table 3-24, Table 3-25,or Table F-2)Calibrating cablesRefer to Figure 3-13 or Figure 3-14 and follow the procedure inTable 3-27 to calibrate the test cable configurations.Table 3-27: Cable CalibrationnStep Action1From the Util menu, select Cable Calibration. A CableCalibration window is displayed.3
Test Set Calibration – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 3-73DRAFTTable 3-27: Cable CalibrationnActionStep2Enter the channel number(s) in the Channels box.NOTEMultiple channel numbers must be separated with acomma and no space (i.e.; 200,800). When two or morechannel numbers are entered, the cables are calibrated foreach channel. Interpolation is accomplished for otherchannels as required for TX calibration.3In the Cable Calibration pick list select one of thefollowing:–TX and RX Cable Cal–TX Cable Cal–RX Cable Cal4 Click OK and follow the direction displayed for eachstep. A status report window displays the results of thecable calibration.Calibrate Test Cabling UsingSignal Generator & SpectrumAnalyzerFollow the procedure in Table 3-28 to calibrate the TX/Duplexed RXcables using a signal generator and spectrum analyzer. Refer toFigure 3-24, if required. Follow the procedure in Table 3-29 to calibratethe Non–Duplexed RX cables using the signal generator and spectrumanalyzer. Refer to Figure 3-25, if required.TX and Duplexed RX Cable CalibrationTable 3-28: Calibrating TX and Duplexed RX Cables Using Signal Generator and Spectrum AnalyzernStep Action1Connect a short test cable between the spectrum analyzer and the signal generator.2Set signal generator to 0 dBm at the customer frequency of 869–894 MHz.3Use a spectrum analyzer to measure signal generator output (see Figure 3-24, A) and record thevalue.4Connect the spectrum analyzer’s short cable to point B, (as shown in the lower right portion of thediagram) to measure cable output at customer frequency of 869–894 MHz. Record the value atpoint B.. . . continued on next page3
Test Set Calibration – continued 3-74 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTTable 3-28: Calibrating TX and Duplexed RX Cables Using Signal Generator and Spectrum AnalyzernActionStep5Calibration factor = A – B. Example: Cal = –1 dBm – (–53.5 dBm) = 52.5 dBNOTEThe short cable is used for calibration only. It is not part of the final test setup. After calibration iscompleted, do not re-arrange any cables. Use the equipment setup, as is, to ensure test proceduresuse the correct calibration factor. Figure 3-24: Calibrating Test Equipment Setup for TX BLO and TX ATP Tests(using Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer)50 OHMTERMINATION30 DBDIRECTIONALCOUPLERSpectrumAnalyzerSignal GeneratorASpectrumAnalyzer40W NON–RADIATINGRF LOADBSHORT TEST CABLESignal GeneratorTHIS WILL BE THE CONNECTION TO THE HP8481A POWERSENSOR DURING TX BAY LEVEL OFFSET TEST AND TO THEPCS INTERFACE BOX INPUT PORT DURING TX ATP TESTS.SHORTTESTCABLETHIS WILL BE THE CONNECTION TOTHE TX PORTS DURING TX BAY LEVELOFFSET TEST AND TX ATP TESTS.CABLE FROM 20 DB @ 20W ATTENUATOR TO THEPCS INTERFACE OR THE HP8481A POWER SENSOR.ONE 20DB 20 W INLINE ATTENUATORFW00293Non-Duplexed RX Cable CalibrationTable 3-29: Calibrating RX Cables Using a Signal Generator and Spectrum AnalyzernStep Action1Connect a short test cable to the spectrum analyzer and connect the other end to the SignalGenerator.2Set signal generator to –10 dBm at the customer’s RX frequency of 824–849 MHz.3Use spectrum analyzer to measure signal generator output (see Figure 3-25, A) and record thevalue for A.4Connect the test setup, as shown in the lower portion of the diagram to measure the output at thecustomer’s RX frequency of 824–849 MHz. Record the value at point B.. . . continued on next page3
Test Set Calibration – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 3-75DRAFTTable 3-29: Calibrating RX Cables Using a Signal Generator and Spectrum AnalyzernActionStep5Calibration factor = A – B. Example: Cal = –12 dBm – (–14 dBm) = 2 dBmNOTEThe short cable is used for calibration only. It is not part of the final test setup. After calibration iscompleted, do not re-arrange any cables. Use the equipment setup, as is, to ensure test proceduresuse the correct calibration factor. Figure 3-25: Calibrating Test Equipment Setup for RX ATP Test (using Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer)SpectrumAnalyzerSignalGeneratorabSpectrumAnalyzerSHORTTESTCABLESHORT TESTCABLECONNECTION TO THE HP PCSINTERFACE OUTPUT PORTDURING RX MEASUREMENTS.SignalGeneratorBULLETCONNECTORLONGcable2CONNECTION TO THE RX PORTSDURING RX MEASUREMENTS. FW00294Setting Cable Loss ValuesCable loss values for the TX and RX test cable configurations arenormally set by accomplishing cable calibration using the applicable testequipment. The resulting values are stored in the cable loss files. Thecable loss values can also be set/changed manually. Follow the procedurein Table 3-30 to set cable loss values.If cable calibration was performed without using the LMF,cable loss values must be manually entered in the LMFdatabase. Failure to do this will result in inaccurate BTScalibration and reduced site performance.CAUTIONPrerequisitesSLogged into the BTS3
Test Set Calibration – continued 3-76 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTTable 3-30: Setting Cable Loss ValuesnStep Action1Click on the Util menu.2 Select Edit > Cable Loss.3In the data entry pop–up window, select TX Cable Loss or RX Cable Loss.4To add a new channel number, click on the Add Row button, then click in the Channel # andLoss (dBm) columns and enter the desired values.5To edit existing values, click in the data box to be changed and change the value.6To delete a row, click on the row and then click on the Delete Row button.7To save displayed values, click on the Save button.8To exit the window, click on the Dismiss button.Values entered/changed after the Save button was used are not saved.NOTESIf cable loss values exist for two different channels, the LMF will interpolate for all otherchannels.SEntered values are used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. Logging out and logging inagain is not necessary. Setting Coupler Loss ValuesIf an in–service coupler is installed, the coupler loss (e.g., 30 dB) mustbe manually entered so it will be included in the LMF TX calibrationand audit calculations and RX FER Test. Follow the procedure inTable 3-31 to set coupler loss values.PrerequisitesSLogged into the BTS.Table 3-31: Setting Coupler Loss ValuenStep Action1Click on the Util menu.2 Select Edit > Coupler Loss.3In the data entry pop–up window, select one of thefollowing:–TX Coupler Loss–RX Coupler Loss.4Click in the Loss (dBm) column for each carrier that hasa coupler and enter the appropriate value.. . . continued on next page3
Test Set Calibration – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 3-77DRAFTTable 3-31: Setting Coupler Loss ValuenActionStep5To edit existing values click in the data box to be changedand change the value.6Click on the Save button to save displayed values. 7Click on the Dismiss button to exit the window.Values entered/changed after the Save button was usedare not saved.NOTESThe In–Service Calibration check box in the Tools > Options > BTS Options tab must checkedbefore entered coupler loss values are used by the TXcalibration and audit functions or RX FER test.SEntered values are used by the LMF as soon as they aresaved. Logging out and logging in again is notnecessary. 3
Bay Level Offset Calibration 3-78 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTIntroductionBay Level Offset (BLO) calibration is the central activity of theoptimization process. BLO calibration compensates for normalequipment variations within the BTS RF paths and assures the correcttransmit power is available at the BTS antenna connectors to meet siteperformance requirements.RF Path Bay Level OffsetCalibrationCalibration identifies the accumulated gain in every transmit path (BBXslot) at the BTS site and stores that value in a BLO database calibrationtable in the LMF. The BLOs are subsequently downloaded to each BBX.For starter frames, each receive path starts at a BTS RX antenna port andterminates at a backplane BBX slot. Each transmit path starts at a BBXbackplane slot, travels through the Power Amplifier (PA), and terminatesat a BTS TX antenna port.For expansion frames each receive path starts at the BTS RX port of thecell site starter frame, travels through the frame-to-frame expansioncable, and terminates at a backplane BBX slot of the expansion frame.The transmit path starts at a BBX backplane slot of the expansion frame,travels though the PA, and terminates at a BTS TX antenna port of thesame expansion frame.Calibration identifies the accumulated gain in every transmit path (BBXslot) at the BTS site and stores that value in a BLO database. Eachtransmit path starts at a C–CCP shelf backplane BBX slot, travelsthrough the PA, and ends at a BTS TX antenna port. When the TX pathcalibration is performed, the RX path BLO is automatically set to thedefault value.At omni sites, BBX slots 1 and 13 (redundant) are tested. At sector sites,BBX slots 1 through 12, and 13 (redundant) are tested. Only those slots(sectors) actually equipped in the current CDF or NEC file are tested,regardless of physical BBX board installation in the slot.When to Calibrate BLOsCalibration of BLOs is required:SAfter initial BTS installationSOnce each yearSAfter replacing any of the following components or associatedinterconnecting RF cabling:– BBX board– C–CCP shelf– MCIO card– MCIO to Power Amplifier backplane RF cable– Parallel Linear Amplifier Combiner3
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 3-79DRAFT– Power Amplifier– TX filter– Enhanced Trunking Module (ETM)– TX thru-port cable to the top of frameTX Path CalibrationThe TX Path Calibration assures correct site installation, cabling, and thefirst order functionality of all installed equipment. The proper functionof each RF path is verified during calibration. The external testequipment is used to validate/calibrate the TX paths of the BTS.Before installing any test equipment directly to any TXOUT connector you must first verify that there are noCDMA channels keyed. Have the OMC–R place the sectorassigned to the PA under test OOS. Failure to do so canresult in serious personal injury and/or equipment damage.WARNINGAlways wear an approved anti–static wrist strap whilehandling any circuit card/module. If this is not done, thereis a high probability that the card/module could bedamaged by ESD.CAUTIONAt new site installations, to facilitate the complete test ofeach CCP shelf (if the shelf is not already fully populatedwith BBX boards), move BBX boards from shelvescurrently not under test and install them into the emptyBBX slots of the shelf currently being tested to insure thatall BBX TX paths are tested.This procedure can be bypassed on operational sites thatare due for periodic optimization.Prior to testing, view the CDF file to verify the correctBBX slots are equipped. Edit the file as required to includeBBX slots not currently equipped (per SystemsEngineering documentation).NOTE3
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued 3-80 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTBLO Calibration Data FileDuring the calibration process, the LMF creates a bts–#.calcalibration (BLO) offset data file (CAL file) in the bts–# folder. Aftercalibration has been completed, this offset data must be downloaded tothe BBXs using the LMF Download BLO function. An explanation ofthe file is shown below.Due to the size of the file, Motorola recommends printing ahard copy of a CAL file and refer to it for the followingdescriptions.NOTEThe CAL file is subdivided into sections organized on a per slot basis (aslot Block).Slot 1 contains the calibration data for the 12 BBX slots. Slot 20contains the calibration data for the redundant BBX. Each BBX slotheader block contains:SA creation Date and Time – broken down into separate parameters ofcreateMonth, createDay, createYear, createHour, and createMin.SThe number of calibration entries – fixed at 720 entries correspondingto 360 calibration points of the CAL file including the slot header andactual calibration data.SThe calibration data for a BBX is organized as a large flat array. Thearray is organized by branch, sector, and calibration point.– The first breakdown of the array indicates which branch thecontained calibration points are for. The array covers transmit, mainreceive and diversity receive offsets as follows:Table 3-32: BLO BTS.cal File Array AssignmentsRange AssignmentC[1]–C[240] TransmitC[241]–C[480] Main ReceiveC[481]–C[720] Diversity Receive– The second breakdown of the array is per sector. Configurationssupported are Omni, 3–sector or 6–sector.3
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 3-81DRAFTTable 3-33: BTS.cal File Array (Per Sector)BBX Sectorization TX RX RX DiversitySlot[1] (Primary BBXs 1 through 12)1 (Omni) 3–Sector,C[1]–C[20] C[241]–C[260] C[481]–C[500]23–Sector,1stCiC[21]–C[40] C[261]–C[280] C[501]–C[520]36 Sector,1stCarrier C[41]–C[60] C[281]–C[300] C[521]–C[540]41stCarrier 3–Sector,C[61]–C[80] C[301]–C[320] C[541]–C[560]5Carrier3–Sector,3rdCiC[81]–C[100] C[321]–C[340] C[561]–C[580]6Carrier C[101]–C[120] C[341]–C[360] C[581]–C[600]73–Sector,C[121]–C[140] C[361]–C[380] C[601]–C[620]83–Sector,2ndCiC[141]–C[160] C[381]–C[400] C[621]–C[640]96 Sector,2ndCarrier C[161]–C[180] C[401]–C[420] C[641]–C[660]102ndCarrier 3–Sector,C[181]–C[200] C[421]–C[440] C[661]–C[680]11Carrier3–Sector,4thCiC[201]–C[220] C[441]–C[460] C[681]–C[700]12 Carrier C[221]–C[240] C[461]–C[480] C[701]–C[720] . . . continued on next page3
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued 3-82 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTTable 3-33: BTS.cal File Array (Per Sector)BBX RX DiversityRXTXSectorizationSlot[20] (Redundant BBX–13)1 (Omni) 3–Sector,C[1]–C[20] C[241]–C[260] C[481]–C[500]23–Sector,1stCiC[21]–C[40] C[261]–C[280] C[501]–C[520]36 Sector,1stCarrier C[41]–C[60] C[281]–C[300] C[521]–C[540]41stCarrier 3–Sector,C[61]–C[80] C[301]–C[320] C[541]–C[560]5Carrier3–Sector,3rdCiC[81]–C[100] C[321]–C[340] C[561]–C[580]6Carrier C[101]–C[120] C[341]–C[360] C[581]–C[600]73–Sector,C[121]–C[140] C[361]–C[380] C[601]–C[620]83–Sector,2ndCiC[141]–C[160] C[381]–C[400] C[621]–C[640]96 Sector,2ndCarrier C[161]–C[180] C[401]–C[420] C[641]–C[660]10 2ndCarrier3–Sector,C[181]–C[200] C[421]–C[440] C[661]–C[680]11Carrier3–Sector,4th C[201]–C[220] C[441]–C[460] C[681]–C[700]12 Carrier C[221]–C[240] C[461]–C[480] C[701]–C[720]STen calibration points per sector are supported for each branch. Twoentries are required for each calibration point:1. The first value (all odd entries) identifies the CDMA channel(frequency) where the BLO is measured.2. The second value (all even entries) is the power set level(PwrLvlAdj). The valid range for PwrLvlAdj is from 2500 to27500 (2500 corresponds to –125 dBm and 27500 correspondsto +125 dBm).SThe 20 calibration entries for each sector/branch combination must bestored in order of increasing frequency. If less than 10 points(frequencies) are calibrated, data for the highest frequency calibratedis repeated to fill out the remainder of the 10 points.Example:C[1]=384, odd cal entry= 1 ‘‘calibration point”C[2]=19102, even cal entryC[3]=777,C[4]=19086,..C[19]=777,C[20]=19086, (Since only two frequencies were calibrated, data forthis one, the highest, is repeated for the last eight calibration points of the sector/branch)SWhen the BBX is loaded with data, the CAL file data for the BBX isdownloaded to the device in the order it is stored in the CAL file.TxCal data is sent first, C[1] – C[240]. Sector 1’s ten calibrationpoints are sent (C[1] – C[20]) followed by sector 2’s ten calibration3
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 3-83DRAFTpoints (C[21] – C[40]), etc. The RxCal data is sent next (C[241] –C[480]), followed by the RxDCal data (C[481] – C[720]).STemperature compensation data is also stored in the cal file for eachset.Test Equipment Set-up forRF Path CalibrationFollow the procedure in Table 3-34 to set up test equipment.Table 3-34: Test Equipment Setup (RF Path Calibration)nStep Action1Verify the GPIB controller is properly connected and turned on (does not apply tothe Agilent E7495A).! CAUTIONTo prevent damage to the test equipment, all transmit (TX) test connections mustbe via the 30 dB directional coupler.2If it has not already been done, connect the LMF computer to the BTS LAN Aconnector on the BTS. Refer to the procedure in Table 3–2.SIf required, calibrate the test equipment using the procedure in Table 3-26.SConnect the test equipment as shown in Figure 3-15 throug Figure 3-17.Transmit (TX) Path CalibrationDescriptionThe assigned channel frequency and power level (as measured at the topof the frame) for transmit calibration are derived from the site CDF files.For each BBX, the channel frequency is specified in the [CdmaChans]in the cbsc–#.cdf file and the power is specified in the SIFPilotPwrCDF file parameter for the sector associated with the BBX (locatedunder the ParentSECTOR field of the ParentCARRIER CDF fileparameter).If both the bts–#.cdf and cbsc–#.cdf orNECB*bts#.xml and NECJ*bts#.xml files are current,all information will be correct on the LMF. If not, thecarrier and channel will have to be set for each test.NOTEThe calibration procedure attempts to adjust the power to within "0.5dB of the desired power. The calibration will pass if the error is less thanthe value set in the “TX Nominal offset” tolerance.3
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued 3-84 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTTransmit (TX) Bay Level Offset (BLO) Specifications –SC4812T–MC TX BLO specifications for different BTS sectorconfigurations are as follows:Table 3-35: Transmit (TX) Bay Level Offset (BLO) SpecificationSingle Sided Double Sided800 MHz 3–Sector > 35dB 40dB +/– 5dB800 MHz 6–Sector > 38dB 43dB +/– 5dB1.9 GHz 3–Sector > 30dB 35dB +/– 5dB1.9 GHz 6–Sector > 33dB 38dB +/– 5dB To set the expected values see Table 3-36.TX Calibration and the LMFThe LMF Tests > TX > TX Calibration... and Tests > All Cal/Audit...selections perform TX BLO calibration testing for installed BBX(s). TheAll Cal/Audit... selection initiates a series of actions to perform TXcalibration, and, if calibration is successful, download BLO and performTX audit. The TX Calibration... selection performs only TXcalibration. When TX Calibration... is used, BLO download and TXaudit must be performed as separate activities. The CDMA TestParameters window which opens when TX Calibration... or AllCal/Audit... is selected contains several user–selectable features whichare described in the following subsections.Rate Set Drop–down Pick ListThe Rate Set drop–down box is enabled if at least one MCC card isselected for the test. The available options for TX tests are 1 = 9600, and3 = 9600 1X. Option 3 is only available if 1X cards are selected for thetest. The available transfer rate options for RX tests are 1 = 9600 and2 = 14400. Option 2 is only available if no 1X cards are selected.Verify BLOIn both the TX Calibration and All Cal/Audit dialog boxes, a VerifyBLO checkbox is provided and checked by default. After the actual TXcalibration is completed during either the TX Calibration or AllCal/Audit process, the BLO derived from the calibration is compared toa standard, acceptable BLO tolerance for the BTS. In some installations,additional items may be installed in the transmit path. The additionalchange in gain from these items could cause BLO verification failureand, therefore, failure of the entire calibration. In these cases, either theVerify BLO checkbox should be unchecked or the additional path lossesshould be added into each applicable sector using the Util > Edit > TX Coupler Loss... function.3
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 3-85DRAFTSingle–sided BLO CheckboxAnother option that appears in the pull–down menu is Single–sidedBLO. Normally valid BLO values are some value plus–or–minus someoffset. The ranges currently used for calibration are wider than necessaryto accommodate the redundant BBX. The lower half of the allowablerange is where non–redundant BBXs should function. Single–sided BLOspec is >35dB. Double–sided BLO spec is 40+5dB. To get the morestringent conditions, the operator checks Single–sided BLO whencalibrating non-redundant transceivers. Single–sided BLO carries thelikelihood of more failures. This option should only be used byexperienced CFEs.The Tests > TX > TX Calibration... menu window has a Test Patternpull–down menu. This menu has the following choices:SPilot (default) – performs tests using a pilot signal only. This patternshould be used when running in–service tests. It only requires a BBXto do the test.SStandard – performs the tests using pilot, synch, paging and sixtraffic channels. This pattern should be used on all non–in–servicetests. Standard requires a BBX and an MCC. Standard uses gainvalues specified by the IS97 standard.SCDFPilot –performs the tests using the pilot signal, however, the gainis specified in the CDF file. Advanced users may use CDFPilot togenerate a Pilot pattern using the value specified by the PilotGainparameter in the CDF file instead of a pre–determined value.SCDF – performs the tests using pilot, synch, paging and six trafficchannels, however, the gain for the channel elements is specified inthe CDF file. Advanced users may use CDF to generate a standardpattern. Instead of using the values specified by IS97, the settings forthe following CDF parameters are used:– PilotGain– PchGain– SchGain– NomGain1Way3
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued 3-86 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTTX CalibrationBefore installing any test equipment directly to any TXOUT connector, first verify there are no CDMA BBXchannels keyed. Failure to do so can result in seriouspersonal injury and/or equipment damage.WARNINGAlways wear an approved anti–static wrist strap whilehandling any circuit card or module. If this is not done,there is a high probability that the card or module could bedamaged by ESD.CAUTION3
TX BLO Calibration for MC5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 3-87DRAFTOverviewLMF software release described on page NO TAG may be used tocalibrate the Multicarrier trunked BTS running Software ReleaseR2.16.4.1 circuit or packet software. These unique procedures arenecessary due to the fact that the SC4812T–MC requires all equippedPAs to be enabled during TX testing.TX BLO is obtained with BBXs-under-test having pilot gain set at 262LSB, while BBXs-not-under–test are keyed at low transmit power(recommended pilot gain of 127 LSB and XCVR Power Gain set of –25dBm).The following procedure assumes that the SC4812T–MC frame isequipped with 4 carriers and all modules have appropriate softwaredownloaded. The tasks required are:SSet-up for TX CalibrationSTX CalibrationSDownload TX BLO DataSCopy TX BLO data for CBSC/OMCRSet-up for TX CalibrationTable 3-36: Initial Set-up for Multicarrier TX CalibrationnStep Action1On the LMF computer, delete the existing calibration file(if any) from the BTS folder located at <x>:\<lmf homedirectory\cdma\bts–#, where # is the number of the BTSto be calibrated.2Edit the nominal TX BLO– From the Util menu, select Edit > TX NominalOffset.–Change the value based on the BTS frequency bandand configuration in Table 3-353Download the data, which includes BLO values, to all theBBXs. From the Device menu, select Download > DataNOTETerminate all sector outputs on the frame, since more thanone sector will be keyed during the calibration procedure. TX CalibrationFollow the procedures in Table 3-37 to perform TX Calibration. Be sureto follow the primary If performing TX Calibration option in Step 2a.3
TX BLO Calibration for MC – continued 3-88 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTTable 3-37: Procedure for TX Calibration and TX AuditnStep Action! CAUTION1. This procedure will not work on an SC4812T–MC BTS operatingwith Software Release 2.16.4.0 and earlier. To calibrate anSC4812T–MC BTS operating on these earlier releases refer to themanual offset calibration procedure in 1X SC4812T–MC BTSOptimization/ATP; 68P09259A07.2. This procedure requires the use of LMF application softwareversion 2.16.4.0.09 or later.1Select the BBXs for the carrier to be calibrated and theBBX–R by clicking on each card.2Perform BLO calibration or TX audit by doing thefollowing:2a – Perform one of the following:–– If performing TX Calibration: Click Tests inthe BTS menu bar, and select TX > TX Cal-ibration from the pull–down menus.–– If performing TX Audit: Click Tests in theBTS menu bar, and select TX > TX Audit fromthe pull–down menus.2b – Select the carrier’s channel number from thosedisplayed in the Channels/Carrier pick list.2c – Select test to perform as TX Cal.2d – Enter the selected carrier’s XCVR gain value of 40(dBm).2e – In the Test Pattern box, select the test pattern to useas Pilot.–– The LMF will automatically key the designatedBBX and ask the operator to move the testequipment cable to appropriate TX path.3Download BLO to all the calibrated BBXs. (SeeTable 3-38 for details).Save the carrier’s TX BLO calibration results. Download TX BLO DataSelect all BBXs including the BBXR. From the Device menu, selectBBX >Download >BLO.Copy TX BLO data forCBSC/OMCRFollow the procedure described in Create Cal file (see Table 3-39).3
TX Calibration Audit5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 3-89DRAFTIntroductionRF path verification, BLO calibration, and BLO datadownload to BBXs must have been successfully completedprior to performing the calibration audit.NOTEThe BLO calibration audit procedure confirms the successful generationand storage of the BLO calibration offsets. The calibration auditprocedure measures the path gain or loss of every BBX transmit path atthe site. In this test, actual system tolerances are used to determine thesuccess or failure of a test. The same external test equipment set up isused.Before installing any test equipment directly to any TXOUT connector, first verify there are no CDMA BBXchannels keyed. Failure to do so can result in seriouspersonal injury and/or equipment damage.WARNINGThe Tests menu item, TX Audit, performs the TX BLO Audit test for aBBX(s). All measurements are made through the appropriate TX outputconnector using the calibrated TX cable setup.PrerequisitesBefore running this test, ensure that the following have been done:All PAs must be INS during any TX testing.NOTESCSM–1, GLIs, and BBXs have correct code load and data load.SPrimary CSM and MGLI are INS.SAll BBXs are OOS_RAM.STest equipment and test cables are calibrated and connected for TXBLO calibration.SLMF is logged into the BTS.Test ProcedureConnect the test equipment as shown in Figure 3-15 or Figure 3-16.Follow the procedure in Table 3-37 using the If performing TX Auditalternate Step 1 to perform the BTS TX Path Audit test.3
TX Calibration Audit – continued 3-90 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTDownload BLO ProcedureAfter a successful TX path calibration, download the BLO calibrationfile data to the BBXs. BLO data is extracted from the CAL file for theBTS and downloaded to the selected BBX devices.If a successful All Cal/Audit was completed, thisprocedure does not need to be performed, as BLO isdownloaded as part of the All Cal/Audit.NOTEPrerequisitesEnsure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:SBBXs being downloaded are OOS–RAM (yellow).STX calibration is successfully completed.Test ProcedureFollow the procedure in Table 3-38 to download the BLO data to theBBXs.Table 3-38: Download BLOnStep Action1Select the BBX(s) to be downloaded.2Click Device in the BTS menu bar, and select Download > BLO from the pull–down menus. A statusreport window displays the result of the download.NOTESelected device(s) do not change color when BLO isdownloaded.3Click on OK to close the status report window.Create CAL FileAfter downloading BLO data to the BBXs, the BLO data must also besaved to a CAL file in the BTS folder on the LMF computer platform.The CAL file must be created or updated so it can be transferred to theOMC–R. If no CAL file is stored in the BTS folder (such as after thefirst–time calibration of a new BTS), the Create Cal File function getsthe BLO data from the BBXs, creates the CAL file, and stores the BLOdata in it. If the CAL file already exists in the BTS folder, this functionwill update it with the new BLO data. Note the following:SCreate Cal File function only applies to selected (highlighted) BBXs.3
TX Calibration Audit – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 3-91DRAFTMotorola does not encourage the user to edit the CAL fileas this action can cause interface problems between theBTS and the LMF. To manually edit the CAL file, theLMF must first be logged out of the BTS. If the CAL fileis manually edited and then the Create Cal File function isrun, the edited information is lost.CAUTIONPrerequisitesBefore running this procedure, the following should be done:SLMF is logged into the BTS.SBBXs are OOS_RAM with BLO downloaded.Creating a CAL FileTable 3-39: Create CAL FilenStep Action1Select the applicable BBXs.NOTEThe CAL file is only updated for the selected BBXs.2Click on the Device menu.3Click on the Create Cal File menu item.A status report window displays the results of the action.4 Click OK to close the status report window. 3
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing 3-92 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTObjectiveThis section tests the redundancy options that could be included in thecell site. These tests verify, under a fault condition, that all modulesequipped with redundancy switch operations to their redundant partnerand resume operation. An example would be to pull the currently activeCSM and verify the standby CSM takes over distribution of the CDMAreference signal.Redundancy covers many BTS modules. Confirm the redundant optionsincluded in the BTS, and proceed as required. If the BTS has only basicpower supply redundancy, the tests and procedures detailed in thefollowing tables should be bypassed.STable 3-42. Miscellaneous Alarm Tests (BTS Frame)STable 3-43. BBX Redundancy Tests (BTS Frame)STable 3-44. CSM, GPS, and HSO Redundancy Alarm TestsSTable 3-45. MGLI/GLI Redundancy TestDuring redundancy verification of the test, alarms reported by the masterGLI (displayed via the alarm monitor) will also be verified/noted.Test EquipmentThe following pieces of test equipment are required to perform this test:SLMFSCommunications Test SetRedundancy/Alarm TestPerform each of the following tests to verify BTS redundancy and toconfirm all alarms are received and reported by the BTS equipment. Theprocedures should be performed on the following modules/boards:SPower supply/converter modules in all framesSDistribution shelf modules in the BTS frameSC–CCP shelf modules in the BTS frame (except MCCs)SPA modules in the BTS frameSAMR Customer defined input/output testsTest Equipment SetupFollow the procedure in Table 3-40 to set up test equipment:All alarm tests are preformed using TX antenna 1NOTETable 3-40: Test Equipment Setup for Redundancy/Alarm TestsStep Action1Interface the LMF computer to the BTS LAN A connector onthe BTS frame (refer to Table 3-5, page 3-15).2Login to the BTS.3
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 3-93DRAFTTable 3-40: Test Equipment Setup for Redundancy/Alarm TestsStep Action3Set up test equipment for TX Calibration at TXOUT1 (seeTable 3-5).NOTEIf site is not equipped for redundancy, remove all GLI andBBX boards installed in any redundant slot positions at thistime.4Display the alarm monitor by selecting Util>Alarm Monitor.5Unequip all customer defined AMR alarms reported via theAMR Alarm connector (A & B) by clicking on MGLI, thenselecting Device>Set Alarm Relays>Unequipped.NOTEDuring configuration of MGLI alarm reporting, spuriousalarms may report. Allow the BTS to stabilize for 10 seconds.If any alarms are actively being reported after the BTS hasstabilized, determine the cause before proceeding further.Power Supply RedundancyFollow the steps in Table 3-41 to verify redundancy of the power supplymodules. Alarms reported by the master GLI (displayed via the alarmmonitor) are also verified.Table 3-41: Power Supply/Converter Redundancy (BTS Frame)Step Action1Select the BBX–1 (highlight) and from the pulldown menu select:Device>BBX/MAWI>Set Redundant Sector>Carrier–#–1–1Device>BBX/MAWI>Set Pilot Only>Carrier–#–1-1Device>BBX/MAWI>Set Pilot Gain>Carrier–#-1-1 and Pilot Gain = 2622Select (highlight) BBX–1 and from the pulldown menu select Device>BBX/MAWI>Key.3Set XCVR gain to 40 and enter the correct XCVR channel number.4Remove PS–1 from the power distribution shelf (see Figure 3-26).– Observe that an alarm message is reported via the MGLI as displayed on the alarm monitor.– Verify no other modules went OOS.5Re-install PS–1.Observe the alarm clears on the alarm monitor.6Repeat steps 4 and 5 for PS–2 and PS–3.7Verify that all PWR/ALM LEDs are GREEN.8Select BBX-1 and Device>BBX/MAWI>Dekey 3
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing – continued 3-94 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTFigure 3-26: C–CCP Shelf19 mm Filler PanelPS–3AMR–1CSM–1CSM–238 mm Filler PanelAMR–2GLI–1GLI–2MCC–6BBX–1BBX–2BBX–3BBX–4BBX–5BBX–6BBX–RSwitchMPC/EMPC–1MPC/EMPC–2MCIOBBX–7BBX–8BBX–9BBX–10BBX–11BBX–12MCC–5MCC–4MCC–3MCC–2MCC–1MCC–12MCC–11MCC–10MCC–9MCC–8MCC–7PS–2PS–1CCD–2 CCD–1NOTE: MCCs may beMCC24Es, MCC8Es, orMCC–1Xs. GLIs may beGLI2s or GLI3s.HSO/LFRti-CDMA-WP-00037-v01-ildoc-ftwMiscellaneousAlarm/Redundancy TestsFollow steps in Table 3-42 to verify that alarms reported by the masterGLI are displayed via the alarm monitor if a BTS frame module failureoccurs.Table 3-42: Miscellaneous Alarm TestsStep Action1 Select Util>Alarm Monitor to display the alarm monitor window.2Perform the following to verify fan module alarms:•Unseat a fan module (see Figure 3-27).•Observe an alarm message was reported via the MGLI (as displayed on the alarm monitor).•Replace fan module and verify the alarm monitor reports that the alarm clears.•Repeat for all other fan modules in the BTS frame.NOTEFollow Step 3 for Starter Frames and Step 4 for Expansion Frames.3Starter Frames Only: Perform the following to verify MPC module alarms.•Unseat MPC modules (see Figure 3-26) one at a time.•Observe that an alarm message was reported via the MGLI as displayed on the alarm monitor.•Replace the MPC modules and verify the alarm monitor reports the alarm clears.3
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 3-95DRAFTTable 3-42: Miscellaneous Alarm TestsStep Action4Expansion Frames Only: Perform the following to verify EMPC module alarms.•Unseat EMPC modules (see Figure 3-26) one at a time•Observe that an alarm message was reported via the MGLI as displayed on the alarm monitor.•Replace the EMPC modules and verify the alarm monitor reports that the alarm clears.5If equipped with AMR redundancy, perform the following to verify AMR module redundancy/alarms.•Unseat AMR 2 (see Figure 3-26).•Observe that an alarm message is reported via the MGLI (as displayed on the alarm monitor).•Repeat Steps 1, 2 and 3 (starter frame) or Steps 1, 2 and 4 (expansion frame).•Replace the AMR module and verify the alarm monitor reports that the alarm clears.•Unseat AMR 1; observe alarm message was reported via MGLI (as displayed on the alarm monitor).•Replace the AMR module and verify the LMF reports the alarm has cleared.NOTEAll PWR/ALM LEDs should be GREEN at the completion of this test.Figure 3-27: Fan Modulesti-CDMA-WP-00139-v01-ildoc-ftwLATCHESFAN MODULESBBX RedundancyFollow the steps in Table 3-43 to verify redundancy of the BBXs in theC–CCP shelf. Alarms reported by the master GLI (displayed via thealarm monitor) are also verified. This test can be repeated for additionalsectors at the customer’s discretion.3
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing – continued 3-96 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTTable 3-43: BBX Redundancy AlarmsStep Actionn WARNINGAny BBXs enabled will immediately key-up. Before enabling any BBX, always verify that the TXoutput assigned to the BBX is terminated into a 50 W non-radiating RF load! Failure to do so couldresult in serious personal injury and/or damage to the equipment.1Enable the primary, then the redundant BBX assigned to ANT 1 by selecting the BBX andDevice>BBX/MAWI>Key.2Observe that primary BBXs key up, and a carrier is present at each respective frequency.3Remove the primary BBX.4Observe a carrier is still present. The Redundant BBX is now the active BBX for Antenna 1.5Replace the primary BBX and reload the BBX with code and data.6Re-enable the primary BBX assigned to ANT 1 and observe that a carrier is present at each respectivefrequency.7Remove the redundant BBX and observe a carrier is still present.8 The Primary BBX is now the active BBX for ANT 1.9Replace the redundant BBX and reload the BBX with code and data.10 Re-enable the redundant BBX assigned to ANT 1 and observe that a carrier is present at eachrespective frequency:11 De-key the Xcvr by selecting Device>BBX/MAWI>Dekey.12 Repeat Steps 1 through 11 for additional BBXs/antennas, if equipped. CSM, GPS, & HSORedundancy/Alarm TestsFollow the procedure in Table 3-44 to verify the manual redundancy ofthe CSM, GPS, and HSO boards. Verification of alarms reported is alsocovered.DO NOT perform the procedure in Table 3-44, unless thesite is configured with a HSO timebase as a backup for theGPS.NOTE3
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 3-97DRAFTTable 3-44: CSM, GPS, & HSO, Redundancy/Alarm TestsStep Actionn WARNINGAny BBXs enabled will immediately key-up. Before enabling any BBX, always verify that the TXoutput assigned to the BBX is terminated into a 50 W non-radiating RF load! Failure to do so couldresult in serious personal injury and/or damage to the equipment.1Enable the primary, then the redundant BBXs assigned to ANT 1 by selecting the BBX andDevice>BBX/MAWI>Key.2Disconnect the GPS antenna cable, located on top of the BTS frame. This forces the HSO boardtimebase to become the CDMA timing source.3Observe a CDMA timing reference alarm and source change is reported by the alarm monitor.4Allow the HSO to become the active timing source.SVerify the BBXs remain keyed and INS.SVerify no other modules went OOS due to the transfer to HSO reference.SObserve the PWR/ALM LEDs on the CSM 1 front panel are steady GREEN.5Reconnect the GPS antenna cable.6Allow the GPS to become the active timing source.SVerify the BBXs remain keyed and INS.SVerify no other modules went OOS due to the transfer back to the GPS reference.SObserve the PWR/ALM LEDs on CSM 1 are steady GREEN.7 Disable CSM 1 and enable CSM 2.SVarious CSM source and clock alarms are now reported and the site comes down.SAlarms clear when the site comes back up.8Allow the CSM 2 board to go INS_ACT.SVerify the BBXs are dekeyed and OOS, and the MCCs are OOS_RAM.SVerify no other modules went OOS due to the transfer to CSM 2 reference.SObserve the PWR/ALM LEDs on CSM 2 front panels are steady GREEN.NOTEIt can take up to 20 minutes for the CSM to re-establish the GPS link and go INS. MCCs goOOS_RAM.9Key BBXs 1 and R and observe a carrier is present.10 Repeat Steps 2 through 6 to verify CSM source redundancy with CSM 2.NOTEDO NOT ENABLE the redundant CSM.. . . continued on next page3
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing – continued 3-98 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTTable 3-44: CSM, GPS, & HSO, Redundancy/Alarm TestsStep Action11 Disable CSM 2 and enable CSM 1.SVarious CSM Source and Clock alarms are reported and the site comes down.SAlarms clear when the site comes back up.12 De-key the Xcvr by selecting Device>BBX/MAWI>Dekey.13 Allow the CSM 1 board to go INS_ACT.SVerify the BBXs are de-keyed and OOS.SVerify no other modules went OOS due to the transfer to CSM 1 reference.SObserve PWR/ALM LEDs on the CSM 1 front panels are steady GREEN.14 Disable the primary and redundant BBXs. MGLI/GLI Redundancy TestThis test can only be performed when the MM path isestablished by the MM (not just with LAPD linkconnected). Attempting to force the GLIs to “hot swap”under alarm monitor control, when isolated from the MM,causes MGLIs to hang up.CAUTIONTable 3-45: MGLI/GLI Redundancy Test (with MM Connection Established)Step ActionNOTESThis test assumes the alarm monitor is NOT connected to the BTS and the T1/E1 span is connectedand communication is established with the MM.SBOTH GLIs must be INS before continuing.1Verify the BBXs are enabled and a CDMA carrier is present.2Identify the primary and redundant MGLI pairs.3Pull the MGLI that is currently INS–ACT and has cage control.4Observe the BBX remains GREEN, and the redundant MGLI is now active.5Verify no other modules go OOS due to the transfer of control to the redundant module.6Verify that the BBXs are enabled and a CDMA carrier is present.7Reinstall the MGLI and have the OMCR/CBSC place it back in-service.8Repeat Steps 1 through 7 to verify the other MGLI/GLI board.3
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 3-99DRAFTAlarms TestingAlarm VerificationALARM connectors provide Customer Defined Alarm Inputs andOutputs. The customer can connect BTS site alarm input sensors andoutput devices to the BTS, thus providing alarm reporting of activesensors as well controlling output devices.The SC 4812T is capable of concurrently monitoring 35 input signals.These inputs are divided between 2 Alarm connectors marked ‘ALARMA’ and ‘ALARM B’ located at the top of the frame (see Figure 3-28).The ALARM A connector is always functional; ALARM B isfunctional when an AMR module is equipped in the AMR 2 slot in thedistribution shelf. ALARM A port monitors input numbers 1 through18, while ALARM B port monitors input numbers 19, 20, and 22through 36 (see Figure 3-29). Alarm 21 is reserved for system use. Statetransitions on these input lines are reported to the LMF and OMCR asMGLI Input Relay alarms.ALARM A and ALARM B connectors each provide 18 inputs and 8outputs. If both A and B are functional, 36 inputs and 16 outputs areavailable. They may be configured as redundant. The configuration is setby the CBSC.Alarm Reporting DisplayThe Alarm Monitor window can be displayed to list alarms that occurafter the window is displayed. To access the Alarm Monitor window,select Util>Alarm Monitor.The following buttons are included:SThe Options button allows for a severity level (Warning, Minor, andMajor) selection. The default is all levels. To change the level ofalarms reported click on the Options button and highlight the desiredalarm level(s). To select multiple levels press the <Ctrl> key (forindividual selections) or <Shift> key (for a range of selections) whileclicking on the desired levels.SThe Pause button pauses/stops the display of alarms. When the Pausebutton is clicked the name of the button changes to Continue. Whenthe Continue button is clicked, the display of alarms continues.Alarms that occur between the time the Pause button is clicked andthe Continue button is clicked are not displayed.SThe Clear button clears the Alarm Monitor display. New alarms thatoccur after the Clear button is clicked are displayed.SThe Dismiss button dismisses/closes the Alarm Monitor display.3
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing – continued 3-100 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTFigure 3-28: Alarm Connector Location andConnector Pin Numberingti-CDMA-WP-00041-v01-ildoc-ftw591602591602PurposeThe following procedures verify the customer defined alarms and relaycontacts are functioning properly. These tests are performed on all AMRalarms/relays in a sequential manner until all have been verified. Performthese procedures periodically to ensure the external alarms are reportedproperly. Following these procedures ensures continued peak systemperformance.Study the site engineering documents and perform the following testsonly after first verifying that the AMR cabling configuration required tointerconnect the BTS frame with external alarm sensors and/or relaysmeet requirements called out in the 1X SC 4812T-MC BTS HardwareInstallation .Motorola highly recommends that you read and understandthis procedure in its entirety before starting this procedure.NOTETest EquipmentThe following test equipment is required to perform these tests:SLMFSAlarms Test Box (CGDSCMIS00014) –optional3
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 3-101DRAFTAbbreviations used in the following figures and tables aredefined as:SNC = normally closedSNO = normally openSCOM or C = commonSCDO = Customer Defined (Relay) OutputSCDI = Customer Defined (Alarm) InputNOTEFigure 3-29: Figure Title Goes Here59 160 2ALARM A(AMR 1) ALARM B(AMR 2)Returns2526A CDI 18 . . . ACDI 159 160 2 Returns2526B CDI 36 . . . B CDI19 FW00302The preferred method to verify alarms is to follow theAlarms Test Box Procedure in Table 3-46. If not using anAlarm Test Box, follow the procedure in Table 3-47.NOTECDI Alarm Input Verificationwith Alarms Test BoxTable 3-46 describes how to test the CDI alarm input verification usingthe Alarm Test Box. Follow the steps as instructed and compare resultswith the LMF display.It may take a few seconds for alarms to be reported. Thedefault delay is 5 seconds. Leave the alarms test boxswitches in the new position until the alarms have beenreported.NOTE3
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing – continued 3-102 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTTable 3-46: CDI Alarm Input Verification Using the Alarms Test BoxStep Action1Connect the LMF to the BTS and log into the BTS.2Select the MGLI.3Click on the Device menu.4Click on the Set Alarm Relays menu item.5Click on Normally Open.A status report window displays the results of the action.6Click on the OK button to close the status report window.7Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Open position.8Connect the alarms test box to the ALARM A connector (see Figure 3-28).9Set all of the switches on the alarms test box to the Closed position. An alarm should be reported foreach switch setting.10 Set all of the switches on the alarms test box to the Open position. A clear alarm should be reportedfor each switch setting.11 Disconnect the alarms test box from the ALARM A connector.12 Connect the alarms test box to the ALARM B connector.13 Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Closed position. An alarm should be reported for eachswitch setting14 Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Open position. A clear alarm should be reported for eachswitch setting.15 Disconnect the alarms test box from the ALARM B connector.16 Select the MGLI.17 Click on the Device menu.18 Click on the Set Alarm Relays menu item.19 Click on Normally Closed. A status report window displays the results of the action.20 Click OK to close the status report window.Alarms should be reported for alarm inputs 1 through 36.21 Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Closed position.22 Connect the alarms test box to the ALARM A connector.Alarms should be reported for alarm inputs 1 through 18.23 Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Open position.An alarm should be reported for each switch setting.. . . continued on next page3
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 3-103DRAFTTable 3-46: CDI Alarm Input Verification Using the Alarms Test BoxStep Action24 Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Closed position.A clear alarm should be reported for each switch setting.25 Disconnect the alarms test box from the ALARM A connector.NOTEInput 21 (pins 29 and 30) on the Alarm B connector is reserved for the Power Supply Modules alarm.26 Connect the alarms test box to the ALARM B connector.A clear alarm should be reported for alarm inputs 19 through 36.27 Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Open position.An alarm should be reported for each switch setting.28 Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Closed position.A clear alarm should be reported for each switch setting.29 Disconnect the alarms test box from the ALARM B connector.30 Select the MGLI.31 Click on the Device menu.32 Click on the Set Alarm Relays menu item.33 Click on Unequipped.A status report window displays the results of the action.34 Click on the OK button to close the status report window.35 Connect the alarms test box to the ALARM A connector.36 Set all switches on the alarms test box to both the Open and the Closed position.No alarm should be reported for any switch settings.37 Disconnect the alarms test box from the ALARM A connector.38 Connect the alarms test box to the ALARM B connector.39 Set all switches on the alarms test box to both the Open and the Closed position.No alarm should be reported for any switch settings.40 Disconnect the alarms test box from the ALARM B connector.41 Load data to the MGLI to reset the alarm relay conditions according to the CDF file. CDI Alarm Input Verificationwithout Alarms Test BoxTable 3-47 describes how to test the CDI alarm input verificationwithout the use of the Alarms Test Box. Follow the steps as instructedand compare results with the LMF display.3
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing – continued 3-104 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTIt may take a few seconds for alarms to be reported. Thedefault delay is 5 seconds. When shorting alarm pins waitfor the alarm report before removing the short.NOTETable 3-47: CDI Alarm Input Verification Without the Alarms Test BoxStep Action1Connect the LMF to the BTS and log into the BTS.2Select the MGLI.3Click on the Device menu.4Click on the Set Alarm Relays menu item.5Click on Normally Open.A status report window displays the results of the action.6Click on OK to close the status report window.7Refer to Figure 3-29 and sequentially short the ALARM A connector CDI 1 through CDI 18 pins(25–26 through 59–60) together.An alarm should be reported for each pair of pins that are shorted.A clear alarm should be reported for each pair of pins when the short is removed.NOTEInput 21 (pins 29 and 30) on the Alarm B connector is reserved for the Power Supply Modules alarm.8Refer to Figure 3-29 and sequentially short the ALARM B connector CDI 19 through CDI 36 pins(25–26 through 59–60) together.An alarm should be reported for each pair of pins that are shorted.A clear alarm should be reported for each pair of pins when the short is removed.9Select the MGLI.10 Click on the Device menu.11 Click on the Set Alarm Relays menu item.12 Click on Normally Closed.A status report window displays the results of the action.13 Click on OK to close the status report window.Alarms should be reported for alarm inputs 1 through 36.14 Refer to Figure 3-29 and sequentially short the ALARM A connector CDI 1 through CDI 18 pins(25–26 through 59–60) together.A clear alarm should be reported for each pair of pins that are shorted.An alarm should be reported for each pair of pins when the short is removed.. . . continued on next page3
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 3-105DRAFTTable 3-47: CDI Alarm Input Verification Without the Alarms Test BoxStep ActionNOTEInput 21 (pins 29 and 30) on the Alarm B connector is reserved for the Power Supply Modules alarm.15 Refer to NO TAG and sequentially short the ALARM B connector CDI 19 through CDI 36 pins(25–26 through 59–60) together.A clear alarm should be reported for each pair of pins that are shorted.An alarm should be reported for each pair of pins when the short is removed.16 Select the MGLI.17 Click on the Device menu.18 Click on the Set Alarm Relays menu item.19 Click on Unequipped.A status report window displays the results of the action.20 Click on OK to close the status report window.21 Refer to NO TAG and sequentially short the ALARM A connector CDI 1 through CDI 18 pins (25–26through 59–60) together.No alarms should be displayed.NOTEInput 21 (pins 29 and 30) on the Alarm B connector is reserved for the Power Supply Modules alarm.22 Refer to NO TAG and sequentially short the ALARM B connector CDI 19 through CDI 36 pins(25–26 through 59–60) together.No alarms should be displayed.23 Load data to the MGLI to reset the alarm relay conditions according to the CDF file. Pin and Signal Information forAlarm ConnectorsTable 3-48 lists the pins, wire color codes, and signal names for AlarmsA and B.Table 3-48: Pin and Signal Information for Alarm ConnectorsWire Signal NameWireSignal NamePinWire Color Alarm A Alarm B PinWireColor Alarm A Alarm B1Blu/Wht A CDO1 NC B CDO9 NC 31 Blu/Yel Cust Retn 4 B CDI 222Wht/Blu A CDO1 Com B CDO9 Com 32 Yel/Blu A CDI 4 Cust Retn 223Org/Wht A CDO1 NO B CDO9 NO 33 Org/Yel Cust Retn 5 B CDI 234Wht/Org A CDO2 NC B CDO10 NC 34 Yel/Org A CDI 5 Cust Retn 235Grn/Wht A CDO2 Com B CDO10 Com 35 Grn/Yel Cust Retn 6 B CDI 243
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing – continued 3-106 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTTable 3-48: Pin and Signal Information for Alarm ConnectorsPinSignal NameWireColorPinSignal NameWire ColorPin Alarm BAlarm AWireColorPinAlarm BAlarm AWire Color6Wht/Grn A CDO2 NO B CDO10 NO 36 Yel/Grn A CDI 6 Cust Retn 247Brn/Wht A CDO3 NC B CDO11 NC 37 Brn/Yel Cust Retn 7 B CDI 258Wht/Brn A CDO3 Com B CDO11 Com 38 Yel/Brn A CDI 7 Cust Retn 259Slt/Wht A CDO3 NO B CDO11 NO 39 Slt/Yel Cust Retn 8 B CDI 2610 Wht/Slt A CDO4 NC B CDO12 NC 40 Yel/Slt A CDI 8 Cust Retn 2611 Blu/Red A CDO4 Com B CDO12 Com 41 Blu/Vio Cust Retn 9 B CDI 2712 Red/Blu A CDO4 NO B CDO12 NO 42 Vio/Blu A CDI 9 Cust Retn 2713 Org/Red A CDO5 NC B CDO13 NC 43 Org/Vio Cust Retn 10 B CDI 2814 Red/Org A CDO5 Com B CDO13 Com 44 Vio/Blu A CDI 10 Cust Retn 2815 Grn/Red A CDO5 NO B CDO13 NO 45 Grn/Vio Cust Retn 11 B CDI 2916 Red/Grn A CDO6 NC B CDO14 NC 46 Vio/Grn A CDI 11 Cust Retn 2917 Brn/Red A CDO6 Com B CDO14 Com 47 Brn/Vio Cust Retn 12 B CDI 3018 Red/Brn A CDO6 NO B CDO14 NO 48 Vio/Brn A CDI 12 Cust Retn 3019 Slt/Red A CDO7 NC B CDO15 NC 49 Slt/Vio Cust Retn 13 B CDI 3120 Red/Slt A CDO7 Com B CDO15 Com 50 Vio/Slt A CDI 13 Cust Retn 3121 Blu/Blk A CDO7 NO B CDO15 NO 51 Red/Wht Cust Retn 14 B CDI 3222 Blk/Blu A CDO8 NC B CDO16 NC 52 Wht/Red A CDI 14 Cust Retn 3223 Org/Blk A CDO8 Com B CDO16 Com 53 Blk/Wht Cust Retn 15 B CDI 3324 Blk/Org A CDO8 NO B CDO16 NO 54 Wht/Blk A CDI 15 Cust Retn 3325 Grn/Blk Cust Retn 1 B CDI 19 55 Yel/Wht Cust Retn 16 B CDI 3426 Blk/Grn A CDI 1 Cust Retn 19 56 Wht/Yel A CDI 16 Cust Retn 3427 Brn/Blk Cust Retn 2 B CDI 20 57 Vio/Wht Cust Retn 17 B CDI 3528 Blk/Brn A CDI 2 Cust Retn 20 58 Wht/Vio A CDI 17 Cust Retn 3529 Slt/Blk Cust Retn 3 B CDI 21 +27V*Pwr Conv Alm –48V59 Blk/Red Cust Retn 18 B CDI 3630 Blk/Slt A CDI 3 Cust Retn 21 +27V*Pwr Conv Retn –48V60 Red/Blk A CDI 18 Cust Retn 36NOTE*For –48V, reserved for Power Supply Module Alarm signal. NOT for use as CDOs or CDIs.All Cust Rtrn 1–18 are electronically tied together at the RFMF.All Cust Rtrn 19–36 are electronically tied together at the RFMF.CDO = Customer Defined Output; CDI = Customer Defined Input; NC – normally closed, NO – normally open, Com – commonThe “A CDI” numbering is from the LMF/OMCR/CBSC perspective. LMF/OMCR/CBSC starts the numbering at 19(giving 19 – 36). Actual cable hardware starts the numbering at 0 (giving 0–17)3
5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATPDRAFTChapter 4: Automated Acceptance Test ProcedureTable of ContentsGuide Book 1–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Document Overview 1–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What Is In This Guide? 1–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Book Catalogs and Organization 1–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Book Directory 1–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Catalogs 1–5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Physical Page Layouts 1–6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A/A4 Page and Margin Sizes 1–6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A/A4 Page Text Area 1–7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A/A4 Page Components 1–9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frame and Table Components 1–10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frames With Tools 1–10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flow Charts and Block Diagrams 1–10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line Drawings 1–11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table Types In This Template 1–12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Item/Description Table 1–12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Step Table 1–13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Step/Check Table 1–14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Component Descriptions 1–15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conclusions 1–16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Map Title Goes Here lkjsfdg Sfdkgj Msfd N lkas K lkjsdfl kB lkj fgcb 1–17. . . . . . Block Label Goes Here 1–17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Label Goes Here 1–17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Label Goes Here 1–18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Label Goes Here 1–19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Map Title Goes Here 1–22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Table of Contents – continued1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTNotes4
Automated Acceptance Test Procedures – TX & RX5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 4-1DRAFTIntroductionThe Automated Acceptance Test Procedure (ATP) allows Cellular FieldEngineers (CFEs) to run automated acceptance tests on all equipped BTSsubsystem devices using the Local Maintenance Facility (LMF) andsupported test equipment per the current Cell Site Data File (CDF)assignment.The results of these tests (at the option of the operator) are written to afile that can be printed. All tests are controlled from the LMF platformusing the GPIB interface, therefore, only recommended test equipmentsupported by the LMF can be used.This chapter describes the tests run from the GUI environment, which isthe recommended method. The GUI provides the advantages ofsimplifying the LMF user interface, reducing the potential for miskeyingcommmands and associated parameters, and speeding up the executionof complex operations involving multiple command strings. If you feelthe command line interface (CLI) will provide additional insight into theprogress of ATPs and problems that could possibly be encountered, referto LMF CLI Commands.Before performing any tests, use an editor to view the“CAVEATS” section of the “readme.txt” file in the c:\wlmffolder for any applicable information.The ATP test is to be performed on out-of-service (OOS)sectors only.DO NOT substitute test equipment not supported by theLMF.CAUTIONRefer to Chapter 3 for detailed information on test setconnections for calibrating equipment, cables and other testset components, if required.NOTE4
Automated Acceptance Test Procedures – TX & RX – continued 4-2 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTReduced ATPEquipment has been factory–tested for FCC compliance. Iflicense–governing bodies require documentationsupporting SITE compliance with regulations, a full ATPmay be necessary. Perform the Reduced ATP only ifreports for the specific BTS site are NOT required.NOTEAfter downloading the proper operational software to the BTS, the CFEmust perform these procedures (minimal recommendation):SVerify the TX/RX paths by performing TX Calibration, TX Audit andFER tests.SRetrieve Calibration Data required for normal site operation.Should failures occur while performing the specified tests, refer to theBasic Troubleshooting section of this manual for help in determining thefailure point. Once the point of failure has been identified and corrected,refer to the BTS Optimization and ATP Test Matrix (Table C-3, pageC-4) section to determine the applicable test that must be performed.In the unlikely event that the BTS passes these tests but has a forwardlink problem during normal operation, the CFE should then perform theadditional TX tests for troubleshooting: TX spectral mask, TX rho, andTX code domain.Required Test EquipmentThe following test equipment is required:SLMFSPower meter (used with HP8921A/600 and Advantest R3465)SCommunications system analyzerSSignal generator for FER testing (required for all communicationssystem analyzers for 1X FER)SBefore installing any test equipment directly to anyBTS TX OUT connector, verify that there are noCDMA channels keyed.SAt active sites, have the OMCR/CBSC place the carrierassigned to the PAs under test OOS. Failure to do socan result in serious personal injury and/or equipmentdamage.WARNINGThe test equipment must be re–calibrated before using it toperform the TX Acceptance Tests.NOTE4
Automated Acceptance Test Procedures – TX & RX – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 4-3DRAFTATP Test PrerequisitesAll PAs must be INS during any TX testing.NOTEBefore attempting to run any ATP tests, ensure the following have beencompleted:SBTS has been optimized and calibrated (see Chapter 3).SLMF is logged into the BTS.SCSMs, GLIs, BBXs, and MCCs have correct code load and data load.SPrimary CSM, GLI, and MCCs are INS_ACT (bright green).SBBXs are calibrated and BLOs are downloaded.SNo BBXs are keyed (transmitting).SBBXs are OOS_RAM (flashing green).STest cables are calibrated.STest equipment is connected for ATP tests (see Figure 3-18 throughFigure 3-23).STest equipment has been warmed up 60 minutes and calibrated.SGPIB is on.SBTS transmit connectors are properly terminated for the test(s) to beperformed.Before performing the FER, be sure that all PAs are turnedOFF (circuit breakers pulled) or that all transmitter portsare properly terminated.All transmit ports must be properly terminated for all ATPtests.Failure to observe these warnings may result in bodilyinjury or equipment damage.WARNINGTX OUT ConnectionMany of the acceptance test procedures require takingmeasurements at the TX OUT connector. Allmeasurements will be via the BTS TX OUT connector.NOTE4
Automated Acceptance Test Procedures – TX & RX – continued 4-4 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTATP Test OptionsAll PAs must INS during any TX testing.NOTEThe tests can be run individually or as one of the following groups:SAll TX/RX: Executes all the TX and RX tests.SAll TX: TX tests verify the performance of the BTS transmit line up.These include the GLI, MCC, BBX, and MCIO cards, the PAs andpassive components including ETMs, (S)PLCs, TX filters, and RFcables.SAll RX: RX tests verify the performance of the BTS receiver line up.These include the MPC (for starter frames), EMPC (for expansionframes), MCIO, BBX, MCC, and GLI cards and the passivecomponents including RX filters (starter frame only), and RF cables.SFull Optimization: Executes the TX calibration, downloads the BLO,and executes the TX audit before running all of the TX and RX tests.The Full Optimization test can be run if you want the TXpath calibrated before all the TX and RX tests are run.If manual testing has been performed with the HP analyzer,remove the manual control/system memory card from thecard slot and set the I/O Config to the Talk & Lstn modebefore starting the automated testing.NOTEThe STOP button can be used to stop the testing process.NOTEIndividual Acceptance TestsThe following individual tests can be used to verify the results ofspecific tests.Spectral Purity TX Mask (Primary & Redundant BBX)This test verifies that the transmitted CDMA carrier waveform generatedon each sector meets the transmit spectral mask specification withrespect to the assigned CDF file values.Waveform Quality (rho)This test verifies that the transmitted Pilot channel element digitalwaveform quality (rho) exceeds the minimum specified value inANSI–J_STD–019. “Rho” represents the correlation between actual andperfect CDMA modulation spectrum. A rho value of 1.0000 represents100% (or perfect correlation).4
Automated Acceptance Test Procedures – TX & RX – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 4-5DRAFTPilot Time OffsetThe Pilot Time Offset is the difference between the CDMA analyzermeasurement interval (based on the BTS system time reference) and theincoming block of transmitted data from the BTS (Pilot only, PilotGain = 262, PN Offset = 0).Code Domain Power (Primary & Redundant BBX)This test verifies the code domain power levels, which have been set forall ODD numbered Walsh channels, using the OCNS command. This isdone by verifying that the ratio of PILOT divided by OCNS is equal to10.2 + 2 dB, and, that the noise floor of all EVEN numbered “OFF”Walsh channels measures < –27 dB (with respect to total CDMA channelpower).Frame Error RateThe Frame Error Rate (FER) test verifies RX operation of the entireCDMA Reverse Link using all equipped MCCs assigned to allrespective sectors/antennas. This test verifies the BTS sensitivity on alltraffic channel elements currently configured on all equipped MCCs atan RF input level of –119 dBm (or –116 dBm if using TMPC).ATP Test ProcedureFollow the procedure in Table 4-1 to perform any ATP test.Table 4-1: ATP Test ProcedurenStep Action1Be sure that all prerequisites have been met.2Select the device(s) to be tested.IMPORTANT! Only one carrier can be tested at a time. All PAs must be INS during testing.NOTEIf the LMF has been logged into the BTS with a different Multi–Channel Preselector setting thanthe one to be used for this test, the LMF must be logged out of the BTS and logged in again withthe new Multi–Channel Preselector setting. Using the wrong MPC setting can cause a false testfailure.3From the Tests menu, select the test you want to run.4Select the appropriate carrier (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) displayed in the Channels/Carrierpick list.NOTETo select multiple items, hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> key while making the selections.5Enter the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.The default channel number displayed is determined by the CdmaChans[n] number in thecbsc–n.cdf file for the BTS.6If applicable, select Verify BLO (default) or Single–sided BLO.. . . continued on next page4
Automated Acceptance Test Procedures – TX & RX – continued 4-6 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTTable 4-1: ATP Test ProcedurenActionStepNOTESingle–sided BLO is only used when checking non–redundant transceivers.7If applicable, select a test pattern from the Test Pattern pick list.NOTESSelecting Pilot (default) performs tests using only a pilot signal.SSelecting Standard performs tests using pilot, synch, paging and 6 traffic channels. Thisrequires an MCC to be selected.SSelecting CDFPilot performs tests using only a pilot signal, however, the gain for the channelelements is specified in the CDF file.SSelecting CDF performs tests using pilot, synch, paging and 6 traffic channels, however, thegain for the channel elements is specified in the CDF file.8Click on the OK button.The status report window and a Directions pop-up are displayed.9Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed.The test results are displayed in the status report window.10 Click on Save Results or Dismiss.NOTEIf Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the test report file.11 Refer to Steps NO TAG through sub-step NO TAG of Table 3-37 to dekey. 4
TX Spectral Purity Trasmit Mask Acceptance Test5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 4-7DRAFTTx Mask TestThis test verifies the spectral purity of each BBX carrier keyed up at aspecific frequency, per the current CDF file assignment. All tests areperformed using the external calibrated test set, controlled by the samecommand. All measurements are via the appropriate TX OUT connector.The Pilot Gain is set to 541 for each antenna, and all channel elementsfrom the MCCs are forward-link disabled. The BBX is keyed up, usingboth bbxlvl and bay level offsets, to generate a CDMA carrier (with pilotchannel element only). BBX power output is set to obtain +40 dBm asmeasured at the TX OUT connector (on the BTS directional coupler).TX output power is set to +40 dBm by setting BTS powerlevel to +33.5 dBm to compensate for 6.5 dB increase frompilot gain set to 541.NOTEThe calibrated communications test set measures and returns theattenuation level of all spurious and IM products in a 30 kHz resolutionbandwidth. With respect to the mean power of the CDMA channelmeasured in a 1.23 MHz bandwidth in dB, verify that results meetsystem tolerances at the following test points:– at least –45 dB @ + 750 kHz from center frequency– at least –45 dB @ – 750 kHz from center frequency– at least –60 dB @ – 1980 kHz from center frequency– at least –60 dB @ – 1980 kHz from center frequencyThe BBX then de-keys, and, if selected, the MCC is re-configured toassign the applicable redundant BBX to the current TX antenna pathunder test. The test is then repeated. See Table 4-1 to perform this test.4
TX Spectral Purity Trasmit Mask Acceptance Test – continued 4-8 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTFigure 4-1: TX Mask Verification Spectrum Analyzer Display– 900 kHz + 900 kHzCenter FrequencyReferenceAttenuation level of allspurious and IM productswith respect to the meanpower of the CDMA channel.5 MHz Span/DivAmpl 10 dB/DivMean CDMA Bandwidth Power Reference+750 kHz+ 1980 kHz– 750 kHz– 1980 kHzFW002824
TX Waveform Quality (rho) Acceptance Test5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 4-9DRAFTRho TestThis test verifies the transmitted Pilot channel element digital waveformquality of each BBX carrier keyed up at a specific frequency per thecurrent CDF file assignment. All tests are performed using the externalcalibrated test set controlled by the same command. All measurementsare via the appropriate TX OUT connector.The Pilot Gain is set to 262 for each antenna, and all channel elementsfrom the MCCs are forward link disabled. The BBX is keyed up usingboth bbxlvl and bay level offsets, to generate a CDMA carrier (with pilotchannel element only, Walsh code 0). BBX power output is set to40 dBm as measured at the TX OUT connector (on the BTS directionalcoupler).The calibrated communications test set measures and returns the Pilotchannel element digital waveform quality (rho) in dB, verifying that theresult meets system tolerances:SWaveform quality (rho) should be w 0.912 (–0.4 dB).The BBX then de-keys and, if selected, the MCC is re-configured toassign the applicable redundant BBX to the current TX antenna pathunder test. The test is then be repeated. See Table 4-1 to perform thistest.4
TX Pilot Time Offset Acceptance Test 4-10 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTPilot Offset Acceptance TestThis test verifies the transmitted Pilot channel element Pilot Time Offsetof each BBX carrier keyed up at a specific frequency per the currentCDF file assignment. All tests are performed using the externalcalibrated test set controlled by the same command. All measurementsare via the appropriate TX OUT connector.The Pilot Gain is set to 262 for each antenna, and all TCH elements fromthe MCCs are forward link disabled. The BBX is keyed up, using bothbbxlvl and bay level offsets, to generate a CDMA carrier (with pilotchannel element only, Walsh code 0). BBX power output is set to40 dBm as measured at the TX OUT connector (on either the BTS orRFDS directional coupler).The calibrated communications test set measures and returns the PilotTime Offset in µs, verifying results meet system tolerances:SPilot Time Offset should be within + 3 µs of the target PTOffset (0 µs).The BBX then de-keys, and if selected, the MCC is re-configured toassign the applicable redundant BBX to the current TX antenna pathunder test. The test is then repeated. See Table 4-1 to perform this test.4
TX Code Domain Power/Noise Floor Acceptance Test5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 4-11DRAFTCode Domain Power TestThis test verifies the Code Domain Power/Noise of each BBX carrierkeyed up at a specific frequency per the current CDF file assignment.All tests are performed using the external calibrated test set controlled bythe same command. All measurements are via the appropriate TX OUTconnector.For each sector/antenna under test, the Pilot Gain is set to 262. All MCCchannel elements under test are configured to generate OrthogonalChannel Noise Source (OCNS) on different odd Walsh codes and to beassigned a full–rate gain of 81. The maximum number of MCC/CEs tobe tested at any one time is 32 (32 odd Walsh codes). If more than 32CEs exist, then multiple sets of measurements are made; so all channelelements are verified on all sectors.BBX power output is set to 40 dBm as measured at the TX OUTconnector.You verify the code domain power levels, which have been set for allODD numbered Walsh channels, using the OCNS command. This isdone by verifying that Pilot Power (dBm) minus OCNS Power (dBm) isequal to 10.2 + 2 dB and that the noise floor of all “OFF” Walsh channelsmeasures < –27 dB (with respect to total CDMA channel power).When performing this test using the LMF and the MCC isan MCC8E or MCC24E, the redundant BBX may fail orshow marginal performance. This is due to a timingmismatch that the LMF does not address. Performing thistest from the CBSC will not have this timing problem.NOTEThe BBX then de-keys and, if selected, the MCC is re-configured toassign the applicable redundant BBX to the current TX antenna pathunder test. The test is then repeated. Upon completion of the test, OCNSis disabled on the specified MCC/CE.If using Advantest test equipment, Code Domain TestMUST be configured in RC–1 mode.NOTESee Table 4-1 to perform this test.4
TX Code Domain Power/Noise Floor Acceptance Test – continued 4-12 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTFigure 4-2: Code Domain Power and Noise Floor LevelsPilot ChannelActive channelsPILOT LEVELMAX OCNS SPEC.MIN OCNS SPEC.MAXIMUM NOISE FLOOR: < –27 dB SPEC.Inactive channelsWalsh 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ... 64MAXOCNSCHAN-NELMINOCNSCHAN-NEL8.2 dB 12.2 dBMaxnoisefloorPilot ChannelActive channelsPILOT LEVELMAX OCNS SPEC.MIN OCNS SPEC.MAXIMUM NOISE FLOOR:< –27 dBInactive channelsWalsh 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ... 64failure – doesnot meet minocns spec.failure – ex-ceeds maxocns spec.8.2 dB 12.2 dBfailure – exceedsmax noise floorspec. Showing all OCNS Passing Indicating Failures FW002834
RX Frame Error Rate (FER) Acceptance Test5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 4-13DRAFTFER TestThis test verifies the BTS FER on all traffic channel elements currentlyconfigured on all equipped MCCs (full rate at 1% FER) at an RF inputlevel of –119 dBm [or –116 dBm if using Tower TopAmplifier (TMPC)]. All tests are performed using the external calibratedtest set as the signal source controlled by the same command. Allmeasurements are via the LMF.The Pilot Gain is set to 262 for each TX antenna, and all channelelements from the MCCs are forward-link disabled. The BBX is keyedup, using only bbxlvl level offsets, to generate a CDMA carrier (withpilot channel element only). BBX power output is set to –20 dBm asmeasured at the TX OUT connector. The BBX must be keyed to enablethe RX receive circuitry.The LMF prompts the MCC/CE under test to measure all zero longcodeand provide the FER report on the selected active MCC on the reverselink for both the main and diversity RX antenna paths, verifying thatresults meet the following specification:SFER returned less than 1% and total frames measured is 1500All MCC/CEs selected are tested on the specified RX antenna path. TheBBX then de-keys and, if selected, the MCC is re-configured to assignthe applicable redundant BBX to the current RX antenna paths undertest. The test is then repeated. See Table 4-1 to perform this test.4
Generate an ATP Report 4-14 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTBackgroundEach time an ATP test is run, an ATP report is updated to include theresults of the most recent ATP tests if the Save Results button is used toclose the status report window. The ATP report is not updated if thestatus reports window is closed using the Dismiss button.ATP ReportEach time an ATP test is run, a separate report is created for each BTSand includes the following for each test:STest nameSBBX numberSChannel numberSCarrier numberSSector numberSUpper test limitSLower test limitSTest resultSPASS or FAILSDescription information (if applicable)STime stampSDetails/Warning information (if applicable)The report can be printed if the LMF computer is connected to a printer.Follow the procedure in the Table 4-2 to view and/or print the ATPreport for a BTS.Table 4-2: Generating an ATP ReportnStep Action1Click on the Login tab (if not in the forefront).2Select the desired BTS from the available Base Stationpick list.3Click on the Report button.4Click on a column heading to sort the report.5– If not desiring a printable file copy, click on theDismiss button.– If requiring a printable file copy, select the desiredfile type in the picklist and click on the Save button.4
5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATPDRAFTChapter 5: Prepare to Leave the SiteTable of ContentsGuide Book 1–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Document Overview 1–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What Is In This Guide? 1–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Book Catalogs and Organization 1–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Book Directory 1–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Catalogs 1–5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Physical Page Layouts 1–6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A/A4 Page and Margin Sizes 1–6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A/A4 Page Text Area 1–7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A/A4 Page Components 1–9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frame and Table Components 1–10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frames With Tools 1–10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flow Charts and Block Diagrams 1–10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line Drawings 1–11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table Types In This Template 1–12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Item/Description Table 1–12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Step Table 1–13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Step/Check Table 1–14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Component Descriptions 1–15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conclusions 1–16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Map Title Goes Here lkjsfdg Sfdkgj Msfd N lkas K lkjsdfl kB lkj fgcb 1–17. . . . . . Block Label Goes Here 1–17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Label Goes Here 1–17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Label Goes Here 1–18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Label Goes Here 1–19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Map Title Goes Here 1–22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Table of Contents – continued1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTNotes5
Updating Calibration Data Files5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5-1DRAFTSoftware Release caveatsSoftware Release R2.16.4.1 allows the user to load the calibration filefrom the LMF directly onto the MGLI. The MGLI will then ftp the newcalibration file to the OMC–R, thereby eliminating the need for the userto place the calibration file at the OMC–R.Copy and Load Cal File to toCBSCUpdated calibration (CAL) file information must be moved from theLMF Windows environment back to the CBSC, which resides in a Unixenvironment. The procedures that follow detail how to move files fromone environment to the other.Backup CAL Data to a DisketteThe BLO calibration files should be backed up to a diskette (per BTS).Follow the procedure in Table 5-1 to copy CAL files from a CDMALMF computer to a diskette.Table 5-1: Backup CAL Data to a DisketteStep Action1 With Windows running on the LMF computer, insert a diskinto Drive A:\.2Launch the Windows Explorer application program from theStart > Programs menu list.3Select the applicable <x>:\<lmf home directory/cdma/bts–#folder.4Drag the bts–#.cal file to Drive A.5Repeat Steps 3 and 4, as required, for other bts–# folders.5
Updating Calibration Data Files – continued 5-2 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTCopying CAL Files from Diskette to the CBSCFollow the procedure in Table 5-2 to copy CAL files from a diskette tothe CBSC.Table 5-2: Procedures to Copy CAL Files from Diskette to the CBSCStep Action1Log into the CBSC on the OMC–R Unix workstation usingyour account name and password.2Place the diskette containing calibration files (cal files) in theworkstation diskette drive.3 Type eject –q and press the Enter key.4 Type mount and press the Enter key. Verify thatfloppy/no_name is displayed.NOTEIf the eject command has been previously entered,floppy/no_name will be appended with a number. Usethe explicit floppy/no_name reference displayed.5Type in cd /floppy/no_name and press the Enter key.6Type in ls –lia and press the Enter key. Verify the bts–#.calfile filename appears in the displayed directory listing.7Type in cd and press the Enter key.8Type in pwd and press the Enter key. Verify the displayedresponse shows the correct home directory (/home/<user’sname>).9 With Solaris versions of Unix, create a Unix–formattedversion of the bts–#.cal file in the home directory byperforming the following:9a – Type in dos2unix /floppy/no_name/bts–#.cal bts–#.caland press the Enter key.Where: # = BTS number for which the CAL file wascreatedNOTEOther versions of Unix do not support the dos2unixcommand. In these cases, use the Unix cp (copy) command.The copied files will contain DOS line feed characters whichmust be edited out with a Unix text editor.10 Type in ls –l *.cal and press the Enter key. Verify the CALfiles have been copied. Verify all CAL files to be transferredappear in the displayed listing.. . . continued on next page5
Updating Calibration Data Files – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5-3DRAFTTable 5-2: Procedures to Copy CAL Files from Diskette to the CBSCStep Action11 Type eject and press the Enter key.12 Remove the diskette from the workstation. 5
Prepare to Leave the Site 5-4 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTExternal Test EquipmentRemovalPerform the procedure in Table 5-3 to disconnect the test equipment andconfigure the BTS for active service.Table 5-3: External Test Equipment RemovalStep Action1Disconnect all external test equipment from all TX and RXconnectors on the top of the frame.2Reconnect and visually inspect all TX and RX antenna feedlines at the top of the frame.Verify that all sector antenna feed lines are connected tothe correct ports on the frame. Crossed antenna cables willcause system degradation of call processing.CAUTIONEach module or device can be in any state prior todownloading. Each module or device will be in anOOS_RAM state after downloading has completed.SFor all LMF commands, information in italicsrepresents valid ranges for that command field.SOnly those fields requiring an input will be specified.Default values for other fields will be assumed.SFor more complete command examples (includingsystem response details), refer to the CDMA LMF UserGuide.NOTEBTS Site Span ConfigurationVerificationPerform the procedure in Table 5-4 to verify the current Span FramingFormat and Line Build Out (LBO) parameters. ALL MGLI/GLI boardsin all C–CCP shelves that terminate a T1/E1 span should be verified.5
Prepare to Leave the Site – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5-5DRAFTTable 5-4: BTS Span Parameter ConfigurationStep Action1Connect a serial cable from the LMF COM1 port (via null modem board) to the front panel of theMGLI MMI port (see Figure 5-1).2Start an MMI communication session with MGLI by using the Windows desktop shortcut icon (seeTable 3-3 on page 3-11).NOTEThe LMF program must not be running when a Hyperterminal session is started if COM1 is beingused for the MMI session.3Verify the span parameter settings for frame format, equalization, and linkspeed for the span to be usedby entering the following at the GLI3> prompt:config ni currentThe system will respond with a display similar to the following:The frame format in flash is set to use T1_2.Equalization: Span A – Default (0–131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1) Span B – Default (0–131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1) Span C – Default (0–131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1) Span D – Default (0–131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1) Span E – Default (0–131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1) Span F – Default (0–131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1)Linkspeed: Default (56K for T1 D4 AMI, 64K otherwise)Currently, the link is running at the default rate The actual rate is 0NOTESDefaults for span equalization are 0–131 feet for T1/J1 spans and 120 Ohm for E1.SDefault linkspeed is 56K for T1 D4 AMI spans and 64K for all other types.SThere is no need to change from defaults unless the provisioned span configuration requires it.4The span parameter settings in the GLI must match those provisioned in the OMC–R database for theBTS. If they do not, proceed to Table 5-5 to change the span parameter settings.5Repeat steps 1 through 4 for all remaining GLIs.6Exit the GLI MMI session and HyperTerminal connection by selecting File from the connectionwindow menu bar, and then Exit from the drop–down menu. 5
Prepare to Leave the Site – continued 5-6 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTFigure 5-1: MGLI/GLI MMI Port ConnectionSERIAL CABLE(P/N 3009786R01)NULL MODEM BOARD(PART# 8484877P01)RS–232 CABLE FROM LMF COM 1PORTMMI SERIAL PORTGLI BOARDSet BTS Site SpanConfigurationPerform the procedure in Table 5-5 to configure the Span FramingFormat and Line Build Out (LBO) parameters. ALL MGLI/GLI boardsin all C–CCP shelves that terminate a T1/E1 span must be configured.Perform the following procedure ONLY if spanconfigurations loaded in the MGLI/GLIs do not matchthose in the OMC–R data base, AND ONLY when the exactconfiguration data is available. Loading incorrect spanconfiguration data will render the site inoperable.CAUTION5
Prepare to Leave the Site – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5-7DRAFTTable 5-5: Set GLI3 Span Parameter ConfigurationStep Action1If it has not been done, start a GLI3 MMI communication session on the LMF computer as describedin Table 3-10.2At the GLI3> prompt, enter the following:config ni formatThe terminal will display a response similar to the following:COMMAND SYNTAX: config ni format option Next available options: LIST – option : Span Option E1_1 : E1_1 – E1 HDB3 CRC4 no TS16 E1_2 : E1_2 – E1 HDB3 no CRC4 no TS16 E1_3 : E1_3 – E1 HDB3 CRC4 TS16 E1_4 : E1_4 – E1 HDB3 no CRC4 TS16 T1_1 : T1_1 – D4, AMI, No ZCS T1_2 : T1_2 – ESF, B8ZS J1_1 : J1_1 – ESF, B8ZS (Japan) – Default J1_2 : J1_2 – ESF, B8ZS T1_3 : T1_3 – D4, AMI, ZCS>NOTEWith this command, all active (in–use) spans will be set to the same format.3To set or change the span type, enter the correct option from the list at the entry prompt (>), as shownin the following example:> T1_2NOTEThe entry is case–sensitive and must be typed exactly as it appears in the list. If the entry is typedincorrectly, a response similar to the following will be displayed:CP: Invalid command01.061980 00:11’59 MGLI–000–2 INS–ACT BTS–CDMA 16.1.68.00GLI3>4An acknowledgement similar to the following will be displayed:The value has been programmed. It will take effect after the next reset.GLI3>. . . continued on next page5
Prepare to Leave the Site – continued 5-8 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTTable 5-5: Set GLI3 Span Parameter ConfigurationStep Action5If the current MGLI/GLI span rate must be changed, enter the following MMI command:config ni linkspeedA response similar to the following will be displayed :Next available options: LIST – linkspeed : Span Linkspeed 56K : 56K (default for T1_1 and T1_3 systems) 64K : 64K (default for all other span configurations)>NOTEWith this command, all active (in–use) spans will be set to the same linkspeed.6To set or change the span linkspeed, enter the required option from the list at the entry prompt (>), asshown in the following example:> 64KNOTEThe entry is case–sensitive and must be typed exactly as it appears in the list. If the entry is typedincorrectly, a response similar to the following will be displayed:CP: Invalid command01.061980 00:12’04 MGLI–000–2 INS–ACT BTS–CDMA 16.1.68.00GLI3>7An acknowledgement similar to the following will be displayed:The value has been programmed. It will take effect after the next reset.GLI3>. . . continued on next page5
Prepare to Leave the Site – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5-9DRAFTTable 5-5: Set GLI3 Span Parameter ConfigurationStep Action8If the span equalization must be changed, enter the following MMI command:config ni equalA response similar to the following will be displayed:COMMAND SYNTAX: config ni equal span equal Next available options: LIST – span : Span a : Span A b : Span B c : Span C d : Span D e : Span E f : Span F>. . . continued on next page5
Prepare to Leave the Site – continued 5-10 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTTable 5-5: Set GLI3 Span Parameter ConfigurationStep Action9At the entry prompt (>), enter the designator from the list for the span to be changed as shown in thefollowing example:> aA response similar to the following will be displayed :COMMAND SYNTAX: config ni equal a equalNext available options: LIST – equal : Span Equalization 0 : 0–131 feet (default for T1/J1) 1 : 132–262 feet 2 : 263–393 feet 3 : 394–524 feet 4 : 525–655 feet 5 : LONG HAUL 6 : 75 OHM 7 : 120 OHM (default for E1) 8 : T1 Long Haul mode. No Attenuation 9 : T1 Long Haul mode. 7.5 dB Attenuation 10 : T1 Long Haul mode. 15.0 dB Attenuation 11 : T1 Long Haul mode. 22.5 dB Attenuation 12 : E1 Long Haul mode.>! CAUTIONWhen selecting span equalization settings, comply with the following or the BTS may operateerratically or unpredictably:SFor ALL BTS types, do not select any of the following settings if they are displayed:– 5 LONG HAUL– 6 75 OHM– 11 T1 Long Haul mode. 22.5 dB Attenuation– 12 E1 Long Haul modeSFor four–digit BTSs supported with Channel Service Units (CSU), do not select any of thefollowing additional settings:– 8 T1 Long Haul mode. No Attenuation– 9 T1 Long Haul mode. 7.5 dB Attenuation– 10 T1 Long Haul mode. 15.0 dB Attenuation. . . continued on next page5
Prepare to Leave the Site – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5-11DRAFTTable 5-5: Set GLI3 Span Parameter ConfigurationStep Action10 At the entry prompt (>), enter the code for the required equalization from the list as shown in thefollowing example (this should be the distance from the BTS Span I/O to the site demarcationequipment or CSU, as applicable):> 0A response similar to the following will be displayed :> 0The value has been programmed. It will take effect after the next reset.GLI2>11 Repeat steps 8 through 10 for each in–use span.12 ! CAUTIONDo not set the card for loopback as described in this step unless specifically required or requested fortesting.Enter the following MMI command to turn loopback on or off:GLI#> config ni loopback <on or off>Loopback commands and responses:GLI#> config ni loopback onLoopback request SUCCESSFUL: All framers have been placed in loopback.They will remain in loopback for 1 hour.GLI#> config ni loopback offLoopback request SUCCESSFUL: All framers have been removed from loopback.13 NOTEThis step must be performed for GLI3 cards operating on a packet image to ensure the span parameterchanges will replace the previous settings.For a GLI3 card in packet mode, enter the following:rmfile /nvram00/config/hlp_param.txtA response similar to the following will be displayed :GLI3> rmfile /nvram00/config/hlp_param.txt11.24.2003 23:14:57 MGLI–004–1 CC PRESENT BTS–CDMA 16.40.00.09 Removing file: /nvram00/config/hlp_param.txtSuccessfully removed file: /nvram00/config/hlp_param.txtGLI3>. . . continued on next page5
Prepare to Leave the Site – continued 5-12 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTTable 5-5: Set GLI3 Span Parameter ConfigurationStep Action14 * IMPORTANTSAfter executing the config ni format, config ni linkspeed, and/or config ni equal commands,the affected MGLI/GLI board MUST be reset and reloaded for changes to take effect.SAlthough defaults are shown in the software, always consult site–specific documentation for spantype, equalization, and linkspeed used at the site where the cards are to be installed.Reset the card using the MMI reset command.15 Once the card has completed resetting, execute the following command to verify span settings are asrequired:config ni currentA response similar to the following will be displayed :The frame format in flash is set to use T1_2.Equalization: Span A – 0–131 feet Span B – 0–131 feet Span C – Default (0–131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1) Span D – Default (0–131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1) Span E – Default (0–131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1) Span F – Default (0–131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1)Linkspeed: 64KCurrently, the link is running at 64K The actual rate is 016 If the span configuration is not correct, perform the applicable step from this table to change it andrepeat steps 14 and 15 to verify required changes have been programmed.17 Repeat steps 1 through 16 for each GLI card requiring changes in the span parameter settings.18 If no other MMI actions are required for the card, terminate the MMI communication session anddisconnect the LMF computer from the card. LMF RemovalDO NOT power down the LMF without performing theprocedure below. Corrupted/lost data files may result, andin some cases, the LMF may lock up.NOTEFollow the procedure in Table 5-6 to terminate the LMF session andremove the terminal.5
Prepare to Leave the Site – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5-13DRAFTTable 5-6: LMF Termination and RemovalnStep Action1From the CDMA window select File>Exit.NOTEThe “File > Exit” command will prompt you to confirm the logout proceand Exit” command will not prompt you and continues to shut down LM2From the Windows Task Bar click Start>Shutdown.Click Yes when the Shut Down Windows message appears.3Disconnect the LMF terminal Ethernet connector from the BTS cabinet.4Disconnect the LMF serial port, the RS-232 to GPIB interface box, and required for equipment transport.Re–connect BTS T1/E1 Spansand Integrated Frame ModemBefore leaving the site, connect any T1 span TELCO connectors thatwere removed to allow the LMF to control the BTS. Refer to Table 5-7and Figure 5-2 as required.Table 5-7: T1/E1 Span/IFM ConnectionsStep Action1Connect the 50–pin TELCO cables to the BTS span I/O board 50–pin TELCO connectors.2If used, connect the dial–up modem RS–232 serial cable to the Site I/O board RS–232 9–pinsub D connector.* IMPORTANTVerify that you connect both SPAN cables (if removed previously), and the Integrated FrameModem (IFM) “TELCO” connector.5
Prepare to Leave the Site – continued 5-14 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTFigure 5-2: Site and Span I/O Boards T1 Span Connections50–PIN TELCOCONNECTORSREMOVEDSPAN A CONNECTOR(TELCO) INTERFACETO SPAN LINESSPAN B CONNECTOR(TELCO) INTERFACETO SPAN LINESTOP of Frame (Site I/O and Span I/O boards)RS–232 9–PIN SUB DCONNECTOR SERIALPORT FOR EXTERNALDIAL UP MODEMCONNECTION (IF USED)FW00299Reset All Devices and InitializeSite RemotelyDevices in the BTS should not be left with data and code loaded fromthe LMF. The configuration data and code loads used for normaloperation could be different from those stored in the LMF files. Performthe procedure in Table 5-8 to reset all devices and initialize site remotely.Table 5-8: Reset BTS Devices and Remote Site InitializationStep Action1Terminate the LMF session by following the procedures in Table 5-6.2Reconnect spans by following the procedure in Table 5-7.3– If BTS is configured for circuit operation, go to Step 4.– If BTS is configured for packet operation, go to Step 5.4Circuit BTS Procedure:4a From the BTS site, contact the OMC–R and request the operator to perform a BTS reset.orAt the BTS site:– unseat one GLI card at a time and wait for 30 seconds;– reseat the GLI and wait for it to complete its initialization (this takes about one minute);– repeat for the second GLI.. . . continued on next page5
Prepare to Leave the Site – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5-15DRAFTTable 5-8: Reset BTS Devices and Remote Site InitializationStep Action4b Depending on the number of installed operational GLI cards, perform one of the following:– With fully redundant GLIs, contact the OMC–R and request the operator to run the ACTIVATEcommand for the BTS.– For a non–redundant GLI or a frame where the redundant GLI is not operational, contact theOMC–R and request the operator:SACTIVATE the GLI to set the Nextload attribute for the GLI to the one for the current BSSsoftware version;SDisable the GLI;SEnable the GLI to allow the MM to load the software version specified by the Nextloadattribute;SOnce the GLI is INS_ACT, contact the OMC–R and request the operator ACTIVATE the BTS.– Once the GLI cards are loaded with the specified code version, the active GLI will verify andupdate, as required, the RAM and, if it is necessary, ROM code loads for the installed CSM,MCC, and BBX cards using the DLM.5Packet BTS procedure:5a From the BTS site, contact the OMC–R and request the operator to PREACTIVATE the BTS to therequired software version for the BSS. There are two types of PREACTIVATE load processes:–Rolling Upgrade: This load process is only available when the BTS cards are populated for fullredundancy as applicable.–Quick Reboot: This process is used when there is not full redundancy for the BTS cards. TheGLI3 will disable and reboot to the new load. This will cause all the other cards to go out ofservice. Once it is rebooted, the GLI3 determines which cards require a new load and thendownloads the cards in the order which they establish communication with the GLI3 followingtheir reboot. The GLI3 can reload up to 16 devices simultaneously.6Account for all tools used and parts removed from the frame during the operations, being sure nonewere left inside the frame.7Visually inspect the frame for any foreign objects left inside, and remove any discovered.8Visually inspect all cable connections, ensuring they are connected as required for normal BTSoperation.9Be sure all internal frame cables are routed and secured to prevent damage to them when the framedoors are closed.10 Close and secure the cabinet doors.11 Verify no alarm conditions are being reported to the OMC–R with the frame doors closed.12 After all activities at the site have been completed, contact the OMC–R and confirm that the BTS isunder OMC–R control. 5
Prepare to Leave the Site – continued 5-16 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTNotes5
5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATPDRAFTChapter 6: Basic TroubleshootingTable of ContentsGuide Book 1–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Document Overview 1–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What Is In This Guide? 1–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Book Catalogs and Organization 1–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Book Directory 1–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Catalogs 1–5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Physical Page Layouts 1–6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A/A4 Page and Margin Sizes 1–6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A/A4 Page Text Area 1–7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A/A4 Page Components 1–9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frame and Table Components 1–10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frames With Tools 1–10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flow Charts and Block Diagrams 1–10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line Drawings 1–11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table Types In This Template 1–12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Item/Description Table 1–12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Step Table 1–13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Step/Check Table 1–14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Component Descriptions 1–15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conclusions 1–16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Map Title Goes Here lkjsfdg Sfdkgj Msfd N lkas K lkjsdfl kB lkj fgcb 1–17. . . . . . Block Label Goes Here 1–17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Label Goes Here 1–17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Label Goes Here 1–18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Label Goes Here 1–19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Map Title Goes Here 1–22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Table of Contents – continued1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTNotes6
Troubleshooting Overview5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 6-1DRAFTOverviewThe information in this section addresses some of the scenarios likely tobe encountered by Cellular Field Engineering (CFE) team members.This troubleshooting guide was created as an interim reference documentfor use in the field. It provides basic “what to do if” basictroubleshooting suggestions when the BTS equipment does not performper the procedure documented in the manual.Comments are consolidated from inputs provided by CFEs in the fieldand information gained form experience in Motorola labs andclassrooms.6
Troubleshooting: Installation 6-2 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTCannot Log into Cell-SiteFollow the procedure in Table 6-1 to troubleshoot a login failure.Table 6-1: Login Failure Troubleshooting ProceduresnStep Action1If MGLI LED is solid RED, it implies a hardware failure. Reset MGLI by re-seating it. If thispersists, install a known good MGLI card in MGLI slot and retry. A Red LED may also indicateno Ethernet termination at top of frame.2Verify that T1 is disconnected (see Table 3-4 on page 3-14).If T1 is still connected, verify the CBSC has disabled the BTS.3Try pinging the MGLI (see Table 3-11 on page 3-32).4Verify the LMF is connected to the Primary LMF port (LAN A) in the front of the BTS (seeTable 3-5 on page 3-15).5Verify the LMF was configured properly (see Preparing the LMF section starting on page 3–6).6Verify the BTS-LMF cable is RG-58 [flexible black cable of less than 76 cm (2.5 feet) length].7Verify the Ethernet ports are terminated properly (see Figure 3-10).8Verify a T-adapter is not used on the LMF side port if connected to the BTS front LMF primaryport.9Try connecting to the I/O panel (top of frame). Use BNC T-adapters at the LMF port for thisconnection.10 Re-boot the LMF and retry.11 Re-seat the MGLI and retry.12 Verify IP addresses are configured properly.Cannot Communicate to PowerMeterFollow the procedure in Table 6-2 to troubleshoot a power metercommunication failure.Table 6-2: Troubleshooting a Power Meter Communication FailurenStep Action1Verify the Power Meter is connected to the LMF with a GPIB adapter.2Verify the cable setup as specified in Chapter 3.3Verify the GPIB address of the power meter is set to the same value displayed in the applicableGPIB address box of the LMF Options window Test Equipment tab. Refer to Table 3-24 orTable 3-25 and the GPIB Addresses section of Appendix F for details.4Verify the GPIB adapter DIP switch settings are correct.Refer to the Test Equipment setup section for details.. . . continued on next page6
Troubleshooting: Installation – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 6-3DRAFTTable 6-2: Troubleshooting a Power Meter Communication FailurenActionStep5Verify the GPIB adapter is not locked up. Under normal conditions, only two green LEDs must be‘ON’ (Power and Ready). If any other LED is continuously ‘ON’, then power-cycle the GPIB Boxand retry.6Verify the LMF computer COM1 port is not used by another application; for example, if aHyperTerminal window is open for MMI, close it.7Reset all test equipment by clicking Util in the BTS menu bar and selectingTest Equipment>Reset from the pull–down lists. Cannot Communicate toCommunications AnalyzerFollow the procedure in Table 6-3 to troubleshoot a communicationsanalyzer communication failure.Table 6-3: Troubleshooting a Communications Analyzer Communication FailurenStep Action1Verify the analyzer is connected to the LMF with GPIB adapter.2Verify the cable setup.3Verify the signal generator GPIB address is set to the same value displayed in the applicable GPIBaddress box of the LMF Options window Test Equipment tab. Refer to Table 3-24 or Table 3-25and the GPIB Address section of Appendix F for details.4Verify the GPIB adapter DIP switch settings are correct. Refer to the CDMA 2000 Test EquipmentPreparation section of Appendix NO TAG for details.5Verify the GPIB adapter is not locked up. Under normal conditions, only two green LEDs must be‘ON’ (Power and Ready). If any other LED is continuously ‘ON’, then cycle the GPIB box powerand retry.6Verify the LMF computer COM1 port is not used by another application; for example, if aHyperTerminal window is open for MMI, close it.7 Reset all test equipment by clicking Util in the BTS menu bar and selectingTest Equipment>Reset from the pull–down lists.6
Troubleshooting: Download 6-4 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTCannot Download CODE to AnyDevice (card)Follow the procedure in Table 6-4 to troubleshoot a code downloadfailure.Table 6-4: Troubleshooting Code Download FailurenStep Action1Verify T1 is disconnected from the BTS.2Verify the LMF can communicate with the BTS device using the Status function.3Communication to the MGLI2 must first be established before trying to talk to any other BTSdevice.The MGLI2 must be INS_ACT state (green).4Verify the card is physically present in the cage and powered-up.5If the card LED is solid RED, it implies hardware failure.Reset the card by re-seating it.If the LED remains solid red, replace with a card from another slot & retry.NOTEThe card can only be replaced by a card of the same type.6Re-seat the card and try again.7If BBX reports a failure message and is OOS_RAM, the code load was OK.8If the download portion completes and the reset portion fails, reset the device by selecting thedevice and Reset.9If a BBX or an MCC remains OOS_ROM (blue) after code download, use the LMFDevice > Status function to verify that the code load was accepted.10 If the code load was accepted, use LMF Device > Download > Flash to load RAM code into flashmemory.Cannot Download DATA to AnyDevice (Card)Perform the procedure in Table 6-5 to troubleshoot a data downloadfailure.Table 6-5: Troubleshooting Data Download FailurenStep Action1Re-seat the card and repeat code and data load procedure.6
Troubleshooting: Download – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 6-5DRAFTCannot ENABLE DeviceBefore a device can be enabled (placed in-service), it must be in theOOS_RAM state (yellow) with data downloaded to the device. The colorof the device changes to green once it is enabled.The three states that devices can be changed to are as follows:SEnabled (green, INS)SDisabled (yellow, OOS_RAM)SReset (blue, OOS_ROM)Follow the procedure in Table 6-6 to troubleshoot a device enablefailure.Table 6-6: Troubleshooting Device Enable (INS) FailurenStep Action1Re-seat the card and repeat the code and data load procedure.2If the CSM cannot be enabled, verify the CDF file has correct latitude and longitude data for cellsite location and GPS sync.3Ensure the primary CSM is in INS_ACT state.NOTEMCCs will not go INS without the CSM being INS.4Verify the 19.6608 MHz CSM clock; MCCs will not go INS otherwise.5The BBX should not be enabled for ATP tests.6If MCCs give “invalid or no system time”, verify the CSM is operable. Miscellaneous ErrorsPerform the procedure in Table 6-7 to troubleshoot miscellaneousfailures.Table 6-7: Miscellaneous FailuresnStep Action1If PAs continue to give alarms, even after cycling power at the circuit breakers, then connect anMMI cable to the PA and set up a Hyperterminal connection (see Table 3-3 on page 3-11).2 Enter ALARMS in the Hyperterminal window.The resulting LMF display may provide an indication of the problem.(Call Field Support for further assistance.)6
Troubleshooting: Calibration 6-6 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTBay Level Offset CalibrationFailurePerform the procedure in Table 6-8 to troubleshoot a BLO calibrationfailure.Only one carrier can be tested at a time. All PAs must beINS during testing. For the carriers not under test, key oneBBX per carrier to a minimum power level. (Refer toTable 3-37).NOTETable 6-8: Troubleshooting BLO Calibration FailurenStep Action1Verify the Power Meter is configured correctly (see the test equipment setup section in Chapter 3)and connection is made to the proper TX port.2Verify the parameters in the bts–#.cdf file are set correctly for 800MHz:Bandclass=0; Freq_Band=8; SSType=83Verify that no PA is in alarm state (flashing red LED).Reset the PA by pulling the circuit breaker and, after 5 seconds, pushing back in.4Re-calibrate the Power Meter and verify it is calibrated correctly with cal factors from the sensorhead.5Verify the GPIB adapter is not locked up.Under normal conditions, only two green LEDs must be ‘ON’ (Power and Ready).If any other LED is continuously ‘ON’, power-cycle (turn power off and on) the GPIB Box andretry.6Verify the sensor head is functioning properly by checking it with the 1 mW (0 dBm) Power Refsignal.7If communication between the LMF and Power Meter is operatonal, the Meter display will show“RES”. Cannot Load BLOFor Load BLO failures see Table 6-7.6
Troubleshooting: Calibration – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 6-7DRAFTCalibration Audit FailureFollow the procedure in Table 6-9 to troubleshoot a calibration auditfailure.Only one carrier can be tested at a time. All PAs must beINS during testing. For the carriers not under test, key oneBBX per carrier to a minimum power level. (Refer toTable 3-37).NOTETable 6-9: Troubleshooting Calibration Audit FailurenStep Action1Verify the Power Meter is configured correctly (refer to the test equipment setup section ofChapter 3).2Re-calibrate the Power Meter and verify it is calibrated correctly with cal factors from the sensorhead.3Verify that no PA is in alarm state (rapidly flashing red LED).Reset the PA by pulling the circuit breaker and, after 5 seconds, pushing back in.4Verify that no sensor head is functioning properly by checking it with the 1 mW (0 dBm) PowerRef signal.5After calibration, the BLO data must be re-loaded to the BBXs before auditing.Click on the BBX(s) and select Device>Download BLO.Re-try the audit.6Verify the GPIB adapter is not locked up.Under normal conditions, only two green LEDs must be “ON” (Power and Ready).If any other LED is continuously “ON”, power-cycle (turn power off and on) the GPIB Box andretry. 6
Troubleshooting: Transmit ATP 6-8 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTBTS passed Reduced ATP testsbut has forward link problemduring normal operationFollow the procedure in Table 6-10 to troubleshoot a Forward Linkproblem during normal operation.Table 6-10: Troubleshooting Forward Link Failure (BTS Passed Reduced ATP)nStep Action1Perform these additional TX tests to troubleshoot a forward link problem:– TX mask– TX rho– TX code domainCannot Perform TX MaskMeasurementFollow the procedure in Table 6-11 to troubleshoot a TX maskmeasurement failure.Only one carrier can be tested at a time. All PAs must beINS during testing. For the carriers not under test, key oneBBX per carrier to a minimum power level. (Refer toTable 3-37).NOTETable 6-11: Troubleshooting TX Mask Measurement FailurenStep Action1Verify that TX audit passes for the BBX(s).2If performing manual measurement, verify analyzer setup.3Verify that no PA in the sector is in alarm state (flashing red LED).Re-set the PA by pulling the circuit breaker and, after 5 seconds, pushing it back in.Cannot Perform Rho or PilotTime Offset MeasurementFollow the procedure in Table 6-12 to troubleshoot a rho or pilot timeoffset measurement failure.Table 6-12: Troubleshooting Rho and Pilot Time Offset Measurement FailurenStep Action1Verify presence of RF signal by switching to spectrum analyzer screen.2Verify PN offsets displayed on the analyzer is the same as the PN offset in the CDF file.. . . continued on next page6
Troubleshooting: Transmit ATP – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 6-9DRAFTTable 6-12: Troubleshooting Rho and Pilot Time Offset Measurement FailurenActionStep3Re–load BBX data and repeat the test.4If performing manual measurement, verify analyzer setup.5Verify that no PA in the sector is in alarm state (flashing red LED). Reset the PA by pulling thecircuit breaker and, after 5 seconds, pushing back in.6If Rho value is unstable and varies considerably (e.g. .95,.92,.93), this may indicate that the GPSis still phasing (i.e., trying to reach and maintain 0 freq. error).Go to the freq. bar in the upper right corner of the Rho meter and select Hz. Press <Shift–avg>and enter 10, to obtain an average Rho value. This is an indication the GPS has not stabilizedbefore going INS and may need to be re-initialized. Cannot Perform Code DomainPower and Noise FloorMeasurementPerform the procedure in Table 6-13 to troubleshoot a code domain andnoise floor measurement failure.Table 6-13: Troubleshooting Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Measurement FailurenStep Action1Verify presence of RF signal by switching to spectrum analyzer screen.2Verify PN offset displayed on analyzer is same as PN offset being used in the CDF file.3Disable and re-enable MCC (one or more MCCs based on extent of failure). 6
Troubleshooting: Receive ATP 6-10 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTMulti–FER Test FailurePerform the procedure in Table 6-14 to troubleshoot a Multi–FERfailure.Table 6-14: Troubleshooting Multi-FER FailurenStep Action1Verify the test equipment set up is correct for an FER test.2Verify the test equipment is locked to 19.6608 and even second clocks.On the HP8921A test set, the yellow LED (REF UNLOCK) must be OFF.3Verify the MCCs have been loaded with data and are INS–ACT.4Disable and re-enable the MCC (one or more based on extent of failure).5Disable, re-load code and data, and re-enable the MCC (one or more MCCs based on extent offailure).6Verify the antenna connections to frame are correct based on the directions messages. 6
Troubleshooting: CSM Checklist5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 6-11DRAFTProblem DescriptionMany of the Clock Synchronization Manager (CSM) board failures maybe resolved in the field before sending the boards to the factory forrepair. This section describes known CSM problems identified in fieldreturns, some of which are field-repairable. Check these problems beforereturning suspect CSM boards.Intermittent 19.6608 MHzReference Clock/GPS ReceiverOperationIf having any problems with CSM board kit numbers, SGLN1145 orSGLN4132, check the suffix with the kit number. If the kit has version“AB”, then replace with version “BC” or higher, and return model “AB”to the repair center.No GPS Reference SourceCheck the CSM boards for proper hardware configuration. CSM kitSGLN1145, in Slot l, has an on-board GPS receiver; while kitSGLN4132, in Slot 2, does not have a GPS receiver. Any incorrectlyconfigured board must be returned to the repair center. Do not attempt tochange hardware configuration in the field. Also, verify the GPSantenna is not damaged and is installed per recommended guidelines.Checksum FailureThe CSM could have corrupted data in its firmware resulting in anon-executable code. The problem is usually caused by either electricaldisturbance or interruption of data during a download. Attempt anotherdownload with no interruptions in the data transfer. Return the CSMboard back to the repair center if the attempt to reload fails.GPS Bad RX Message TypeThis problem is believed to be caused by a later version of CSMsoftware (3.5 or higher) being downloaded, via LMF, followed by anearlier version of CSM software (3.4 or lower), being downloaded fromthe CBSC. Download again with CSM software code 3.5 or higher.Return the CSM board back to the repair center if the attempt to reloadfails.6
Troubleshooting: CSM Checklist – continued 6-12 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTCSM Reference SourceConfiguration ErrorThis problem is caused by incorrect reference source configurationperformed in the field by software download. CSM kits SGLN1145 andSGLN4132 must have proper reference sources configured (as shownbelow) to function correctly.CSM KitNo.HardwareConfigurationCSM SlotNo.Reference SourceConfigurationCDF ValueSGLN1145 With GPS Receiver 1Primary = Local GPSBackup = HSO02 or 18SGLN4132 Without GPS Receiver 2Primary = Remote GPSBackup = HSO12 or 18Takes Too Long for CSM toCome INSThis problem may be caused by a delay in GPS acquisition. Check theaccuracy flag status and/or current position. Refer to the GSM systemtime/GPS and HSO verification section in Chapter 3. At least onesatellite should be visible and tracked for the “surveyed” mode and foursatellites should be visible and tracked for the “estimated” mode. Also,verify correct base site position data used in “surveyed” mode.6
Troubleshooting: C–CCP Backplane5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 6-13DRAFTIntroductionThe C–CCP backplane is a multi–layer board that interconnects all theC–CCP modules. The complexity of this board lends itself to possibleimproper diagnoses when problems occur.Connector FunctionalityThe following connector overview describes the major types ofbackplane connectors along with the functionality of each. Thisinformation allows the CFE to:SDetermine which connector(s) is associated with a specific problemtype.SIsolate problems to a specific cable or connector.Primary “A” and Redundant “B” Inter Shelf Bus ConnectorsThe 40 pin Inter Shelf Bus (ISB) connectors provide an interface busfrom the master GLI to all other GLIs in the modem frame. Their basicfunction is to provide clock synchronization from the master GLI to allother GLIs in the frame.The ISB also provides the following functions:SSpan line grooming when a single span is used for multiple cages.SMMI connection to/from the master GLI to cell site modem.SInterface between GLIs and the AMR (for reporting BTS alarms).Span Line ConnectorThe 50–pin span line connector provides a primary and secondary (ifused) span line interface to each GLI in the C–CCP shelf. The span lineis used for MM/EMX switch control of the Master GLI and also all theBBX traffic.Primary “A” and Redundant “B” Reference DistributionModule Input/OutputThe Reference Distribution Module (RDM) connectors route the 3 MHzreference signals from the CSMs to the GLIs and all BBXs in thebackplane. The signals are used to phase lock loop all clock circuits onthe GLIs and BBX boards to produce precise clock and signalfrequencies.Power Input (Return A, B, and C connectors)For –48 V configuration – Provides a –48 volt input for use by thepower supply modules.For +27 V configuration – Provides input for regulated +27 Volts.6
Troubleshooting: C–CCP Backplane – continued 6-14 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTPower Supply InterfaceEach C–CCP power supply has a series of three different connectors toprovide the needed inputs/outputs to the C–CCP backplane. Theseinclude a VCC/Ground input connector, a Harting style multiple pininterface, and a +15 V/Analog Ground output connector. The C–CCPPower Supplies convert +27 Volts to a regulated +15, +6.5, and +5.0Volts to be used by the C–CCP shelf cards. For –48V BTS only, the power supply modules convert –48 Volts to aregulated +27 Volts.GLI ConnectorThis connector consists of a Harting 4SU digital connector and a6–conductor coaxial connector for RDM distribution. The connectorsprovide inputs/outputs for the GLIs in the C–CCP backplane.GLI 10Base–2 Ethernet “A” and “B” ConnectionsThese BNC connectors are located on the C–CCP backplane and routedto the GLI board. This interface provides all the control and datacommunications between the master GLI and the other GLI, betweengateways, and for the LMF on the LAN.BBX ConnectorEach BBX connector consists of a Harting 2SU/1SU digital connectorand two 6–conductor coaxial connectors. These connectors provide DC,digital, and RF inputs/outputs for the BBXs in the C–CCP backplane.MCIO ConnectorsSRX RF antenna path signal inputs are routed through RX Tri–Filters(on the I/O plate), and via coaxial cables to the two MPC modules –the six “A” (main) signals go to one MPC; the six “B” (diversity) tothe other. The MPC outputs the low–noise–amplified signals via theC–CCP backplane to the MCIO where the signals are split and sent tothe appropriate BBX.SA digital bus then routes the baseband signal through the BBX, to thebackplane, then on to the MCC slots.SDigital TX antenna path signals originate at the MCCs. Each outputis routed from the MCC slot via the backplane appropriate BBX.STX RF path signal originates from the BBX, through the backplane tothe MCIO, through the MCIO, and via multi-conductor coaxialcabling to the PAs in the PA shelf.C–CCP BackplaneTroubleshooting ProcedureTable 6-15 through Table 6-24 provide procedures for troubleshootingproblems that appear to be related to a defective C–CCP backplane. Thetables are broken down into possible problems and steps that should betaken in an attempt to find the root cause.6
Troubleshooting: C–CCP Backplane – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 6-15DRAFTIMPORTANT: Table 6-15 through Table 6-24 must becompleted before replacing ANY C–CCP backplane.NOTEDigital Control ProblemsNo GLI Control via LMF (all GLIs)Follow the procedure in Table 6-15 to troubleshoot a GLI control viaLMF failure.Table 6-15: No GLI Control via LMF (all GLIs)nStep Action1Check the 10Base–2 ethernet connector for proper connection, damage, shorts, or opens.2Verify the C–CCP backplane Shelf ID DIP switch is set correctly.3Visually check the master GLI connector (both board and backplane) for damage.4Replace the master GLI with a known good GLI. No GLI Control through Span Line Connection (All GLIs)Follow the procedures in Table 6-16 and Table 6-17 to troubleshoot GLIcontrol failures.Table 6-16: No GLI Control through Span Line Connection (Both GLIs)Step Action1Verify the C–CCP backplane Shelf ID DIP switch is set correctly.2Verify that the BTS and GLIs are correctly configured in the OMCR/CBSC data base.3Visually check the master GLI connector (both board and backplane) for damage.4Replace the master GLI with a known good GLI.5Check the span line inputs from the top of the frame to the master GLI for proper connection anddamage.6Check the span line configuration on the MGLI (see Table 5-4 on page 5-5).Table 6-17: MGLI Control Good – No Control over Co–located GLIStep Action1Verify that the BTS and GLIs are correctly configured in the OMCR CBSC data base.2Check the 10Base–2 ethernet connector for proper connection, damage, shorts, or opens.3Visually check all GLI connectors (both board and backplane) for damage.4Replace the remaining GLI with a known good GLI.6
Troubleshooting: C–CCP Backplane – continued 6-16 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTNo AMR Control (MGLI good)Perform the procedure in Table 6-18 to troubleshoot an AMR controlfailure when the MGLI control is good.Table 6-18: MGLI Control Good – No Control over AMRStep Action1Visually check the master GLI connector (both board and backplane) for damage.2Replace the master GLI with a known good GLI.3Replace the AMR with a known good AMR.No BBX Control in the Shelf – (No Control over Co–locatedGLIs)Perform the procedure in Table 6-19 to troubleshoot a BBX control inthe shelf failure.Table 6-19: No BBX Control in the Shelf – No Control over Co–located GLIsStep Action1Visually check all GLI connectors (both board and backplane) for damage.2Replace the remaining GLI with a known good GLI.3Visually check BBX connectors (both board and backplane) for damage.4Replace the BBX with a known good BBX.No (or Missing) Span Line TrafficPerform the procedure in Table 6-20 to troubleshoot a span line trafficfailure.Table 6-20: MGLI Control Good – No (or Missing) Span Line TrafficStep Action1Visually check all GLI connectors (both board and backplane) for damage.2Replace the remaining GLI with a known good GLI.3Visually check all span line distribution (both connectors and cables) for damage.4If the problem seems to be limited to one BBX, replace the MGLI with a known good MGLI.5Perform the BTS Span Parameter Configuration ( see Table 5-4 on page 5-5).6Ensure that ISB cabling is correct.No (or Missing) MCC Channel ElementsPerform the procedure in Table 6-21 to troubleshoot a channel elementsfailure.6
Troubleshooting: C–CCP Backplane – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 6-17DRAFTTable 6-21: No MCC Channel ElementsStep Action1Verify CEs on a co–located MCC (MCC24 TYPE=2).2If the problem seems to be limited to one MCC, replace the MCC with a known good MCC.– Check connectors (both board and backplane) for damage.3If no CEs on any MCC:– Verify clock reference to MCIO.4Check the CDF for MCCTYPE=2 (MCC24E); MCCTYPE=0 (MCC8E) or MCCTYPE=3 (MCC–1X)DC Power ProblemsPerform the procedure in Table 6-22 to troubleshoot a DC input voltageto power supply module failure.Potentially lethal voltage and current levels are routed tothe BTS equipment. This test must be carried out with asecond person present, acting in a safety role. Remove allrings, jewelry, and wrist watches prior to beginning thistest.WARNING6
Troubleshooting: C–CCP Backplane – continued 6-18 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTNo DC Input Voltage to Power Supply ModuleTable 6-22: No DC Input Voltage to Power Supply ModuleStep Action1Verify DC power is applied to the BTS frame.2Verify there are no breakers tripped.* IMPORTANTIf a breaker has tripped, remove all modules from the applicable shelf supplied by the breaker andattempt to reset it.– If the breaker trips again, there is probably a cable or breaker problem within the frame.– If the breaker does not trip, there is probably a defective module or sub–assembly within the shelf.3Verify that the C–CCP shelf breaker on the BTS frame breaker panel is functional.4Use a voltmeter to determine if the input voltage is being routed to the C–CCP backplane bymeasuring the DC voltage level on the PWR_IN cable.– If the voltage is not present, there is probably a cable or breaker problem within the frame.– If the voltage is present at the connector, reconnect and measure the level at the “VCC” powerfeed clip on the distribution backplane.– If the voltage is correct at the power clip, inspect the clip for damage.5–48 V configuration only – If everything appears to be correct, visually inspect the power supplymodule and verify LEDs are green.6–48 V configuration only – If LED is red, then replace the power suppy module with a known goodmodule and verify LEDs are green.7If steps 1 through 5 fail to indicate a problem, a C–CCP backplane failure (possibly an open trace) hasoccurred.No DC Voltage (+5, +6.5, or +15 Volts) to a Specific GLI, BBX,or SwitchboardPerform the procedure in Table 6-23 to troubleshoot a DC input voltageto GLI, BBX, or Switchboard failure.Table 6-23: No DC Input Voltage to any C–CCP Shelf ModuleStep Action1Verify the steps in Table 6-22 have been performed.2Inspect the defective board/module (both board and backplane) connector for damage.3Replace suspect board/module with known good board/module.TX and RX Signal RoutingProblemsPerform the procedure in Table 6-24 to troubleshoot TX and RX signalrouting problems.6
Troubleshooting: C–CCP Backplane – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 6-19DRAFTTable 6-24: TX and RX Signal Routing ProblemsStep Action1Inspect all Harting Cable connectors and back–plane connectors for damage in all the affected boardslots.2Perform steps in the RF path troubleshooting flowchart in this manual.6
Troubleshooting: Span Control Link 6-20 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTSpan Problems (No ControlLink)Perform the procedure in Table 6-25 to troubleshoot a control linkfailure.Table 6-25: Troubleshoot Control Link FailurenStep Action1Connect the CDMA LMF computer to the MMI port on the applicable MGLI/GLI as shown inFigure 6-1 or Figure 6-2.2Start an MMI communication session with the applicable MGLI/GLI by using the Windowsdesktop shortcut icon.3Once the connection window opens, press the CDMA LMF computer Enter key until the GLIprompt is obtained.4At the GLI prompt, enter:config ni current <cr> (equivalent of span view command)The system will respond with a display similar to the following:The frame format in flash is set to use T1_2.Equalization: Span A – Default (0–131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1) Span B – Default (0–131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1) Span C – Default (0–131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1) Span D – Default (0–131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1) Span E – Default (0–131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1) Span F – Default (0–131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1)Linkspeed: Default (56K for T1 D4 AMI, 64K otherwise)Currently, the link is running at the default rate The actual rate is 0NOTEDefaults for span equalization are 0–131 feet for T1/J1 spans and 120 Ohm for E1.Default linkspeed is 56 kbps for T1 D4 AMI spans and 64 kbps for all other types.There is no need to change from defaults unless the OMC–R/CBSC span configuration requires it.5The span configurations loaded in the GLI must match those in the OMCR/CBSC database for theBTS. If they do not, proceed to Table 6-26.6Repeat steps 1 through 5 for all remaining GLIs.7If the span settings are correct, verify the edlc parameters using the show command.Any alarm conditions indicate that the span is not operating correctly.STry looping back the span line from the DSX panel back to the MM, and verify that the loopedsignal is good.SListen for control tone on the appropriate timeslot from the Base Site and MM.6
Troubleshooting: Span Control Link – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 6-21DRAFTTable 6-25: Troubleshoot Control Link FailurenActionStep8Exit the GLI MMI session and HyperTerminal connection by selecting File from the connectionwindow menu bar, and then Exit from the dropdown menu.9If no TCHs in groomed MCCs (or in whole SCCP shelf) can process calls, verify that the ISBcabling is correct and that ISB A and ISB B cables are not swapped.Figure 6-1: GLI2 Board MMI Connection DetailNULL MODEMBOARD(TRN9666A)8–PIN TO 10–PINRS–232 CABLE(P/N 30–09786R01)RS–232CABLE8–PINCDMA LMFCOMPUTERTo MMI portDB9–TO–DB25ADAPTERCOM1 or COM2ACTIVE LEDSTATUS LEDALARM LEDMASTER LEDMMI PortConnectorSPANS LEDRESETPushbuttonGLI2ti-CDMA-WP-00079-v01-ildoc-ftwMMI PortSpan (LED)Alarm (LED)Active (LED)Status (LED)6
Troubleshooting: Span Control Link – continued 6-22 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTFigure 6-2: GLI3 Board MMI Connection DetailNULL MODEMBOARD(TRN9666A)8–PIN TO 10–PINRS–232 CABLE(P/N 30–09786R01)RS–232CABLE8–PINCDMA LMFCOMPUTERTo MMI portDB9–TO–DB25ADAPTERCOM1 or COM2GLI3MMI PortReset SwitchDual 100BASE–Tin a single RJ45to Redundant(Mate) GLI3100BASE–TAuxiliary MonitorPortBPR B AUX RESETSPANALARM MMIACTSTA100BASE–T toBTS Packet Routeror Expansion cageSpan (LED)Alarm (LED)Active (LED)Status (LED)GLIBPR Ati-CDMA-WP-00064-v01-ildoc-ftwREFSet BTS Site SpanConfigurationPerform the procedure in Table 6-26 to set the span parameterconfiguration.6
Troubleshooting: Span Control Link – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 6-23DRAFTIMPORTANT: Perform the following procedure ONLY ifspan configurations loaded in the MGLI/GLIs do notmatch those in the OMCR/CBSC data base, AND ONLYwhen the exact configuration data is available. Loadingincorrect span configuration data will render the siteinoperable.NOTETable 6-26: Set BTS Span Parameter ConfigurationnStep Action1If not previously done, connect the CDMA LMF computer to the MMI port on the applicableMGLI/GLI as shown in Figure 6-1.2If there is no MMI communication session in progress with the applicable MGLI/GLI, initiate oneby using the Windows desktop shortcut icon.3At the GLI prompt, enter:config ni format <option> <cr>The terminal will display a response similar to the following:COMMAND SYNTAX: config ni format option Next available options: LIST – option : Span Option E1_1 : E1_1 – E1 HDB3 CRC4 no TS16 E1_2 : E1_2 – E1 HDB3 no CRC4 no TS16 E1_3 : E1_3 – E1 HDB3 CRC4 TS16 E1_4 : E1_4 – E1 HDB3 no CRC4 TS16 T1_1 : T1_1 – D4, AMI, No ZCS T1_2 : T1_2 – ESF, B8ZS J1_1 : J1_1 – ESF, B8ZS (Japan) – Default J1_2 : J1_2 – ESF, B8ZS T1_3 : T1_3 – D4, AMI, ZCS>NOTEWith this command, all active (in–use) spans will be set to the same format.4To set or change the span type, enter the correct option from the list at the entry prompt (>), asshown in the following example:> T1_2 <cr> NOTEThe entry is case–sensitive and must be typed exactly as it appears in the list. If the entry is typedincorrectly, a response similar to the following will be displayed:CP: Invalid commandGLI>. . . continued on next page6
Troubleshooting: Span Control Link – continued 6-24 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTTable 6-26: Set BTS Span Parameter ConfigurationnActionStep5An acknowledgement similar to the following will be displayed:The value has been programmed. It will take effect after the next re-set.GLI>6If the current MGLI/GLI span rate must be changed, enter the following MMI command:config ni linkspeed <cr> The terminal will display a response similar to the following:Next available options: LIST – linkspeed : Span Linkspeed 56K : 56K (default for T1_1 and T1_3 systems) 64K : 64K (default for all other span configurations)>NOTEWith this command, all active (in–use) spans will be set to the same linkspeed.7To set or change the span linkspeed, enter the required option from the list at the entry prompt (>),as shown in the following example:> 64K <cr>NOTEThe entry is case–sensitive and must be typed exactly as it appears in the list. If the entry is typedincorrectly, a response similar to the following will be displayed:CP: Invalid commandGLI>8An acknowledgement similar to the following will be displayed:The value has been programmed. It will take effect after the next re-set.GLI>. . . continued on next page6
Troubleshooting: Span Control Link – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 6-25DRAFTTable 6-26: Set BTS Span Parameter ConfigurationnActionStep9If the span equalization must be changed, enter the following MMI command:config ni equal <cr>The terminal will display a response similar to the following:COMMAND SYNTAX: config ni equal span equalNext available options: LIST – span : Span a : Span A b : Span B c : Span C d : Span D e : Span E f : Span F>10 At the entry prompt (>), enter the designator from the list for the span to be changed as shown inthe following example:> a <cr>The terminal will display a response similar to the following:COMMAND SYNTAX: config ni equal a equal Next available options: LIST – equal : Span Equalization 0 : 0–131 feet (default for T1/J1) 1 : 132–262 feet 2 : 263–393 feet 3 : 394–524 feet 4 : 525–655 feet 5 : LONG HAUL 6 : 75 OHM 7 : 120 OHM (default for E1)>11 At the entry prompt (>), enter the code for the required equalization from the list as shown in thefollowing example:> 0 <cr>The terminal will display a response similar to the following:> 0The value has been programmed. It will take effect after the next re-set.GLI>12 Repeat steps 9 through 11 for each in–use span.. . . continued on next page6
Troubleshooting: Span Control Link – continued 6-26 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTTable 6-26: Set BTS Span Parameter ConfigurationnActionStep13 NOTEAfter executing the config ni format, config ni linkspeed, and/or config ni equalcommands, the affected MGLI/GLI board MUST be reset and reloaded for changes to take effect.Although defaults are shown, always consult site specific documentation for span type andlinkspeed used at the site.Press the RESET button on the MGLI/GLI for changes to take effect.14 Once the MGLI/GLI has reset, execute the following command to verify span settings are asrequired:config ni current <cr> (equivalent of span view command)The system will respond with a display similar to the following:The frame format in flash is set to use T1_2.Equalization: Span A – 0–131 feet Span B – 0–131 feet Span C – Default (0–131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1) Span D – Default (0–131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1) Span E – Default (0–131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1) Span F – Default (0–131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1)Linkspeed: 64KCurrently, the link is running at 64KThe actual rate is 015 If the span configuration is not correct, perform the applicable step from this table to change it andrepeat steps 13 and 14 to verify required changes have been programmed.16 Return to step 6 of Table 6-25. 6
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 6-27DRAFTModule Status IndicatorsEach of the non-passive plug-in modules has a bi-color (green & red)LED status indicator located on the module front panel. The indicator islabeled PWR/ALM. If both colors are turned on, the indicator is yellow.Each plug-in module, except for the fan module, has its own alarm(fault) detection circuitry that controls the state of the PWR/ALM LED.The fan TACH signal of each fan module is monitored by the AMR.Based on the status of this signal, the AMR controls the state of thePWR/ALM LED on the fan module.LED Status Combinations forAll Modules (except GLI, CSM,BBX, MCC)PWR/ALM LEDThe following list describes the states of the module status indicator.SSolid GREEN – module operating in a normal (fault free) condition.SSolid RED – module is operating in a fault (alarm) condition due toelectrical hardware failure.Note that a fault (alarm) indication may or may not be due to a completemodule failure and normal service may or may not be reduced orinterrupted.DC/DC Converter LED StatusCombinationsThe PWR CNVTR has alarm (fault) detection circuitry that controls thestate of the PWR/ALM LED. This is true for both the C–CCP and PApower converters.PWR/ALM LEDThe following list describes the states of the bi-color LED.SSolid GREEN – module operating in a normal (fault free) condition.SSolid RED – module is operating in a fault (alarm) condition due toelectrical hardware problem.CSM LED Status CombinationsThe CSMs include on-board alarm detection. Hardware andsoftware/firmware alarms are indicated via the front panel indicators (seeFigure 6-3).6
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors – continued 6-28 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTFigure 6-3: CSM Front Panel Indicators & Monitor PortsPWR/ALMIndicatorFREQMONITORSYNCMONITORFW00303PWR/ALM LEDAfter the memory tests, the CSM loads OOS–RAM code from the FlashEPROM, if available. If not available, the OOS–ROM code is loadedfrom the Flash EPROM.SSolid GREEN – module is INS_ACT or INS_STBY no alarm.SSolid RED – Initial power up or module is operating in a fault (alarm)condition.SSlowly Flashing GREEN – OOS_ROM no alarm.SLong RED/Short GREEN – OOS_ROM alarm.SRapidly Flashing GREEN – OOS_RAM no alarm or INS_ACT inDUMB mode.SShort RED/Short GREEN – OOS_RAM alarm.SLong GREEN/Short RED – INS_ACT or INS_STBY alarm.SOff – no DC power or on-board fuse is open.SSolid YELLOW – After a reset, the CSMs begin to boot. DuringSRAM test and Flash EPROM code check, the LED is yellow. (IfSRAM or Flash EPROM fail, the LED changes to a solid RED andthe CSM attempts to reboot.)FREQ Monitor ConnectorA test port provided at the CSM front panel via a BNC receptacle allowsmonitoring of the 19.6608 MHz clock generated by the CSM. Whenboth CSM 1 and CSM 2 are in an in-service (INS) condition, the CSM 2clock signal frequency is the same as that output by CSM 1.6
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 6-29DRAFTThe clock is a sine wave signal with a minimum amplitude of +2 dBm(800 mVpp) into a 50 Ω load connected to this port.SYNC Monitor ConnectorA test port provided at the CSM front panel via a BNC receptacle allowsmonitoring of the “Even Second Tick” reference signal generated by theCSMs.At this port, the reference signal is a TTL active high signal with a pulsewidth of 153 nanoseconds.MMI ConnectorOnly accessible behind front panel. The RS–232 MMI port connector isintended to be used primarily in the development or factoryenvironment, but may be used in the field for debug/maintenancepurposes.GLI LED Status CombinationsGLIs may be GLI2 or GLI3. Either supports the 1XSCt4812T–MC BTS.NOTEGLIThe GLI module has indicators, controls and connectors as describedbelow and shown in Table 6-27 (GLI2) and Table 6-28 (GLI3).The operating states of the LEDs are:ACTIVESolid GREEN – GLI is active. This means that the GLI has shelfcontrol and is providing control of the digital interfaces.Off – GLI is not active (i.e., Standby). The mate GLI should be active.MASTER (not on GLI3)SSolid GREEN – GLI is Master (sometimes referred to as MGLI).SOff – GLI is non-master (i.e., Slave).ALARMSSolid RED – GLI is in a fault condition or in reset.SWhile in reset transition, STATUS LED is OFF while GLI isperforming ROM boot (about 12 seconds for normal boot).SWhile in reset transition, STATUS LED is ON while GLI isperforming RAM boot (about 4 seconds for normal boot).SOff – No Alarm.6
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors – continued 6-30 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTSTATUSSFlashing GREEN– GLI is in service (INS), in a stable operatingcondition.SOn – GLI is in OOS RAM state operating downloaded code.SOff – GLI is in OOS ROM state operating boot code.SPANSSSolid GREEN – Span line is connected and operating.SSolid RED – Span line is disconnected or a fault condition exists.GLI Pushbuttons andConnectorsRESET Pushbutton – Depressing the RESET pushbutton causes apartial reset of the CPU and a reset of all board devices. The GLI2 isplaced in the OOS_ROM stateMMI Connector – The RS–232MMI port connector is intended to beused primarily in the development or factory environment but may beused in the field for debug/maintenance purposes.LAN Connectors (A & B) – The two 10BASE2 Ethernet circuit boardmounted BNC connectors are located on the bottom front edge of theGLI2; one for each LAN interface, A & B. Ethernet cabling is connectedto tee connectors fastened to these BNC connectors.GLI2 Front PanelTable 6-27 shows the front panel of the GLI2 card and includes adescription of the components.6
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 6-31DRAFTTable 6-27: GLI2 Front PanelLED Operating Status DiagramSTATUS OFF – operating normallyON – briefly during power-up when the Alarm LED turns OFFSLOW GREEN – when the GLI2 is INS (in-service)RESET Pressing and releasing the switch resets all functions on the GLI2.ALARM OFF – operating normallyON – briefly during power-up when the Alarm LED turns OFFSLOW GREEN – when the GLI2 is INS (in-service)STATUSSTATUS LEDSPANS OFF – card is powered down, in initialization, or in standbyGREEN – operating normallyYELLOW – one or more of the equipped initialized spans is receivinga remote alarm indication signal from the far endRED – one or more of the equipped initialized spans is in an alarmstateRESET ALARM SPARESETPUSHBUTTONALARM LEDSPANS LEDMASTER The pair of GLI2 cards include a redundant status. The card in the topshelf is designated by hardware as the active card; the card in thebottom shelf is in the standby mode.ON – operating normally in active cardOFF – operating normally in standby cardMMI PORTPANS MASTER MMSPANS LEDMASTER LEDMMI An RS-232, serial, asynchronous communications link for use as anMMI port. This port supports 300 baud, up to a maximum of 115,200baud communications.MMI PORTCONNECTORACTIVE LEDMMI ACTIVEACTIVE Shows the operating status of the redundant cards. The redundant cardtoggles automatically if the active card is removed or failsON – active card operating normallyOFF – standby card operating normally GLI3 Front PanelTable 6-28 shows the front panel of the GLI3 card and includes adescription of the components.6
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors – continued 6-32 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTTable 6-28: GLI3 Front PanelLED Operating Status DiagramBPR A Connects to either a BPR or expansion cage and is wired as anethernet client.BPR B Connects to either a BPR or expansion cage and is wired as anethernet client.AUX Wired as an ethernet client for direct connection to a personalcomputer with a standard ethernet cable. It allows connection ofethernet “sniffer” when the ethernet switch is properly configuredfor port monitoring.GLI Supports the cross–coupled ethernet circuits to the mate GLI usinga double crossover cable. 100BASE–T to BTS PacketBPR ARESET Pressing and releasing the switch resets all functions on the GLI3.BPR 100BASE T to BTS PacketRouter or Expansion cageALARM OFF – operating normallyON – briefly during power-up when the Alarm LED turns OFFSLOW GREEN – when the GLI3 is INS (in-service)100BASE–T AuxiliaryMonitor PortR B AUXSPAN OFF – card is powered down, in initialization, or in standbyGREEN – operating normallyYELLOW – one or more of the equipped initialized spans isreceiving a remote alarm indication signal from the far endRED – one or more of the equipped initialized spans is in an alarmstateReset SwitchDual 100BASE–T in a singleRJ45 to Redundant (Mate)GLI3RESETSPANALARMSpan (LED)Ala (LED)GLIMMI An RS-232, serial, asynchronous communications link for use as anMMI port. This port supports 300 baud, up to a maximum of115,200 baud communications.MMI PortMMMIACTSTAAlarm (LED)Active (LED)Status (LED)STATUS OFF – operating normallyON – briefly during power-up when the Alarm LED turns OFFSLOW GREEN – when the GLI3 is INS (in-service)Status (LED)ACTIVE Shows the operating status of the redundant cards. The redundantcard toggles automatically if the active card is removed or failsON – active card operating normallyOFF – standby card operating normallyti-CDMA-WP-00064-v01-ildoc-ftw BBX LED Status CombinationsPWR/ALM LEDThe BBX module has its own alarm (fault) detection circuitry thatcontrols the state of the PWR/ALM LED.The following list describes the states of the bi-color LED:SSolid GREEN – INS_ACT no alarmSSolid RED Red – initializing or power-up alarmSSlowly Flashing GREEN – OOS_ROM no alarmSLong RED/Short GREEN – OOS_ROM alarmSRapidly Flashing GREEN – OOS_RAM no alarm6
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 6-33DRAFTSShort RED/Short GREEN – OOS_RAM alarmSLong GREEN/Short RED – INS_ACT alarmPA Shelf LED StatusCombinationsPA Module LEDEach PA module contains a bi–color LED just above the MMI connectoron the front panel of the module. Interpret this LED as follows:SGREEN — PA module is active and is reporting no alarms (Normalcondition).SFlashing GREEN/RED — PA module is active but is reporting an lowinput power condition. If no BBX is keyed, this is normal and doesnot constitute a failure.MCC LED Status CombinationsThe MCC module has LED indicators and connectors as describedbelow (see Figure 6-4). Note that the figure does not show theconnectors as they are concealed by the removable lens.The LED indicators and their states are as follows:PWR/ALM LEDSRED – fault on moduleACTIVE LEDSOff – module is inactive, off-line, or not processing traffic.SSlowly Flashing GREEN – OOS_ROM no alarm.SRapidly Flashing Green – OOS_RAM no alarm.SSolid GREEN – module is INS_ACT, on-line, processing traffic.PWR/ALM and ACTIVE LEDsSSolid RED – module is powered but is in reset or the BCP is inactive.MMI ConnectorsSThe RS–232 MMI port connector (four-pin) is intended to be usedprimarily in the development or factory environment but may be usedin the field for debugging purposes.SThe RJ–11 ethernet port connector (eight-pin) is intended to be usedprimarily in the development environment but may be used in the fieldfor high data rate debugging purposes.6
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors – continued 6-34 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTFigure 6-4: MCC Front PanelPWR/ALM LEDLENS(REMOVABLE)ACTIVE LEDPWR/ALM ACTIVEPWR/ALMOFF – operating normallyON – briefly during power-up and dur-ing failure conditionsACTIVELED OPERATING STATUSRAPIDLY BLINKING – Card is code-loaded but not enabledSLOW BLINKING – Card is not code-loadedON – card is code-loaded and enabled(INS_ACTIVE)COLORGREENREDREDON – fault conditionSLOW FLASHING (alternating withgreen) – CHI bus inactive on power-upAn alarm is generated in the event of a fail-ure6
5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATPDRAFTAppendix A: Chapter Title Goes Here Appendix ContentTHIS IS A SPECIAL APPENDIX TOC.THIS APPENDIX TOC MUST BE USED FOR APPENDIX A.AUTONUMBER STREAMS ARE RESET HERE.DO NOT USE THIS APPENDIX TOC FOR ANY OTHERAPPENDIX.Guide Book 1–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Document Overview 1–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What Is In This Guide? 1–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Book Catalogs and Organization 1–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Book Directory 1–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Catalogs 1–5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Physical Page Layouts 1–6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A/A4 Page and Margin Sizes 1–6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A/A4 Page Text Area 1–7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A/A4 Page Components 1–9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frame and Table Components 1–10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frames With Tools 1–10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flow Charts and Block Diagrams 1–10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line Drawings 1–11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table Types In This Template 1–12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Item/Description Table 1–12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Step Table 1–13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Step/Check Table 1–14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Component Descriptions 1–15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conclusions 1–16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Map Title Goes Here lkjsfdg Sfdkgj Msfd N lkas K lkjsdfl kB lkj fgcb 1–17. . . . . . Block Label Goes Here 1–17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Label Goes Here 1–17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Label Goes Here 1–18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Label Goes Here 1–19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Map Title Goes Here 1–22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A
Table of Contents – continued1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTNotesA
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets for Multi–Carrier5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP A-1DRAFTVerification of Test EquipmentUsedTable A-1: Verification of Test Equipment UsedManufacturer Model Serial NumberComments:A
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets for Multi–Carrier – continued A-2 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTSite ChecklistTable A-2: Site ChecklistOK Parameter Specification Comments−Deliveries Per established procedures−Floor Plan Verified−−−Inter Frame Cables:EthernetFrame GroundPowerPer procedurePer procedurePer procedure−−Factory Data:BBXTest PanelPer procedurePer procedure−Site Temperature−Dress Covers/BracketsComments:Preliminary OperationsTable A-3: Preliminary OperationsOK Parameter Specification Comments−Shelf ID Dip Switches Per site equipage−BBX Jumpers Verified per procedure−Ethernet LAN verification Verified per procedureComments:A
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets for Multi–Carrier – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP A-3DRAFTPre–Power and Initial Power TestsTable A-4: Pre–power ChecklistOK Parameter Specification Comments−Pre–power–up tests Verify power supplyoutput voltage at the topof each BTS frame iswithin specifications−−−−−−−−Internal Cables:ISB (all cages)CSM (all cages)Power (all cages)Ethernet ConnectorsLAN A ohmsLAN B ohmsLAN A shieldLAN B shieldEthernet Bootsverifiedverifiedverifiedverifiedverifiedisolatedisolatedinstalled−Air Impedance Cage (single cage) installed−Initial power–up tests Verify power supplyoutput voltage at the topof each BTS frame iswithin specifications:Comments:A
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets for Multi–Carrier – continued A-4 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTGeneral Optimization ChecklistTable A-5: Pre–power ChecklistOK Parameter Specification Comments−−LEDsFrame fansilluminatedoperational−−−−−−LMF to BTS ConnectionPreparing the LMFLog into the LMF PCCreate site specific BTS directoryCreate master–bts–cdma directoryDownload device loadsMoving/Linking filesper procedureper procedureper procedureper procedureper procedureper procedure−−Ping LAN APing LAN Bper procedureper procedure−−−−−−−−Download/Enable MGLIsDownload/Enable GLIsSet Site Span ConfigurationDownload CSMsDownloadEnable CSMsDownload/Enable MCCsDownload BBXsper procedureper procedureper procedureper procedureper procedureper procedureper procedureper procedure−Test Set Calibration per procedureComments:A
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets for Multi–Carrier – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP A-5DRAFTGPS Receiver OperationTable A-6: GPS Receiver OperationOK Parameter Specification Comments−GPS Receiver Control Task State:tracking satellitesVerify parameter−Initial Position Accuracy: Verify Estimatedor Surveyed−Current Position:latlonheightRECORD in msand cm alsoconvert to degmin sec−Current Position: satellites trackedEstimated:(>4) satellites tracked,(>4) satellites visibleSurveyed:(>1) satellite tracked,(>4) satellites visibleVerify parameteras appropriate:−GPS Receiver Status:Current Dilution ofPrecision (PDOP or HDOP): (<30)Verify parameter−Current reference source:Number: 0; Status: Good; Valid: YesVerify parameterComments:A
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets for Multi–Carrier – continued A-6 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTPA IM ReductionTable A-7: PA IM Reduction – TX FilterOKPA CarrierSpecificationCommentsOKPA# 3–Sector 6–SectorSpecification−1A C1 C1 No Alarms−1B C1 C1 No Alarms−1C C1 C1 No Alarms−1D C1 C1 No Alarms−2A C2 C2 No Alarms−2B C2 C2 No Alarms−2C C2 C2 No Alarms−2D C2 C2 No Alarms−3A C3 C1 No Alarms−3B C3 C1 No Alarms−3C C3 C1 No Alarms−3D C3 C1 No Alarms−4A C4 C2 No Alarms−4B C4 C2 No Alarms−4C C4 C2 No Alarms−4D C4 C2 No AlarmsComments:A
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets for Multi–Carrier – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP A-7DRAFTPA ConvergenceTable A-8: PA Convergence (Multicarrier grouping)OK PA # Converged Specification Data−1A Verify per procedure & upload dt−2A convergence data−3A−4A−1B Verify per procedure & upload dt−2B convergence data−3B−4B−1C Verify per procedure & upload dt−2C convergence data−3C−4C−1D Verify per procedure & upload dt−2D convergence data−3D−4DComments:A
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets for Multi–Carrier – continued A-8 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTTX Bay Level Offset/Power Output Verification for 3–Sector Configurations1–Carrier2–Carrier Non–adjacent Channels4–Carrier Non–adjacent ChannelsTable A-9: TX BLO Calibration (3–Sector: 1; 2; and 4–Carrier Non–adjacent Channels)OK Parameter Specification Comments−TX Bay Level Offset =BBX–1, ANT–1 = dBBBX–r, ANT–1 = dB−Calibratecarrier 1y40 dB +/– 5 for 800 MHz35 dB +/–5 for 1.9 GHzBBX–2, ANT–2 = dBBBX–r, ANT–2 = dB−prior to calibration BBX–3, ANT–3 = dBBBX–r, ANT–3 = dB−TX Bay Level Offset =BBX–7, ANT–1 = dBBBX–r, ANT–1 = dB−Calibratecarrier 2y40 dB +/– 5 for 800 MHz35 dB +/–5 for 1.9 GHzBBX–8, ANT–2 = dBBBX–r, ANT–2 = dB−prior to calibration BBX–9, ANT–3 = dBBBX–r, ANT–3 = dB−TX Bay Level Offset =BBX–4, ANT–1 = dBBBX–r, ANT–1 = dB−Calibratecarrier 3y40 dB +/– 5 for 800 MHz35 dB +/–5 for 1.9 GHzBBX–5, ANT–2 = dBBBX–r, ANT–2 = dB−prior to calibration BBX–6, ANT–3 = dBBBX–r, ANT–3 = dB−TX Bay Level Offset =BBX–10, ANT–1 = dBBBX–r, ANT–1 = dB−Calibratecarrier 4y40 dB +/– 5 for 800 MHz35 dB +/–5 for 1.9 GHzBBX–11, ANT–2 = dBBBX–r, ANT–2 = dB−prior to calibration BBX–12, ANT–3 = dBBBX–r, ANT–3 = dB−TX Bay Level Offset =BBX–1, ANT–1 = dBBBX–r, ANT–1 = dB−CalibrationAuditcarrier 1y40 dB +/– 5 for 800 MHz35 dB +/–5 for 1.9 GHzBBX–2, ANT–2 = dBBBX–r, ANT–2 = dB−carrier 1prior to calibration BBX–3, ANT–3 = dBBBX–r, ANT–3 = dB. . . continued on next pageA
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets for Multi–Carrier – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP A-9DRAFTTable A-9: TX BLO Calibration (3–Sector: 1; 2; and 4–Carrier Non–adjacent Channels)OK CommentsSpecificationParameter−BBX–7, ANT–1 = dBBBX–r, ANT–1 = dB−CalibrationAuditcarrier 20 dB (+1.5 dB) for gain set resolutionpost calibrationBBX–8, ANT–2 = dBBBX–r, ANT–2 = dB−carrier 2BBX–9, ANT–3 = dBBBX–r, ANT–3 = dB−BBX–4, ANT–1 = dBBBX–r, ANT–1 = dB−CalibrationAuditcarrier 30 dB (+1.5 dB) for gain set resolutionpost calibrationBBX–5, ANT–2 = dBBBX–r, ANT–2 = dB−carrier 3BBX–6, ANT–3 = dBBBX–r, ANT–3 = dB−BBX–10, ANT–1 = dBBBX–r, ANT–1 = dB−CalibrationAuditcarrier 40 dB (+1.5 dB) for gain set resolutionpost calibrationBBX–11, ANT–2 = dBBBX–r, ANT–2 = dB−carrier 4BBX–12, ANT–3 = dBBBX–r, ANT–3 = dB Comments:A
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets for Multi–Carrier – continued A-10 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFT2–Carrier Adjacent ChannelTable A-10: TX Bay Level Offset Calibration (3–Sector: 2–Carrier Adjacent Channels)OK Parameter Specification Comments−TX Bay Level Offset =BBX–1, ANT–1 = dBBBX–r, ANT–1 = dB−Calibratecarrier 1y40 dB +/– 5 for 800 MHz35 dB +/–5 for 1.9 GHzBBX–2, ANT–2 = dBBBX–r, ANT–2 = dB−prior to calibration BBX–3, ANT–3 = dBBBX–r, ANT–3 = dB−TX Bay Level Offset =BBX–7, ANT–4 = dBBBX–r, ANT–4 = dB−Calibratecarrier 2y40 dB +/– 5 for 800 MHz35 dB +/–5 for 1.9 GHzBBX–8, ANT–5 = dBBBX–r, ANT–5 = dB−prior to calibration BBX–9, ANT–6 = dBBBX–r, ANT–6 = dB−BBX–1, ANT–1 = dBBBX–r, ANT–1 = dB−CalibrationAuditcarrier 10 dB (+1.5 dB) for gain set resolutionpost calibrationBBX–2, ANT–2 = dBBBX–r, ANT–2 = dB−carrier 1BBX–3, ANT–3 = dBBBX–r, ANT–3 = dB−BBX–7, ANT–4 = dBBBX–r, ANT–4 = dB−CalibrationAuditcarrier 20 dB (+1.5 dB) for gain set resolutionpost calibrationBBX–8, ANT–5 = dBBBX–r, ANT–5 = dB−carrier 2BBX–9, ANT–6 = dBBBX–r, ANT–6 = dB Comments:A
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets for Multi–Carrier – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP A-11DRAFT3–Carrier Adjacent Channels4–Carrier Adjacent ChannelsTable A-11: TX Bay Level Offset Calibration (3–Sector: 3 or 4–Carrier Adjacent Channels)OK Parameter Specification Comments−TX Bay Level Offset =BBX–1, ANT–1 = dBBBX–r, ANT–1 = dB−Calibratecarrier 1y40 dB +/– 5 for 800 MHz35 dB +/–5 for 1.9 GHzBBX–2, ANT–2 = dBBBX–r, ANT–2 = dB−prior to calibration BBX–3, ANT–3 = dBBBX–r, ANT–3 = dB−TX Bay Level Offset =BBX–7, ANT–1 = dBBBX–r, ANT–1 = dB−Calibratecarrier 2y40 dB +/– 5 for 800 MHz35 dB +/–5 for 1.9 GHzBBX–8, ANT–2 = dBBBX–r, ANT–2 = dB−prior to calibration BBX–9, ANT–3 = dBBBX–r, ANT–3 = dB−TX Bay Level Offset =BBX–4, ANT–4 = dBBBX–r, ANT–4 = dB−Calibratecarrier 3y40 dB +/– 5 for 800 MHz35 dB +/–5 for 1.9 GHzBBX–5, ANT–5 = dBBBX–r, ANT–5 = dB−prior to calibration BBX–6, ANT–6 = dBBBX–r, ANT–6 = dB−TX Bay Level Offset =BBX–10, ANT–4 = dBBBX–3, ANT–4 = dB−Calibratecarrier 4y40 dB +/– 5 for 800 MHz35 dB +/–5 for 1.9 GHzBBX–11, ANT–5 = dBBBX–r, ANT–5 = dB−prior to calibration BBX–12, ANT–6 = dBBBX–r, ANT–6 = dB−BBX–1, ANT–1 = dBBBX–r, ANT–1 = dB−CalibrationAuditcarrier 10 dB (+1.5 dB) for gain set resolutionpost calibrationBBX–2, ANT–2 = dBBBX–r, ANT–2 = dB−carrier 1BBX–3, ANT–3 = dBBBX–r, ANT–3 = dB. . . continued on next pageA
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets for Multi–Carrier – continued A-12 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTTable A-11: TX Bay Level Offset Calibration (3–Sector: 3 or 4–Carrier Adjacent Channels)OK CommentsSpecificationParameter−BBX–7, ANT–1 = dBBBX–r, ANT–1 = dB−CalibrationAuditcarrier 20 dB (+1.5 dB) for gain set resolutionpost calibrationBBX–8, ANT–2 = dBBBX–r, ANT–2 = dB−carrier 2BBX–9, ANT–3 = dBBBX–r, ANT–3 = dB−BBX–4, ANT–4 = dBBBX–r, ANT–4 = dB−CalibrationAuditcarrier 30 dB (+1.5 dB) for gain set resolutionpost calibrationBBX–5, ANT–5 = dBBBX–r, ANT–5 = dB−carrier 3BBX–6, ANT–6 = dBBBX–r, ANT–6 = dB−BBX–10, ANT–4 = dBBBX–r, ANT–4 = dB−CalibrationAuditcarrier 40 dB (+1.5 dB) for gain set resolutionpost calibrationBBX–11, ANT–5 = dBBBX–r, ANT–5 = dB−carrier 4BBX–12, ANT–6 = dBBBX–r, ANT–6 = dB Comments:A
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets for Multi–Carrier – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP A-13DRAFTTX Bay Level Offset/Power Output Verification for 6–Sector Configurations1–Carrier2–Carrier Non–adjacent ChannelsTable A-12: TX BLO Calibration (6–Sector: 1–Carrier, 2–Carrier Non–adjacent Channels)OK Parameter Specification Comments−BBX–1, ANT–1 = dBBBX–r, ANT–1 = dB−BBX–2, ANT–2 = dBBBX–r, ANT–2 = dB−CalibrateTX Bay Level Offset =43 dB +/– 5 for 800 MHzBBX–3, ANT–3 = dBBBX–r, ANT–3 = dB−carrier 1 38 dB +/–5 for 1.9 GHzprior to calibrationBBX–4, ANT–4 = dBBBX–r, ANT–4 = dB−BBX–5, ANT–5 = dBBBX–r, ANT–5 = dB−BBX–6, ANT–6 = dBBBX–r, ANT–6 = dB−BBX–7, ANT–1 = dBBBX–r, ANT–1 = dB−BBX–8, ANT–2 = dBBBX–r, ANT–2 = dB−Calibrate TX Bay Level Offset = 43 dB +/– 5 for800 MHz 38 dB +/–5 for 1 9 GHz priorBBX–9, ANT–3 = dBBBX–r, ANT–3 = dB−carrier 2800 MHz 38 dB +/–5 for 1.9 GHz priorto calibration BBX–10, ANT–4 = dBBBX–3, ANT–4 = dB−BBX–11, ANT–5 = dBBBX–r, ANT–5 = dB−BBX–12, ANT–6 = dBBBX–r, ANT–5 = dB. . . continued on next pageA
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets for Multi–Carrier – continued A-14 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTTable A-12: TX BLO Calibration (6–Sector: 1–Carrier, 2–Carrier Non–adjacent Channels)OK CommentsSpecificationParameter−BBX–1, ANT–1 = dBBBX–r, ANT–1 = dB−BBX–2, ANT–2 = dBBBX–r, ANT–2 = dB−CalibrationAudit0 dB (+1.5 dB) for gain set resolutionBBX–3, ANT–3 = dBBBX–r, ANT–3 = dB−Auditcarrier 1()gpost calibration BBX–4, ANT–4 = dBBBX–r, ANT–4 = dB−BBX–5, ANT–5 = dBBBX–r, ANT–5 = dB−BBX–6, ANT–6 = dBBBX–r, ANT–6 = dB−BBX–7, ANT–1 = dBBBX–r, ANT–1 = dB−BBX–8, ANT–2 = dBBBX–r, ANT–2 = dB−CalibrationAudit0 dB (+1.5 dB) for gain set resolutionBBX–9, ANT–3 = dBBBX–r, ANT–3 = dB−Auditcarrier 2()gpost calibration BBX–10, ANT–4 = dBBBX–r, ANT–4 = dB−BBX–11, ANT–5 = dBBBX–r, ANT–5 = dB−BBX–12, ANT–6 = dBBBX–r, ANT–6 = dB Comments:A
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets for Multi–Carrier – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP A-15DRAFTBTS Redundancy/Alarm TestsTable A-13: BTS Redundancy/Alarm TestsOK Parameter Specification Data−SIF: Misc. alarm tests Verify per procedure−MGLI redundancy test Verify per procedure−GLI redundancy test Verify per procedure−Power supply/converterredundancyVerify per procedure−Misc. alarm tests Verify per procedure−CSM & GPSredundancy/alarm testsVerify per procedure−PA redundancy test Verify per procedureComments:TX Antenna VSWRTable A-14: TX Antenna VSWROK Parameter Specification Data−VSWR – Antenna 1 < (1.5 : 1)−VSWR –Antenna 2 < (1.5 : 1)−VSWR –Antenna 3 < (1.5 : 1)−VSWR –Antenna 4 < (1.5 : 1)−VSWR –Antenna 5 < (1.5 : 1)−VSWR –Antenna 6 < (1.5 : 1)Comments:A
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets for Multi–Carrier – continued A-16 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTRX Antenna VSWRTable A-15: RX Antenna VSWROK Parameter Specification Data−VSWR – Antenna 1 < (1.5 : 1)−VSWR –Antenna 2 < (1.5 : 1)−VSWR –Antenna 3 < (1.5 : 1)−VSWR –Antenna 4 < (1.5 : 1)−VSWR –Antenna 5 < (1.5 : 1)−VSWR –Antenna 6 < (1.5 : 1)Comments:AMR VerificationTable A-16: AMR CDI Alarm Input VerificationOK Parameter Specification Data−Verify CDI alarm inputoperation (“ALARM A”(numbers 1 –18)BTS Relay #XX –Contact AlarmSets/Clears−Verify CDI alarm inputoperation (“ALARM B” (numbers 19 –36)BTS Relay #XX –Contact AlarmSets/ClearsComments:A
Site Serial Number Checklist5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP A-17DRAFTDate SiteC–CCP ShelfSite I/O A & BC–CCP ShelfCSM–1CSM–2HSOCCD–1CCD–2AMR–1AMR–2MPC–1MPC–2Fans 1–3 GLI–1GLI–2BBX–1BBX–2BBX–3BBX–4BBX–5BBX–6BBX–7BBX–8BBX–9BBX–10BBX–11BBX–12BBX–rMCC–1MCC–2MCC–3MCC–4MCC–5MCC–6MCC–7MCC–8MCC–9MCC–10MCC–11MCC–12MCIOSWITCHC–CCP PS–1C–CCP PS–2C–CCP PS–3A
Site Serial Number Checklist – continued A-18 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTNotesA
5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATPDRAFTAppendix B: PN Offset/I & Q Offset Register Programming Information Appendix ContentTHIS IS THE GENERAL APPENDIX TOC. USE THIS FOR ALLAPPENDICES EXCEPT APPENDIX A.Guide Book 1–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Document Overview 1–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What Is In This Guide? 1–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Book Catalogs and Organization 1–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Book Directory 1–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Catalogs 1–5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Physical Page Layouts 1–6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A/A4 Page and Margin Sizes 1–6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A/A4 Page Text Area 1–7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A/A4 Page Components 1–9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frame and Table Components 1–10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frames With Tools 1–10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flow Charts and Block Diagrams 1–10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line Drawings 1–11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table Types In This Template 1–12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Item/Description Table 1–12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Step Table 1–13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Step/Check Table 1–14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Component Descriptions 1–15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conclusions 1–16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Map Title Goes Here lkjsfdg Sfdkgj Msfd N lkas K lkjsdfl kB lkj fgcb 1–17. . . . . . Block Label Goes Here 1–17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Label Goes Here 1–17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Label Goes Here 1–18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Label Goes Here 1–19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Map Title Goes Here 1–22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B
Table of Contents – continued1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTNotesB
PN Offset Programming Information5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP B-1DRAFTPN Offset BackgroundAll channel elements transmitted from a BTS in a particular 1.25 MHzCDMA channel are orthonogonally spread by 1 of 128 possible Walshcode functions; additionally, they are also spread by a quadrature pair ofPN sequences unique to each sector.Overall, the mobile uses this to differentiate multiple signals transmittedfrom the same BTS (and surrounding BTS) sectors, and to synchronizeto the next strongest sector.The PN offset per sector is stored on the BBXs, where the correspondingI & Q registers reside.The PN offset values are determined on a per BTS/per sector(antenna)basis as determined by the appropriate cdf file content. A breakdown ofthis information is found in Table B-1.PN Offset UsageOnly the 14–chip delay is currently in use. It is important to determinethe RF chip delay to be able to test the BTS functionality. This can bedone by ascertaining if the CDF file FineTxAdj value was set to “on”when the MCC was downloaded with “image data”. The FineTxAdjvalue is used to compensate for the processing delay (approximately20 mS) in the BTS using any type of mobile meeting IS–97specifications.If the FineTxAdj value in the cdf file is 213 (D5 HEX), FineTxAdj hasbeen set for the 14 chip table.CDF file I and Q values can be represented in DECIMALor HEX. If using HEX, add 0x before the HEX value. Ifnecessary, convert HEX values in Table B-1 to decimalbefore comparing them to cdf file I & Q valueassignments.NOTEB
PN Offset Programming Information – continued B-2 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTTable B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn14–Chip Delay Pilot I Q I Q PN (Dec.) (Hex.)0 17523 23459 4473 5BA31 32292 32589 7E24 7F4D2 4700 17398 125C 43F63 14406 26333 3846 66DD4 14899 4011 3A33 0FAB5 17025 2256 4281 08D06 14745 18651 3999 48DB7 2783 1094 0ADF 04468 5832 21202 16C8 52D29 12407 13841 3077 361110 31295 31767 7A3F 7C1711 7581 18890 1D9D 49CA12 18523 30999 485B 791713 29920 22420 74E0 579414 25184 20168 6260 4EC815 26282 12354 66AA 304216 30623 11187 779F 2BB317 15540 11834 3CB4 2E3A18 23026 10395 59F2 289B19 20019 28035 4E33 6D8320 4050 27399 0FD2 6B0721 1557 22087 0615 564722 30262 2077 7636 081D23 18000 13758 4650 35BE24 20056 11778 4E58 2E0225 12143 3543 2F6F 0DD726 17437 7184 441D 1C1027 17438 2362 441E 093A28 5102 25840 13EE 64F029 9302 12177 2456 2F9130 17154 10402 4302 28A231 5198 1917 144E 077D32 4606 17708 11FE 452C33 24804 10630 60E4 298634 17180 6812 431C 1A9C35 10507 14350 290B 380E36 10157 10999 27AD 2AF737 23850 25003 5D2A 61AB38 31425 2652 7AC1 0A5C39 4075 19898 0FEB 4DBA40 10030 2010 272E 07DA41 16984 25936 4258 655042 14225 28531 3791 6F7343 26519 11952 6797 2EB044 27775 31947 6C7F 7CCB45 30100 25589 7594 63F546 7922 11345 1EF2 2C5147 14199 28198 3777 6E2648 17637 13947 44E5 367B49 23081 8462 5A29 210E50 5099 9595 13EB 257B. . . continued on next pageB
PN Offset Programming Information – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP B-3DRAFTTable B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn14–Chip Delay Pilot I Q I Q PN (Dec.) (Hex.)51 32743 4670 7FE7 123E52 7114 14672 1BCA 395053 7699 29415 1E13 72E754 19339 20610 4B8B 508255 28212 6479 6E34 194F56 29587 10957 7393 2ACD57 19715 18426 4D03 47FA58 14901 22726 3A35 58C659 20160 5247 4EC0 147F60 22249 29953 56E9 750161 26582 5796 67D6 16A462 7153 16829 1BF1 41BD63 15127 4528 3B17 11B064 15274 5415 3BAA 152765 23149 10294 5A6D 283666 16340 17046 3FD4 429667 27052 7846 69AC 1EA668 13519 10762 34CF 2A0A69 10620 13814 297C 35F670 15978 16854 3E6A 41D671 27966 795 6D3E 031B72 12479 9774 30BF 262E73 1536 24291 0600 5EE374 3199 3172 0C7F 0C6475 4549 2229 11C5 08B576 17888 21283 45E0 532377 13117 16905 333D 420978 7506 7062 1D52 1B9679 27626 7532 6BEA 1D6C80 31109 25575 7985 63E781 29755 14244 743B 37A482 26711 28053 6857 6D9583 20397 30408 4FAD 76C884 18608 5094 48B0 13E685 7391 16222 1CDF 3F5E86 23168 7159 5A80 1BF787 23466 174 5BAA 00AE88 15932 25530 3E3C 63BA89 25798 2320 64C6 091090 28134 23113 6DE6 5A4991 28024 23985 6D78 5DB192 6335 2604 18BF 0A2C93 21508 1826 5404 072294 26338 30853 66E2 788595 17186 15699 4322 3D5396 22462 2589 57BE 0A1D97 3908 25000 0F44 61A898 25390 18163 632E 46F399 27891 12555 6CF3 310B100 9620 8670 2594 21DE. . . continued on next pageB
PN Offset Programming Information – continued B-4 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTTable B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn14–Chip Delay Pilot I Q I Q PN (Dec.) (Hex.)101 6491 1290 195B 050A102 16876 4407 41EC 1137103 17034 1163 428A 048B104 32405 12215 7E95 2FB7105 27417 7253 6B19 1C55106 8382 8978 20BE 2312107 5624 25547 15F8 63CB108 1424 3130 0590 0C3A109 13034 31406 32EA 7AAE110 15682 6222 3D42 184E111 27101 20340 69DD 4F74112 8521 25094 2149 6206113 30232 23380 7618 5B54114 6429 10926 191D 2AAE115 27116 22821 69EC 5925116 4238 31634 108E 7B92117 5128 4403 1408 1133118 14846 689 39FE 02B1119 13024 27045 32E0 69A5120 10625 27557 2981 6BA5121 31724 16307 7BEC 3FB3122 13811 22338 35F3 5742123 24915 27550 6153 6B9E124 1213 22096 04BD 5650125 2290 23136 08F2 5A60126 31551 12199 7B3F 2FA7127 12088 1213 2F38 04BD128 7722 936 1E2A 03A8129 27312 6272 6AB0 1880130 23130 32446 5A5A 7EBE131 594 13555 0252 34F3132 25804 8789 64CC 2255133 31013 24821 7925 60F5134 32585 21068 7F49 524C135 3077 31891 0C05 7C93136 17231 5321 434F 14C9137 31554 551 7B42 0227138 8764 12115 223C 2F53139 15375 4902 3C0F 1326140 13428 1991 3474 07C7141 17658 14404 44FA 3844142 13475 17982 34A3 463E143 22095 19566 564F 4C6E144 24805 2970 60E5 0B9A145 4307 23055 10D3 5A0F146 23292 15158 5AFC 3B36147 1377 29094 0561 71A6148 28654 653 6FEE 028D149 6350 19155 18CE 4AD3150 16770 23588 4182 5C24. . . continued on next pageB
PN Offset Programming Information – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP B-5DRAFTTable B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn14–Chip Delay Pilot I Q I Q PN (Dec.) (Hex.)151 14726 10878 3986 2A7E152 25685 31060 6455 7954153 21356 30875 536C 789B154 12149 11496 2F75 2CE8155 28966 24545 7126 5FE1156 22898 9586 5972 2572157 1713 20984 06B1 51F8158 30010 30389 753A 76B5159 2365 7298 093D 1C82160 27179 18934 6A2B 49F6161 29740 23137 742C 5A61162 5665 24597 1621 6015163 23671 23301 5C77 5B05164 1680 7764 0690 1E54165 25861 14518 6505 38B6166 25712 21634 6470 5482167 19245 11546 4B2D 2D1A168 26887 26454 6907 6756169 30897 15938 78B1 3E42170 11496 9050 2CE8 235A171 1278 3103 04FE 0C1F172 31555 758 7B43 02F6173 29171 16528 71F3 4090174 20472 20375 4FF8 4F97175 5816 10208 16B8 27E0176 30270 17698 763E 4522177 22188 8405 56AC 20D5178 6182 28634 1826 6FDA179 32333 1951 7E4D 079F180 14046 20344 36DE 4F78181 15873 26696 3E01 6848182 19843 3355 4D83 0D1B183 29367 11975 72B7 2EC7184 13352 31942 3428 7CC6185 22977 9737 59C1 2609186 31691 9638 7BCB 25A6187 10637 30643 298D 77B3188 25454 13230 636E 33AE189 18610 22185 48B2 56A9190 6368 2055 18E0 0807191 7887 8767 1ECF 223F192 7730 15852 1E32 3DEC193 23476 16125 5BB4 3EFD194 889 6074 0379 17BA195 21141 31245 5295 7A0D196 20520 15880 5028 3E08197 21669 20371 54A5 4F93198 15967 8666 3E5F 21DA199 21639 816 5487 0330200 31120 22309 7990 5725. . . continued on next pageB
PN Offset Programming Information – continued B-6 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTTable B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn14–Chip Delay Pilot I Q I Q PN (Dec.) (Hex.)201 3698 29563 0E72 737B202 16322 13078 3FC2 3316203 17429 10460 4415 28DC204 21730 17590 54E2 44B6205 17808 20277 4590 4F35206 30068 19988 7574 4E14207 12737 6781 31C1 1A7D208 28241 32501 6E51 7EF5209 20371 6024 4F93 1788210 13829 20520 3605 5028211 13366 31951 3436 7CCF212 25732 26063 6484 65CF213 19864 27203 4D98 6A43214 5187 6614 1443 19D6215 23219 10970 5AB3 2ADA216 28242 5511 6E52 1587217 6243 17119 1863 42DF218 445 16064 01BD 3EC0219 21346 31614 5362 7B7E220 13256 4660 33C8 1234221 18472 13881 4828 3639222 25945 16819 6559 41B3223 31051 6371 794B 18E3224 1093 24673 0445 6061225 5829 6055 16C5 17A7226 31546 10009 7B3A 2719227 29833 5957 7489 1745228 18146 11597 46E2 2D4D229 24813 22155 60ED 568B230 47 15050 002F 3ACA231 3202 16450 0C82 4042232 21571 27899 5443 6CFB233 7469 2016 1D2D 07E0234 25297 17153 62D1 4301235 8175 15849 1FEF 3DE9236 28519 30581 6F67 7775237 4991 3600 137F 0E10238 7907 4097 1EE3 1001239 17728 671 4540 029F240 14415 20774 384F 5126241 30976 24471 7900 5F97242 26376 27341 6708 6ACD243 19063 19388 4A77 4BBC244 19160 25278 4AD8 62BE245 3800 9505 0ED8 2521246 8307 26143 2073 661F247 12918 13359 3276 342F248 19642 2154 4CBA 086A249 24873 13747 6129 35B3250 22071 27646 5637 6BFE. . . continued on next pageB
PN Offset Programming Information – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP B-7DRAFTTable B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn14–Chip Delay Pilot I Q I Q PN (Dec.) (Hex.)251 13904 1056 3650 0420252 27198 1413 6A3E 0585253 3685 3311 0E65 0CEF254 16820 4951 41B4 1357255 22479 749 57CF 02ED256 6850 6307 1AC2 18A3257 15434 961 3C4A 03C1258 19332 2358 4B84 0936259 8518 28350 2146 6EBE260 14698 31198 396A 79DE261 21476 11467 53E4 2CCB262 30475 8862 770B 229E263 23984 6327 5DB0 18B7264 1912 7443 0778 1D13265 26735 28574 686F 6F9E266 15705 25093 3D59 6205267 3881 6139 0F29 17FB268 20434 22047 4FD2 561F269 16779 32545 418B 7F21270 31413 7112 7AB5 1BC8271 16860 28535 41DC 6F77272 8322 10378 2082 288A273 28530 15065 6F72 3AD9274 26934 5125 6936 1405275 18806 12528 4976 30F0276 20216 23215 4EF8 5AAF277 9245 20959 241D 51DF278 8271 3568 204F 0DF0279 18684 26453 48FC 6755280 8220 29421 201C 72ED281 6837 24555 1AB5 5FEB282 9613 10779 258D 2A1B283 31632 25260 7B90 62AC284 27448 16084 6B38 3ED4285 12417 26028 3081 65AC286 30901 29852 78B5 749C287 9366 14978 2496 3A82288 12225 12182 2FC1 2F96289 21458 25143 53D2 6237290 6466 15838 1942 3DDE291 8999 5336 2327 14D8292 26718 21885 685E 557D293 3230 20561 0C9E 5051294 27961 30097 6D39 7591295 28465 21877 6F31 5575296 6791 23589 1A87 5C25297 17338 26060 43BA 65CC298 11832 9964 2E38 26EC299 11407 25959 2C8F 6567300 15553 3294 3CC1 0CDE. . . continued on next pageB
PN Offset Programming Information – continued B-8 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTTable B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn14–Chip Delay Pilot I Q I Q PN (Dec.) (Hex.)301 17418 30173 440A 75DD302 14952 15515 3A68 3C9B303 52 5371 0034 14FB304 27254 10242 6A76 2802305 15064 28052 3AD8 6D94306 10942 14714 2ABE 397A307 377 19550 0179 4C5E308 14303 8866 37DF 22A2309 24427 15297 5F6B 3BC1310 26629 10898 6805 2A92311 20011 31315 4E2B 7A53312 16086 19475 3ED6 4C13313 24374 1278 5F36 04FE314 9969 11431 26F1 2CA7315 29364 31392 72B4 7AA0316 25560 4381 63D8 111D317 28281 14898 6E79 3A32318 7327 23959 1C9F 5D97319 32449 16091 7EC1 3EDB320 26334 9037 66DE 234D321 14760 24162 39A8 5E62322 15128 6383 3B18 18EF323 29912 27183 74D8 6A2F324 4244 16872 1094 41E8325 8499 9072 2133 2370326 9362 12966 2492 32A6327 10175 28886 27BF 70D6328 30957 25118 78ED 621E329 12755 20424 31D3 4FC8330 19350 6729 4B96 1A49331 1153 20983 0481 51F7332 29304 12372 7278 3054333 6041 13948 1799 367C334 21668 27547 54A4 6B9B335 28048 8152 6D90 1FD8336 10096 17354 2770 43CA337 23388 17835 5B5C 45AB338 15542 14378 3CB6 382A339 24013 7453 5DCD 1D1D340 2684 26317 0A7C 66CD341 19018 5955 4A4A 1743342 25501 10346 639D 286A343 4489 13200 1189 3390344 31011 30402 7923 76C2345 29448 7311 7308 1C8F346 25461 3082 6375 0C0A347 11846 21398 2E46 5396348 30331 31104 767B 7980349 10588 24272 295C 5ED0350 32154 27123 7D9A 69F3. . . continued on next pageB
PN Offset Programming Information – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP B-9DRAFTTable B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn14–Chip Delay Pilot I Q I Q PN (Dec.) (Hex.)351 29572 5578 7384 15CA352 13173 25731 3375 6483353 10735 10662 29EF 29A6354 224 11084 00E0 2B4C355 12083 31098 2F33 797A356 22822 16408 5926 4018357 2934 6362 0B76 18DA358 27692 2719 6C2C 0A9F359 10205 14732 27DD 398C360 7011 22744 1B63 58D8361 22098 1476 5652 05C4362 2640 8445 0A50 20FD363 4408 21118 1138 527E364 102 22198 0066 56B6365 27632 22030 6BF0 560E366 19646 10363 4CBE 287B367 26967 25802 6957 64CA368 32008 2496 7D08 09C0369 7873 31288 1EC1 7A38370 655 24248 028F 5EB8371 25274 14327 62BA 37F7372 16210 23154 3F52 5A72373 11631 13394 2D6F 3452374 8535 1806 2157 070E375 19293 17179 4B5D 431B376 12110 10856 2F4E 2A68377 21538 25755 5422 649B378 10579 15674 2953 3D3A379 13032 7083 32E8 1BAB380 14717 29096 397D 71A8381 11666 3038 2D92 0BDE382 25809 16277 64D1 3F95383 5008 25525 1390 63B5384 32418 20465 7EA2 4FF1385 22175 28855 569F 70B7386 11742 32732 2DDE 7FDC387 22546 20373 5812 4F95388 21413 9469 53A5 24FD389 133 26155 0085 662B390 4915 6957 1333 1B2D391 8736 12214 2220 2FB6392 1397 21479 0575 53E7393 18024 31914 4668 7CAA394 15532 32311 3CAC 7E37395 26870 11276 68F6 2C0C396 5904 20626 1710 5092397 24341 423 5F15 01A7398 13041 2679 32F1 0A77399 23478 15537 5BB6 3CB1400 1862 10818 0746 2A42. . . continued on next pageB
PN Offset Programming Information – continued B-10 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTTable B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn14–Chip Delay Pilot I Q I Q PN (Dec.) (Hex.)401 5850 23074 16DA 5A22402 5552 20250 15B0 4F1A403 12589 14629 312D 3925404 23008 29175 59E0 71F7405 27636 13943 6BF4 3677406 17600 11072 44C0 2B40407 17000 29492 4268 7334408 21913 5719 5599 1657409 30320 7347 7670 1CB3410 28240 12156 6E50 2F7C411 7260 25623 1C5C 6417412 17906 27725 45F2 6C4D413 5882 28870 16FA 70C6414 22080 31478 5640 7AF6415 12183 28530 2F97 6F72416 23082 24834 5A2A 6102417 17435 9075 441B 2373418 18527 32265 485F 7E09419 31902 3175 7C9E 0C67420 18783 17434 495F 441A421 20027 12178 4E3B 2F92422 7982 25613 1F2E 640D423 20587 31692 506B 7BCC424 10004 25384 2714 6328425 13459 18908 3493 49DC426 13383 25816 3447 64D8427 28930 4661 7102 1235428 4860 31115 12FC 798B429 13108 7691 3334 1E0B430 24161 1311 5E61 051F431 20067 16471 4E63 4057432 2667 15771 0A6B 3D9B433 13372 16112 343C 3EF0434 28743 21062 7047 5246435 24489 29690 5FA9 73FA436 249 10141 00F9 279D437 19960 19014 4DF8 4A46438 29682 22141 73F2 567D439 31101 11852 797D 2E4C440 27148 26404 6A0C 6724441 26706 30663 6852 77C7442 5148 32524 141C 7F0C443 4216 28644 1078 6FE4444 5762 10228 1682 27F4445 245 23536 00F5 5BF0446 21882 18045 557A 467D447 3763 25441 0EB3 6361448 206 27066 00CE 69BA449 28798 13740 707E 35AC450 32402 13815 7E92 35F7. . . continued on next pageB
PN Offset Programming Information – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP B-11DRAFTTable B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn14–Chip Delay Pilot I Q I Q PN (Dec.) (Hex.)451 13463 3684 3497 0E64452 15417 23715 3C39 5CA3453 23101 15314 5A3D 3BD2454 14957 32469 3A6D 7ED5455 23429 9816 5B85 2658456 12990 4444 32BE 115C457 12421 5664 3085 1620458 28875 7358 70CB 1CBE459 4009 27264 0FA9 6A80460 1872 28128 0750 6DE0461 15203 30168 3B63 75D8462 30109 29971 759D 7513463 24001 3409 5DC1 0D51464 4862 16910 12FE 420E465 14091 20739 370B 5103466 6702 10191 1A2E 27CF467 3067 12819 0BFB 3213468 28643 19295 6FE3 4B5F469 21379 10072 5383 2758470 20276 15191 4F34 3B57471 25337 27748 62F9 6C64472 19683 720 4CE3 02D0473 10147 29799 27A3 7467474 16791 27640 4197 6BF8475 17359 263 43CF 0107476 13248 24734 33C0 609E477 22740 16615 58D4 40E7478 13095 20378 3327 4F9A479 10345 25116 2869 621C480 30342 19669 7686 4CD5481 27866 14656 6CDA 3940482 9559 27151 2557 6A0F483 8808 28728 2268 7038484 12744 25092 31C8 6204485 11618 22601 2D62 5849486 27162 2471 6A1A 09A7487 17899 25309 45EB 62DD488 29745 15358 7431 3BFE489 31892 17739 7C94 454B490 23964 12643 5D9C 3163491 23562 32730 5C0A 7FDA492 2964 19122 0B94 4AB2493 18208 16870 4720 41E6494 15028 10787 3AB4 2A23495 21901 18400 558D 47E0496 24566 20295 5FF6 4F47497 18994 1937 4A32 0791498 13608 17963 3528 462B499 27492 7438 6B64 1D0E500 11706 12938 2DBA 328A. . . continued on next pageB
PN Offset Programming Information – continued B-12 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTTable B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn14–Chip Delay Pilot I Q I Q PN (Dec.) (Hex.)501 14301 19272 37DD 4B48502 23380 29989 5B54 7525503 11338 8526 2C4A 214E504 2995 18139 0BB3 46DB505 23390 3247 5B5E 0CAF506 14473 28919 3889 70F7507 6530 7292 1982 1C7C508 20452 20740 4FE4 5104509 12226 27994 2FC2 6D5A510 1058 2224 0422 08B0511 12026 6827 2EFA 1AAB B
5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATPDRAFTAppendix C: FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix Appendix ContentTHIS IS THE GENERAL APPENDIX TOC. USE THIS FOR ALLAPPENDICES EXCEPT APPENDIX A.Guide Book 1–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Document Overview 1–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What Is In This Guide? 1–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Book Catalogs and Organization 1–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Book Directory 1–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Catalogs 1–5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Physical Page Layouts 1–6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A/A4 Page and Margin Sizes 1–6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A/A4 Page Text Area 1–7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A/A4 Page Components 1–9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frame and Table Components 1–10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frames With Tools 1–10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flow Charts and Block Diagrams 1–10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line Drawings 1–11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table Types In This Template 1–12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Item/Description Table 1–12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Step Table 1–13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Step/Check Table 1–14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Component Descriptions 1–15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conclusions 1–16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Map Title Goes Here lkjsfdg Sfdkgj Msfd N lkas K lkjsdfl kB lkj fgcb 1–17. . . . . . Block Label Goes Here 1–17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Label Goes Here 1–17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Label Goes Here 1–18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Label Goes Here 1–19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Map Title Goes Here 1–22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C
Table of Contents – continued1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTNotesC
FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP C-1DRAFTUsage & BackgroundPeriodic maintenance of a site may also may mandate re–optimization ofspecific portions of the site. An outline of some basic guidelines isincluded in the following tables.Re–optimization steps listed for any assembly detailed inthe tables below must be performed anytime an RF cableassociated with it is replaced.NOTEBTS FrameTable C-1: When RF Optimization Is required on the BTSItem Replaced Optimize:C–CCP Shelf All sector TX and RX paths to allCombined CDMA Channel Processor(C–CCP) shelves.Multicoupler/Preselector CardThe three or six affected sector RX paths forthe C–CCP shelf in the BTS frames.BBX board RX and TX paths of the affected C–CCPshelf / BBX board.MCIO Card All RX and TX paths of the affectedCDMA carrier.Any PA Module All sector/carrier TX paths.Parallel PA Combiner All sector/carrier TX paths.TX Filter The affected sector TX path.Enhanced TrunkingModuleAll sector/carrier TX paths.Ancillary Frame Item Replaced Optimize:Directional Coupler All affected sector RX and TX paths to allBTS frame shelves.Site filter All affected RX sector paths in all shelvesin all BTS frames.Inter-frame CablingOptimization must be performed after the replacement of any RF cablingbetween BTS frames.C
FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix – continued C-2 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTTable C-2: When to Optimize Inter–frame CablingItem Replaced Optimize:Ancillary frame to BTSframe (RX) cablesThe affected sector/antenna RXpaths.BTS frame to ancillary frame(TX) cablesThe affected sector/antenna TX paths.Detailed Optimization/ATP TestMatrixTable C-3 outlines in more detail the tests that would need to beperformed if one of the BTS components were to fail and be replaced. Itis also assumed that all modules are placed OOS–ROM via the LMFuntil full redundancy of all applicable modules is implemented.The following guidelines should also be noted when using this table.Not every procedure required to bring the site back on lineis indicated in Table C-3. It is meant to be used as aguideline ONLY. The table assumes that the user is familiarenough with the BTS Optimization/ATP procedure tounderstand which test equipment set ups, calibrations, andBTS site preparation will be required before performing theTable # procedures referenced.IMPORTANT*Various passive BTS components (such as the TX and RX directionalcouplers, Preselector IO, MCIO, etc.) only call for a TX or RXcalibration audit to be performed in lieu of a full path calibration. If theRX or TX path calibration audit fails, the entire RF path calibration willneed to be repeated. If the RF path calibration fails, furthertroubleshooting is warranted.Whenever any C–CCP BACKPLANE is replaced, it is assumed thatonly power to the C–CCP shelf being replaced is turned off via thebreaker supplying that shelf.Whenever any DISTRIBUTION BACKPLANE is replaced it is assumedthat the power to the entire RFM frame is removed and the PreselectorI/O is replaced. The modem frame should be brought up as if it were anew installation.If any significant change in signal level results from anycomponent being replaced in the RX or TX signal flowpaths, it would be identified by re–running the RX and TXcalibration audit command.NOTEC
FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP C-3DRAFTWhen the MCIO is replaced, the C–CCP shelf remains powered up. TheBBX boards may need to be removed, then re–installed into theiroriginal slots, and re–downloaded (code and BLO data). RX and TXcalibration audits should then be performed.C
FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix – continued C-4 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTTable C-3: SC 4812T–MC BTS Optimization and ATP Test MatrixDoc Tbl # Page DescriptionDirectional Coupler (RX)Directional Coupler (TX)RX FilterRX CablesTX CablesMulticoupler/PreselectorMCIOC–CCP BackplaneBBXMCCCSMLFR/HSOGPSGLIPower AmplifierPower Converters (See Note)Switch CardTX FilterEnhanced Trunking ModulePLCTable 2-1 2-2Initial Boards/ Modules Install,Preliminary Operations, CDF SiteEquipage; etc.DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDTable 2-2Table 2-42-12-6 DC Power Pre-Test Physical Inspect D DTable 2-5 2-7 Initial Power-up D DTable 3-11 3-32 Ping Processors D D D D D DTable 3-13 3-35 Download/Enable MGLIs D DTable 3-13 3-35 Download/Enable GLIs D DTable 3-14 3-36 Download CSMs D D DTable 3-14 3-36 Download MCCs, D D DTable 3-14 3-36 Download BBXs D DTable 3-16 3-39 Enable CSMs D DTable 3-17 3-39 Enable MCCs D DTable 3-20 3-45 GPS Initialization / Verification D D DTable 3-21 3-49 HSO Initialization/ Verification D DTable 3-38 3-90 Download Offsets to BBX D D DTable 4-1 4-5 Spectral Purity TX Mask ATP D D D D D D DTable 4-1 4-5 Waveform Quality (rho) ATP D D D D D D D D DTable 4-1 4-5 Pilot Time Offset ATP D D D D D D D D DTable 4-1 4-5 Code Domain Power/Noise Floor DDDTable 4-1 4-5 FER Test DDDDDNOTEReplace power converters one card at a time so that power to the C–CCP or PA shelf is not lost. If power to theC–CCP shelf is lost, all cards in the shelf must be downloaded again.C
5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATPDRAFTAppendix D: BBX Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output Appendix ContentTHIS IS THE GENERAL APPENDIX TOC. USE THIS FOR ALLAPPENDICES EXCEPT APPENDIX A.Guide Book 1–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Document Overview 1–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What Is In This Guide? 1–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Book Catalogs and Organization 1–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Book Directory 1–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Catalogs 1–5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Physical Page Layouts 1–6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A/A4 Page and Margin Sizes 1–6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A/A4 Page Text Area 1–7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A/A4 Page Components 1–9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frame and Table Components 1–10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frames With Tools 1–10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flow Charts and Block Diagrams 1–10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line Drawings 1–11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table Types In This Template 1–12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Item/Description Table 1–12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Step Table 1–13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Step/Check Table 1–14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Component Descriptions 1–15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conclusions 1–16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Map Title Goes Here lkjsfdg Sfdkgj Msfd N lkas K lkjsdfl kB lkj fgcb 1–17. . . . . . Block Label Goes Here 1–17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Label Goes Here 1–17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Label Goes Here 1–18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Label Goes Here 1–19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Map Title Goes Here 1–22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D
Table of Contents – continued1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTNotesD
BBX Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output Considerations5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP D-1DRAFTUsage & BackgroundTable D-1 outlines the relationship between the total of all code domainchannel element gain settings (digital root sum of the squares) and theBBX Gain Set Point between 33.0 dBm and 44.0 dBm. The resultant RFoutput (as measured at the top of the BTS in dBm) is shown in the table.The table assumes that the BBX Bay Level Offset (BLO) values havebeen calculated.As an illustration, consider a BBX keyed up to produce a CDMA carrierwith only the Pilot channel (no MCCs forward link enabled). Pilot gainis set to 262. In this case, the BBX Gain Set Point is shown to correlateexactly to the actual RF output anywhere in the 33 to 44 dBm outputrange. (This is the level used to calibrate the BTS).Table D-1: BBX Gain Set Point vs. Actual BTS Output (in dBm)dBm’Gainb44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33541 – – – – – – – 43.3 42.3 41.3 40.3 39.3533 – – – – – – – 43.2 42.2 41.2 40.2 39.2525 – – – – – – 44 43 42 41 40 39517 – – – – – – 43.9 42.9 41.9 40.9 39.9 38.9509 – – – – – – 43.8 42.8 41.8 40.8 39.8 38.8501 – – – – – – 43.6 42.6 41.6 40.6 39.6 38.6493 – – – – – – 43.5 42.5 41.5 40.5 39.5 38.5485 – – – – – – 43.4 42.4 41.4 40.4 39.4 38.4477 – – – – – – 43.2 42.2 41.2 40.2 39.2 38.2469 – – – – – – 43.1 42.1 41.1 40.1 39.1 38.1461 – – – – – 43.9 42.9 41.9 40.9 39.9 38.9 37.9453 – – – – – 43.8 42.8 41.8 40.8 39.8 38.8 37.8445 – – – – – 43.6 42.6 41.6 40.6 39.6 38.6 37.6437 – – – – – 43.4 42.4 41.4 40.4 39.4 38.4 37.4429 – – – – – 43.3 42.3 41.3 40.3 39.3 38.3 37.3421 – – – – – 43.1 42.1 41.1 40.1 39.1 38.1 37.1413 – – – – 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37405 – – – – 43.8 42.8 41.8 40.8 39.8 38.8 37.8 36.8397 – – – – 43.6 42.6 41.6 40.6 39.6 38.6 37.6 36.6389 – – – – 43.4 42.4 41.4 40.4 39.4 38.4 37.4 36.4 . . . continued on next pageD
BBX Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output Considerations – continued D-2 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTTable D-1: BBX Gain Set Point vs. Actual BTS Output (in dBm)dBm’Gainb333435363738394041424344381 – – – – 43.3 42.3 41.3 40.3 39.3 38.3 37.3 36.3374 – – – – 43.1 42.1 41.1 40.1 39.1 38.1 37.1 36.1366 – – – 43.9 42.9 41.9 40.9 39.9 38.9 37.9 36.9 35.9358 – – – 43.7 42.7 41.7 40.7 39.7 38.7 37.7 36.7 35.7350 – – – 43.5 42.5 41.5 40.5 39.5 38.5 37.5 36.5 35.5342 – – – 43.3 42.3 41.3 40.3 39.3 38.3 37.3 36.3 35.3334 – – – 43.1 42.1 41.1 40.1 39.1 38.1 37.1 36.1 35.1326 – – 43.9 42.9 41.9 40.9 39.9 38.9 37.9 36.9 35.9 34.9318 – – 43.7 42.7 41.7 40.7 39.7 38.7 37.7 36.7 35.7 34.7310 – – 43.5 42.5 41.5 40.5 39.5 38.5 37.5 36.5 35.5 34.5302 – – 43.2 42.2 41.2 40.2 39.2 38.2 37.2 36.2 35.2 34.2294 – 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34286 – 43.8 42.8 41.8 40.8 39.8 38.8 37.8 36.8 35.8 34.8 33.8278 – 43.5 42.5 41.5 40.5 39.5 38.5 37.5 36.5 35.5 34.5 33.5270 – 43.3 42.3 41.3 40.3 39.3 38.3 37.3 36.3 35.3 34.3 33.3262 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33254 43.7 42.7 41.7 40.7 39.7 38.7 37.7 36.7 35.7 34.7 33.7 –246 43.4 42.4 41.4 40.4 39.4 38.4 37.4 36.4 35.4 34.4 33.4 –238 43.2 42.2 41.2 40.2 39.2 38.2 37.2 36.2 35.2 34.2 33.2 –230 42.9 41.9 40.9 39.9 38.9 37.9 36.9 35.9 34.9 33.9 – –222 42.6 41.6 40.6 39.6 38.6 37.6 36.6 35.6 34.6 33.6 – –214 42.2 41.2 40.2 39.2 38.2 37.2 36.2 35.2 34.2 33.2 – –D
5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATPDRAFTAppendix E: Chapter Title Goes Here Appendix ContentTHIS IS THE GENERAL APPENDIX TOC. USE THIS FOR ALLAPPENDICES EXCEPT APPENDIX A.Guide Book 1–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Document Overview 1–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What Is In This Guide? 1–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Book Catalogs and Organization 1–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Book Directory 1–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Catalogs 1–5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Physical Page Layouts 1–6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A/A4 Page and Margin Sizes 1–6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A/A4 Page Text Area 1–7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A/A4 Page Components 1–9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frame and Table Components 1–10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frames With Tools 1–10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flow Charts and Block Diagrams 1–10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line Drawings 1–11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table Types In This Template 1–12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Item/Description Table 1–12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Step Table 1–13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Step/Check Table 1–14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Component Descriptions 1–15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conclusions 1–16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Map Title Goes Here lkjsfdg Sfdkgj Msfd N lkas K lkjsdfl kB lkj fgcb 1–17. . . . . . Block Label Goes Here 1–17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Label Goes Here 1–17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Label Goes Here 1–18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Label Goes Here 1–19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Map Title Goes Here 1–22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E
Table of Contents – continued1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTNotesE
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP E-1DRAFTIntroductionProgramming of each of the BTS BBX synthesizers is performed by theBTS GLI cards over the Concentration Highway Interface (CHI) bus.This programming data determines the transmit and receive operatingfrequencies (channels) for each BBX.1900 MHz PCS ChannelsFigure E-1 shows the valid channels for the North American PCS1900 MHz frequency spectrum. There are 10 CDMA wireline ornon–wireline band channels used in a CDMA system (unique percustomer operating system). FREQ (MHz)RX TX2751175CHANNEL1863.759251851.25251871.25425675 1883.751896.251908.751943.751931.251951.251963.751976.251988.75ADBEFCFW00463Figure E-1: North America PCS Frequency Spectrum (CDMA Allocation)E
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information – continued E-2 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTCalculating 1900 MHz CenterFrequenciesTable E-1 shows selected 1900 MHz CDMA candidate operatingchannels, listed in both decimal and hexadecimal, and the correspondingtransmit, and receive frequencies. Center frequencies (in MHz) forchannels not shown in the table may be calculated as follows:STX = 1930 + 0.05 * Channel#Example: Channel 262TX = 1930 + 0.05 * 262 = 1943.10 MHzSRX = TX – 80Example: Channel 262RX = 1943.10 – 50 = 1863.10 MHzActual frequencies used depend on customer CDMA system frequencyplan.Each CDMA channel requires a 1.77 MHz frequency segment. Theactual CDMA carrier is 1.23 MHz wide, with a 0.27 MHz guard band onboth sides of the carrier.Minimum frequency separation required between any CDMA carrier andthe nearest NAMPS/AMPS carrier is 900 kHz (center-to-center).Table E-1: 1900 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. ChannelChannel NumberDecimal HexTransmit Frequency (MHz)Center FrequencyReceive Frequency (MHz)Center Frequency25 0019 1931.25 1851.2550 0032 1932.50 1852.5075 004B 1933.75 1853.75100 0064 1935.00 1855.00125 007D 1936.25 1856.25150 0096 1937.50 1857.50175 00AF 1938.75 1858.75200 00C8 1940.00 1860.00225 00E1 1941.25 1861.25250 00FA 1942.50 1862.50275 0113 1943.75 1863.75300 012C 1945.00 1865.00325 0145 1946.25 1866.25350 015E 1947.50 1867.50375 0177 1948.75 1868.75400 0190 1950.00 1870.00425 01A9 1951.25 1871.25450 01C2 1952.50 1872.50475 01DB 1953.75 1873.75500 01F4 1955.00 1875.00525 020D 1956.25 1876.25550 0226 1957.50 1877.50table continued next pageE
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP E-3DRAFTTable E-1: 1900 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. ChannelChannel NumberDecimal HexReceive Frequency (MHz)Center FrequencyTransmit Frequency (MHz)Center Frequency575 023F 1958.75 1878.75600 0258 1960.00 1880.00625 0271 1961.25 1881.25650 028A 1962.50 1882.50675 02A3 1963.75 1883.75700 02BC 1965.00 1885.00725 02D5 1966.25 1886.25750 02EE 1967.50 1887.50775 0307 1968.75 1888.75800 0320 1970.00 1890.00825 0339 1971.25 1891.25850 0352 1972.50 1892.50875 036B 1973.75 1893.75900 0384 1975.00 1895.00925 039D 1976.25 1896.25950 03B6 1977.50 1897.50975 03CF 1978.75 1898.751000 03E8 1980.00 1900.001025 0401 1981.25 1901.251050 041A 1982.50 1902.501075 0433 1983.75 1903.751100 044C 1985.00 1905.001125 0465 1986.25 1906.251150 047E 1987.50 1807.501175 0497 1988.75 1908.75 E
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information – continued E-4 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFT800 MHz CDMA ChannelsFigure E-2 shows the valid channels for the North American cellulartelephone frequency spectrum. There are 10 CDMA wireline ornon–wireline band channels used in a CDMA system (unique percustomer operating system).Figure E-2: North American Cellular Telephone System Frequency Spectrum (CDMA Allocation).RX FREQ(MHz)991 1023 1 333 334 666 667 716 717 799 CHANNELOVERALL NON–WIRELINE (A) BANDSOVERALL WIRELINE (B) BANDS824.040825.000825.030834.990835.020844.980845.010846.480846.510848.970869.040870.000870.030879.990880.020889.980890.010891.480891.510893.970TX FREQ(MHz)1013694 689 311 356 644 739 777 CDMA NON–WIRELINE (A) BANDCDMA WIRELINE (B) BANDFW00402Calculating 800 MHz CenterFrequenciesTable E-2 shows selected 800 MHz CDMA candidate operatingchannels, listed in both decimal and hexadecimal, and the correspondingtransmit, and receive frequencies. Center frequencies (in MHz) forchannels not shown in the table may be calculated as follows:SChannels 1–777TX = 870 + 0.03 * Channel#Example: Channel 262TX = 870 + 0.03*262 = 877.86 MHzSChannels 1013–1023TX = 870 + 0.03 * (Channel# – 1023)Example: Channel 1015TX = 870 +0.03 *(1015 – 1023) = 869.76 MHzSRX = TX – 45 MHzExample: Channel 262RX = 877.86 –45 = 832.86 MHzTable E-2: 800 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. ChannelChannel NumberDecimal HexTransmit Frequency (MHz)Center FrequencyReceive Frequency (MHz)Center Frequency1 0001 870.0300 825.030025 0019 870.7500 825.7500table continued next pageE
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP E-5DRAFTTable E-2: 800 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. ChannelChannel NumberDecimal HexReceive Frequency (MHz)Center FrequencyTransmit Frequency (MHz)Center Frequency50 0032 871.5000 826.500075 004B 872.2500 827.2500100 0064 873.0000 828.0000125 007D 873.7500 828.7500150 0096 874.5000 829.5000175 00AF 875.2500 830.2500200 00C8 876.0000 831.0000225 00E1 876.7500 831.7500250 00FA 877.5000 832.5000275 0113 878.2500 833.2500300 012C 879.0000 834.0000325 0145 879.7500 834.7500350 015E 880.5000 835.5000375 0177 881.2500 836.2500400 0190 882.0000 837.0000425 01A9 882.7500 837.7500450 01C2 883.5000 838.5000475 01DB 884.2500 839.2500500 01F4 885.0000 840.0000525 020D 885.7500 840.7500550 0226 886.5000 841.5000575 023F 887.2500 842.2500600 0258 888.0000 843.0000625 0271 888.7500 843.7500650 028A 889.5000 844.5000675 02A3 890.2500 845.2500700 02BC 891.0000 846.0000725 02D5 891.7500 846.7500750 02EE 892.5000 847.5000775 0307 893.2500 848.2500NOTEChannel numbers 778 through 1012 are not used.1013 03F5 869.7000 824.70001023 03FF 870.0000 825.0000 E
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information – continued E-6 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTNotesE
5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATPDRAFTAppendix F: Test Equipment Preparation Appendix ContentTHIS IS THE GENERAL APPENDIX TOC. USE THIS FOR ALLAPPENDICES EXCEPT APPENDIX A.Guide Book 1–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Document Overview 1–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What Is In This Guide? 1–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Book Catalogs and Organization 1–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Book Directory 1–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Catalogs 1–5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Physical Page Layouts 1–6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A/A4 Page and Margin Sizes 1–6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A/A4 Page Text Area 1–7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A/A4 Page Components 1–9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frame and Table Components 1–10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frames With Tools 1–10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flow Charts and Block Diagrams 1–10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line Drawings 1–11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table Types In This Template 1–12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Item/Description Table 1–12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Step Table 1–13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Step/Check Table 1–14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Component Descriptions 1–15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conclusions 1–16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Map Title Goes Here lkjsfdg Sfdkgj Msfd N lkas K lkjsdfl kB lkj fgcb 1–17. . . . . . Block Label Goes Here 1–17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Label Goes Here 1–17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Label Goes Here 1–18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Label Goes Here 1–19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Map Title Goes Here 1–22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F
Table of Contents – continued1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTNotesF
Test Equipment Preparation5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP F-1DRAFTPurposePre–testing set–up information covered includes verification and settingGPIB addresses, inter–unit cabling, connectivity testing, pre–test controlsettings, and equipment calibration for items which are not calibratedwith the Calibrate Test Equipment function of the LMF.The following procedures include verification and changing GPIBaddresses for the various items of CDMA test equipment supported bythe LMF.Prepare test setsThis appendix provides information on pre–testing set–up for thefollowing test equipment items (not required for the Cybertest test set):SAgilent E7495A test equipment set–upSAgilent E4406A transmitter test setSAgilent E4432B signal generatorSAdvantest R3267 spectrum analyzerSAdvantest R3562 signal generatorSAgilent 8935 analyzer (formerly HP 8935)SHP 8921 with PCS interface analyzerSAdvantest R3465 analyzerSMotorola CyberTestSHP 437 power meterSGigatronics 8541C power meterSGPIB adapterTest Equipment Set-upSHP8921A System Connectivity TestSHP PCS Interface Test Equipment Setup for Manual TestingSCalibrating Test Cable Set–up using Advantest R3465Calibrating test setsSAgilent E4406A Transmitter Tester Self-alignment (Calibration)SHP 437 Power Meter (Calibration)SGigatronics 8542 power meter (Calibration)Agilent E7495A Test EquipmentSetupThis test equipment requires a warm-up period of at least 30 minutesbefore BTS testing or calibration begins.Using the Agilent E7495A with the LMFThe Agilent E7495A does not require the use of the 19MHz frequencyreference; if connected, it will be ignored. The Even Sec SYNCconnection is required.F
Test Equipment Preparation – continued F-2 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTThe Agilent E7495A signal generator is only calibrated down to –80db.In order to achieve accurate FER testing, be sure the RX setup includesat least 40db of attenuation. This will ensure the signal generator willoutput sufficient power to operate in the calibrated range.Set the IP Address as described in Table F-1.Table F-1: Set IP Address on Agilent E7495A test setnStep Action1Use the System Button > Controls >IPAdmin to set anIP address on the E7495A as 128.0.0.49, and Netmask to255.255.255.128. ConnectionsMotorola recommends using a hub with BNC and RJ–45 connections.Suggested models: Netgear model EN104 (4 port) or EN108 (8 port). DoNOT use model numbers ending with “TP”; those have no BNCconnectors.The LMF will connect to the hub which in turn is connected to the BTSand to the Agilent E7495A.Agilent E7495A to Hub – This is an Ethernet cable, RJ–45 to RJ–45.LMF to Hub – Use one of the following cables to connect the LMF tothe Hub:– Ethernet cable, RJ–45–to–RJ–45. Be sure the LAN card is set foreither AUTO or to use the RJ–45 only.– Coax cable between LAN card and Hub. Use a BNC “T” connectoron the hub. If the hub does not have BNC connectors, use aBNC–to–UTP adapter with the “T” connector. Connect a coaxialcable between the LAN card and one end of the BNC “T” crossbar.Hub to BTS – With a BNC “T” connector on the hub, connect a coaxialcable between the open end of the “T” crossbar and the BTS LANconnection.Detecting Test EquipmentBe sure no other equipment is connected to the LMF. The E7495A mustbe connected to the LAN, as described above, for the LMF to detect it.Perform the procedures described in Table F-2.Table F-2: Detecting Agilent E7495A Test EquipmentnStep Action1Click the Tools Menu.2 Choose Options.. . . continued on next pageF
Test Equipment Preparation – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP F-3DRAFTTable F-2: Detecting Agilent E7495A Test EquipmentnActionStep3 Check Agilent E7495A option in non–GPIB TestEquipment and enter its IP number.4 Click Apply and wait a moment.5 Click Dismiss. Power Sensor CalibrationTable F-3 describes the E7495A Power Sensor Calibration.Table F-3: E7495A Power Sensor CalibrationnStep Action1Display the power meter screen.2Zero the power meter. Make sure equipment is connectedas shown in Figure F-1.– Press the Zero softkey.– Press the Continue softkey.3Calibrate the power meter:– Press Ref CF.– Enter the reference cal factor, reading it off the labelon the power sensor head.– Press Calibrate.– Connect the power sensor (see Figure F-2).– Press Continue.– Press Cal Factor.– Enter the cal factor from the label on the powersensor head. Select a cal factor that is within theoperating frequency of the BTS being calibrated. F
Test Equipment Preparation – continued F-4 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTFigure F-1: Agilent E7495A Pre–Power Sensor Calibration connectionUse onlyAgilent suppliedpower adapterGPSGPIOSerial 1Serial 2Power REF50 MHzSensorExt RefInEven SecondSync InAntennaPort 1RF Out / SWRPort 2RF InPOWER SENSORNOT CONNECTEDFigure F-2: Agilent E7495A Power Sensor Calibration connectionUse onlyAgilent suppliedpower adapterGPSGPIOSerial 1Serial 2Power REF50 MHzSensorExt RefInEven SecondSync InAntennaPort 1RF Out / SWRPort 2RF InPOWER SENSORCONNECTEDCable CalibrationFollow the directions in the LMF application program to calibratecables.– Calibrate the short cable (see Figure 3-13) and two 10 dBattenuators to establish a baseline and then calibrate the TX and RXset–ups. Because at least 40 dB of attenuation is needed whentesting the FER, the set–up for RX is the same as for TX.F
Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP F-5DRAFTAgilent E4406A TransmitterTester GPIB AddressFollow the procedure in Table F-4 and refer to Figure F-3 to verify and,if necessary, change the Agilent E4406A GPIB address.Figure F-3: Setting Agilent E4406A GPIB AddressSystem KeyBk Sp KeyEnter KeyData Entry KeypadSoftkey ButtonsSoftkey Label Display AreaActive Function Areati-CDMA-WP-00085-v01-ildoc-ftwTable F-4: Verify and Change Agilent E4406A GPIB AddressStep Action1In the SYSTEM section of the instrument front panel, press the System key.– The softkey labels displayed on the right side of the instrument screen will change.2Press the Config I/O softkey button to the right of the instrument screen.– The softkey labels will change.– The current instrument GPIB address will be displayed below the GPIB Address softkey label.3If the current GPIB address is not set to 18, perform the following to change it:3a Press the GPIB Address softkey button. In the on–screen Active Function Area, GPIB Address willbe displayed followed by the current GPIB address.. . . continued on next pageF
Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses – continued F-6 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTTable F-4: Verify and Change Agilent E4406A GPIB AddressStep Action3b On the front panel Data Entry keypad, enter the communications system analyzer GPIB address of 18.– The GPIB Address label will change to Enter.– Digits entered with the keypad will replace the current GPIB address in the display.NOTETo correct an entry, press the Bk Sp key at the upper right of the keypad to delete one character at atime.3c Press the Enter softkey button or the keypad Enter key to set the new GPIB address.– The Config I/O softkey labels will reappear.– The new GPIB address will be displayed under the GPIB Address softkey label. Agilent E4432B SignalGenerator GPIB AddressFollow the procedure in Table F-5 and refer to Figure F-4 to verify and,if necessary, change the Agilent E4432B GPIB address.Figure F-4: Setting Agilent E4432B GPIB AddressNumericKeypadSoftkeyButtonsSoftkey LabelDisplay AreaActive EntryAreaBackspaceKeyUtility Keyti-CDMA-WP-00086-v01-ildoc-ftwF
Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP F-7DRAFTTable F-5: Verify and Change Agilent E4432B GPIB AddressStep Action1In the MENUS section of the instrument front panel, press the Utility key.– The softkey labels displayed on the right side of the instrument screen will change.2Press the GPIB/RS232 softkey button to the right of the instrument screen.– The softkey labels will change.– The current instrument GPIB address will be displayed below the GPIB Address softkey label.3If the current GPIB address is not set to 1, perform the following to change it:3a Press the GPIB Address softkey button.– The GPIB Address label and current GPIB address will change to boldface.– In the on–screen Active Entry Area, Address: will be displayed followed by the current GPIBaddress.3b On the front panel Numeric keypad, enter the signal generator GPIB address of 1.– The GPIB Address label will change to Enter.– Digits entered with the keypad will replace the current GPIB address in the Active Entry display.NOTETo correct an entry, press the backspace key at the lower right of the keypad to delete one character ata time.3c Press the Enter softkey button to set the new GPIB address.– The new GPIB address will be displayed under the GPIB Address softkey label. Advantest R3267 SpectrumAnalyzer GPIB AddressPerform the procedure in Table F-6 and refer to Figure F-5 to verify and,if necessary, change the Advantest R3267 spectrum analyzer GPIBaddress.F
Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses – continued F-8 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTFigure F-5: Setting Advantest R3267 GPIB AddressonREMOTE LEDLCL KeyCONFIG KeySoftkey LableDisplay AreaSoftkeyButtonsKeypad BS Key ENTR Key ti-CDMA-WP-00083-v01-ildoc-ftwTable F-6: Verify and Change Advantest R3267 GPIB AddressStep Action1If the REMOTE LED is lighted, press the LCL key.– The LED extinguishes.2Press the CONFIG key.– The CONFIG softkey labels will appear in the softkey label display area of the instrumentdisplay.– The current GPIB address will be displayed below the GPIB Address softkey label.3If the current GPIB address is not set to 18, perform the following to change it:3a Press the GPIB Address softkey. A GPIB Address entry window will open in the instrument displayshowing the current GPIB address.3b Enter 18 on the keypad in the ENTRY section of the instrument front panel. Characters typed on thekeypad will replace the address displayed in the GPIB Address entry window.NOTETo correct an entry, press the BS (backspace) key at the lower right of the keypad to delete onecharacter at a time.3c Press the ENTR key to the lower right of the keypad to enter the address.– The GPIB Address entry window closes.– The new address is displayed in the bottom portion of the GPIB Address softkey label. F
Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP F-9DRAFTAdvantest R3562 SignalGenerator GPIB AddressSet the GP–IB ADDRESS switch on the rear of the Advantest R3562signal generator to address 1 as shown in Figure F-6.Figure F-6: Advantest R3562 GPIB Address Switch Setting123 4567 854321GP–IP ADDRESS10GPIB Address set to “1”ti-CDMA-WP-00084-v01-ildoc-ftwAgilent 8935 Series E6380(formerly HP 8935) Test SetGPIB AddressFollow the procedure in Table F-7 and refer to Figure F-7 to verify and,if necessary, change the HP8935 GPIB address.Figure F-7: HP8935 Test SetFW00885PresetCursor ControlShiftInst ConfigLocalF
Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses – continued F-10 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTThis procedure assumes that the test equipment is set upand ready for testing.NOTETable F-7: Verify and/or Change HP8935 GPIB AddressStep ActionNOTEThe HP I/O configuration MUST be set to Talk & Listen, or NO device on the GPIB bus will beaccessible. (Consult test equipment OEM documentation for additional information as required.)1To verify that the GPIB addresses are set correctly, press Shift and LOCAL on the HP8935. Thecurrent HP–IB address is displayed at the top of the screen.NOTEHP–IB is the same as GPIB.2If the current GPIB address is not set to 18, perform the following to change it:– Press Shift and Inst Config.– Turn the Cursor Control knob to move the cursor to the HP–IB Adrs field.– Press the Cursor Control knob to select the field.– Turn the Cursor Control knob as required to change the address to 18.– Press the Cursor Control knob to set the address.3SPress Preset to return to normal operation.Hewlett Packard HP8921A andHP83236A/B GPIB AddressFollow the procedure in Table F-8 and refer to Figure F-8, to verify and,if necessary, change the HP8921A HP83236A GPIB addresses.F
Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP F-11DRAFTFigure F-8: HP8921A and HP3236A/BPresetCursor ControlShiftLocalti-CDMA-WP-00081-v01-ildoc-ftwThis procedure assumes that the test equipment is set upand ready for testing.NOTETable F-8: Verify and/or Change HP8921A and HP83236A GPIB AddressesStep Action1To verify that the GPIB addresses are set correctly, press Shift and LOCAL on the HP8921A. Thecurrent HP–IB address is displayed at the top of the screen.NOTEHP–IB is the same as GPIB.2If the current HP–IB address is not set to 18, perform the following to change it:– Turn the Cursor Control knob to move the cursor to More and press the knob to select the field.– Turn the Cursor Control knob to move the cursor to I/O Config and press the knob to select thefield.– Turn the Cursor Control knob to move the cursor to Adrs and press the knob to select the field.– Turn the Cursor Control knob to change the HP–IB address to 18 and press the knob to set theaddress.– Press Shift and Preset to return to normal operation.3To set the HP83236A (or B) PCS Interface GPIB address=19, set the dip switches as follows:– A1=1, A2=1, A3=0, A4=0, A5=1, HP–IB/Ser = 1F
Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses – continued F-12 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTAdvantest R3465Communications Test Set GPIBAddressFollow the steps in Table F-9 and refer to Figure F-9 to verify and, ifnecessary, change the GPIB address for the Advantest R3465.Figure F-9: R3465 Communications Test SetBNC“T”REF UNLOCK EVENSEC/SYNC IN CDMATIME BASE INPOWEROFF ONREF FW00337LCLShiftPresetGPIB and othersVernier KnobThis procedure assumes that the test equipment is set upand ready for testing.NOTETable F-9: Verify and/or Change Advantest R3465 GPIB AddressStep Action1To verify that the GPIB address is set correctly, perform the following procedure:– Press SHIFT then PRESET.– Press LCL.– Press the GPIB and Others CRT menu key to view the current address.2If the current GPIB address is not set to 18, perform the following to change it:– Turn the vernier knob as required to select 18.– Press the vernier knob to set the address.3To return to normal operation, press Shift and Preset.Motorola CyberTest GPIBAddressFollow the steps in Table F-10 to verify and, if necessary, change theGPIB address on the Motorola CyberTest. Changing the GPIB addressrequires the following items:SMotorola CyberTest communications analyzer.SComputer running Windows 3.1/Windows 95.F
Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP F-13DRAFTSMotorola CyberTAME software program “TAME”.SParallel printer port cable (shipped with CyberTest).This procedure assumes that the test equipment is set upand ready for testing.NOTETable F-10: Verify and/or Change Motorola CyberTest GPIB AStep Action1On the LMF desktop, locate the CyberTAME icon. Double click on the iconapplication.2In the CyberTAME window taskbar, under Special, select IEEE.488.2.3CyberTAME software will query the CyberTest Analyzer for its current GPIopen the IEEE 488.2 dialog box. If the current GPIB address is not 18, perfoprocedure to change it:– Use the up or down increment arrows, or double–click in the field and ty– Click on the OK button.The new address will be written to the CyberTest via the parallel port anNOTEVerify that the address has been set by repeating steps 2 and 3. The new addrthe IEEE 488.2 dialog box Address field.HP437 Power Meter GPIBAddressFollow the steps in Table F-11 and refer to Figure F-10 to verify and, ifnecessary, change the HP437 GPIB address.Figure F-10: HP437 Power MeterENTERPRESETSHIFT (BLUE) PUSHBUTTON –ACCESSES FUNCTION ANDDATA ENTRY KEYS IDENTIFIEDWITH LIGHT BLUE TEXT ONTHE FRONT PANEL ABOVETHE BUTTONSFW00308REFNOTE This procedure assumes that the test equipment is set up andready for testing.F
Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses – continued F-14 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTTable F-11: Verify and/or Change HP437 Power Meter GPIB AddressStep Action1 Press Shift and PRESET.2Use the y arrow key to navigate to HP–IB ADRS and press ENTER.The HP–IB address is displayed.NOTEHP–IB is the same as GPIB.3If the current GPIB address is not set to 13, perform the following to change it:– Use the y b arrow keys to change the HP–IB ADRS to 13.– Press ENTER to set the address.4 Press Shift and ENTER to return to a standard configuration. Gigatronics 8541C PowerMeter GPIB AddressFollow the steps in Table F-12 and refer to Figure F-11 to verify and, ifnecessary, change the Gigatronics 8541C power meter GPIB address.Figure F-11: Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter DetailMENU ENTER ARROWKEYS REF FW005641This procedure assumes that the test equipment is set upand ready for testing.NOTETable F-12: Verify and/or Change Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter GPIB AddressStep Action! CAUTIONDo not connect/disconnect the power meter sensor cable with AC power applied to the meter.Disconnection could result in destruction of the sensing element or miscalibration.1 Press MENU.F
Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP F-15DRAFTTable F-12: Verify and/or Change Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter GPIB AddressStep Action2Use the b arrow key to select CONFIG MENU and press ENTER.3Use the b arrow key to select GPIB and press ENTER.The current Mode and GPIB Address are displayed.4If the Mode is not set to 8541C, perform the following to change it:Use the a ’ arrow keys as required to select MODE.Use the by arrow keys as required to set MODE to 8541C.5If the GPIB address is not set to 13, perform the following to change it:Use the ’ arrow key to select ADDRESS.Use the by arrow keys as required to set the GPIB address to 13.6 Press ENTER to return to normal operation.RS232 GPIB Interface BoxEnsure that the RS232 GPIB interface box dip switches are set as shownin Figure F-12.Figure F-12: RS232 GPIB Interface BoxRS232–GPIBInterface BoxS MODEDATA FORMATBAUD RATEGPIB ADRSONDIP SWITCH SETTINGSG MODEti-CDMA-WP-00082-v01-ildoc-ftwF
Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses – continued F-16 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTTest Equipment Set-upPurposeThis section covers other test equipment and peripherals not covered inChapter 3. Procedures for the manual testing are covered here, alongwith procedures to calibrate the TX and RX cables using the signalgenerator and spectrum analyzer.Equipment Warm upWarm-up BTS equipment for a minimum of 60 minutesprior to performing the BTS optimization procedure. Thisassures BTS site stability and contributes to optimizationaccuracy. (Time spent running initial power-up,hardware/firmware audit, and BTS download counts aswarm-up time.)NOTEIf any piece of test equipment (i.e., test cable, RF adapter)has been replaced, re-calibration must be performed.Failure to do so could introduce measurement errors,resulting in incorrect measurements and degradation tosystem performance..CAUTIONCalibration of the communications test set (or equivalenttest equipment) must be performed at the site beforecalibrating the overall test set. Calibrate the test equipmentafter it has been allowed to warm-up and stabilize for aminimum of 60 minutes.NOTEPrerequisitesPrior to performing any of these procedures, all preparations forpreparing the LMF, updating LMF files, and any other pre-calibrationprocedures, as stated in Chapter 3, must have been completed.HP8921A System ConnectivityTestFollow the steps in Table F-13 to verify that the connections between thePCS Interface and the HP8921A are correct, and cables are intact. Thesoftware also performs basic functionality checks of each instrument.F
Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP F-17DRAFTDisconnect other GPIB devices, especially systemcontrollers, from the system before running theconnectivity software.NOTETable F-13: System ConnectivityStep ActionNOTE– Perform this procedure after test equipment has been allowed to warm–up and stabilize for aminimum of 60 minutes.1Insert HP 83236A Manual Control/System card into memory card slot.2Press the [PRESET] pushbutton.3Press the Screen Control [TESTS] pushbutton to display the “Tests” Main Menu screen.4Position the cursor at Select Procedure Location and select by pressing the cursor control knob.In the Choices selection box, select Card.5Position the cursor at Select Procedure Filename and select by pressing the cursor control knob.In the Choices selection box, select SYS_CONN.6Position the cursor at RUN TEST and select it.The software will prompt you through the connectivity setup.7When the test is complete, position the cursor on STOP TEST and select it; OR press the [K5]pushbutton.8To return to the main menu, press the [K5] pushbutton.HP PCS Interface TestEquipment Setup for ManualTestingFollow the procedure in Table F-14 to setup the HP PCS Interface Boxfor manual testing.Table F-14: Manual Cable Calibration Test Equipment Setup (using the HP PCS Interface)nStep ActionNOTEVerify GPIB controller is turned off.1Insert HP83236B Manual Control/System card into the memory card slot.2 Under Screen Controls, press the [TESTS] push-button to display the TESTS (Main Menu)screen.3Position the cursor at Select Procedure Location and select. In the Choices selection box, selectCARD.4Position the cursor at Select Procedure Filename and select. In the Choices selection box, selectMANUAL.F
Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses – continued F-18 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTTable F-14: Manual Cable Calibration Test Equipment Setup (using the HP PCS Interface)nActionStep5Position the cursor at RUN TEST and select OR press the K1 push-button.6Set channel number=<chan#>:– Position cursor at Channel Number and select.– Enter the chan# using the numeric keypad and then press [Enter] (the screen will blank).– When the screen reappears, the chan# will be displayed on the channel number line.NOTE– If using a TMPC with Tower Top Amplifier (TTA) skip Step 7.7Set RF Generator level= –119 dBm + Cal factor Example: –119 dBm + 2 dB = –117 dBm– Continue with Step 9 (skip Step 8).8Set RF Generator level= –116 dBm + Cal factor. Example: –116 dBm + 2 dB = –114 dBm9Set the user fixed Attenuation Setting to 0 dB:– Position cursor at RF Generator Level and select.– Position cursor at User Fixed Atten Settings and select.– Enter 0 (zero) using the numeric keypad and press [Enter].10 Select Back to Previous Menu.11 Select Quit, then select Yes.Calibrating Test Cable Setupusing Advantest R3465Be sure the GPIB Interface is OFF for this procedure.NOTEPerform the procedure in Table F-15 to calibrate the test cable setupusing the Advantest R3465. Advantest R3465 Manual Test setup andcalibration must be performed at both the TX and RX frequencies.Table F-15: Procedure for Calibrating Test Cable Setup Using Advantest R3465Step ActionNOTE– This procedure can only be performed after test equipment has been allowed to warm–up andstabilize for a minimum of 60 minutes.1Press the SHIFT and the PRESET keys located below the display.2Press the ADVANCE key in the MEASUREMENT area of the control panel.3Select the CDMA Sig CRT menu key.4Select the Setup CRT menu key.. . . continued on next pageF
Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP F-19DRAFTTable F-15: Procedure for Calibrating Test Cable Setup Using Advantest R3465Step Action5Using the vernier knob and the cursor keys set the following parameters:NOTEFields not listed remain at default.Generator Mode: SIGNALLink: FORWARDLevel Unit: dBmCalCorrection: ONLevel Offset: OFF6Select the return CRT menu key.7 Press FREQ key in the ENTRY area.8Set the frequency to the desired value using the keypad entry keys.9Verify that the Mod CRT menu key is highlighting OFF; if not, press the Mod key to toggle it OFF.10 Verify that the Output CRT menu key is highlighting OFF; if not, press the Output key to toggle itOFF.11 Press the LEVEL key in the ENTRY area.12 Set the LEVEL to 0 dBm using the key pad entry keys.13 Zero power meter. Next connect the power sensor directly to the “RF OUT” port on the R3561LCDMA Test Source Unit.14 Press the Output CRT menu key to toggle Output to ON.15 Record the power meter reading ________________________16 Disconnect the power meter sensor from the R3561L RF OUT jack.NOTEThe Power Meter sensor lower limit is –30 dBm. Thus, only components having losses < 30 dBshould be measured using this method. For best accuracy, always re–zero the power meter beforeconnecting the power sensor to the component being calibrated. Then, after connecting thepower sensor to the component, record the calibrated loss immediately.17 Disconnect all components in the the test setup and calibrate each one separately. Connect eachcomponent one–at–a–time between the “RF OUT” port and the power sensor (see Figure F-13,“Setups A, B, and C”). Record the calibrated loss value displayed on the power meter for eachconnection.Example: (A) 1st Test Cable = –0.5 dB(B) 2nd Test Cable = –1.4 dB(C) 20 dB Attenuator = –20.1 dB(D) 30 dB Directional Coupler = –29.8 dB18 Press the Output CRT menu key to toggle Output OFF.. . . continued on next pageF
Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses – continued F-20 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTTable F-15: Procedure for Calibrating Test Cable Setup Using Advantest R3465Step Action19 Calculate the total test setup loss by adding up all the individual losses:Example: Total test setup loss = 0.5 + 1.4 + 20.1 + 29.8 = 51.8 dBThis calculated value will be used in the next series of tests.20 Press the FREQ key in the ENTRY area.21 Using the keypad entry keys, set the test frequency to the RX frequency.22 Repeat steps 9 through 19 for the RX frequency.23 Refer to Table 3-30 for assistance in manually setting the cable loss values into the LMF. F
Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP F-21DRAFTFigure F-13: Cable Calibration using Advantest R3465POWERSENSOR20 DB / 2 WATTATTENUATOR(A)(C)POWERSENSOR(D)30 DBDIRECTIONALCOUPLER(C)100 WNON–RADIATINGRF LOADPOWERSENSORRF OUTPOWERSENSOR& (B)FW00320F
Test Equipment Calibration F-22 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTAgilent E4406A TransmitterTester Self-alignment(Calibration)Refer to Figure F-14 and follow the procedure in Table F-16 to performthe Agilent E4406A self–alignment (calibration).Figure F-14: Agilent E4406A SystemKeySoftkeyButtonsSoftkey LabelDisplay Areati-CDMA-WP-00080-v01-ildoc-ftwTable F-16: Perform Agilent E4406A Self–alignment (Calibration)Step Action1In the SYSTEM section of the instrument front panel, press the System key.– The softkey labels displayed on the right side of the instrument screen will change.2Press the Alignments softkey button to the right of the instrument screen.– The softkey labels will change.3Press the Align All Now softkey button.– All other instrument functions will be suspended during the alignment.– The display will change to show progress and results of the alignments performed.– The alignment will take less than one minute. HP 437 Power Meter(Calibration)Precise transmit output power calibration measurements are made usinga bolometer–type broadband power meter with a sensitive power sensor.Follow the steps in Table F-17 to enter information unique to the powersensor before calibrating the test setup. Refer to Figure F-15 as required.F
Test Equipment Calibration – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP F-23DRAFTThis procedure must be done before the automatedcalibration to enter power sensor specific calibrationvalues.NOTEFigure F-15: Power Meter DetailCONNECT POWERSENSOR WITH POWERMETER TURNED OFFCONNECT POWER SENSORTO POWER REFERENCEWHEN CALIBRATING UNIT.POWER REFERENCE ISENABLED USING THE SHIFT ’KEYSSHIFT (BLUE) PUSHBUTTON –ACCESSES FUNCTION ANDDATA ENTRY KEYS IDENTIFIEDWITH LIGHT BLUE TEXT ONTHE FRONT PANEL ABOVETHE BUTTONSFW00Table F-17: HP 437 Power Meter Calibration ProcedureStep Action1! CAUTIONDo not connect/disconnect the power meter sensor cable with AC power applied to the meter.Disconnection could result in destruction of the sensing element or mis–calibration.Make sure the power meter AC LINE pushbutton is OFF.2Connect the power sensor cable to the SENSOR input.3Set the AC LINE pushbutton to ON.NOTEThe calibration should be performed only after the power meter and sensor have been allowed towarm–up and stabilize for a minimum of 60 minutes.4Perform the following to set or verify the correct power sensor model:4a – Press [SHIFT] then [a] to select SENSOR.4b – Identify the power sensor model number from the sensor label.4c – Use the [y] or [b] button to select the appropriate model; then press [ENTER].5Refer to the illustration for step 8, and perform the following to ensure the power reference output isOFF:5a – Observe the instrument display and determine if the triangular indicator over PWR REF isdisplayed.5b – If the triangular indicator is displayed, press [SHIFT] then [’] to turn it off.. . . continued on next pageF
Test Equipment Calibration – continued F-24 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTTable F-17: HP 437 Power Meter Calibration ProcedureStep Action6 Press [ZERO].– Display will show “Zeroing ******.”– Wait for process to complete.7Connect the power sensor to the POWER REF output.8Turn on the PWR REF by performing the following:8a – Press [SHIFT] then [’].8b – Verify that the triangular indicator (B) appears in the display above PWR REF as shown below.9Perform the following to set the REF CF%:9a – Press ([SHIFT] then [ZERO]) for CAL.9b – Enter the sensor’s REF CF% from the sensor’s decal using the arrow keys and press [ENTER].(The power meter will display ”CAL *****” for a few seconds.)NOTEIf the REF CAL FACTOR (REF CF) is not shown on the power sensor, assume it to be 100%.10 Perform the following to set the CAL FAC %:10a – Press [SHIFT] then [FREQ] for CAL FAC.10b – On the sensor’s decal, locate an approximate calibration percentage factor (CF%) at the testfrequency.10c – Enter the sensor’s calibration % (CF%) using the arrow keys and press [ENTER].–– When complete, the power meter will typically display 0.05 dBm. (Any reading between0.00 and 0.10 is normal.)11 To turn off the PWR REF, perform the following:11a – Press [SHIFT] then [’].11b – Disconnect the power sensor from the POWER REF output. Gigatronics 8542 power meter(Calibration)Precise transmit output power calibration measurements are made usinga bolometer–type broadband power meter with a sensitive power sensor.Follow the steps in Table F-18 to enter information unique to the powersensor. Refer to Figure F-16 as necessary.F
Test Equipment Calibration – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP F-25DRAFTTable F-18: Calibrate Gigatronics 8542 Power MeterStep Action1! CAUTIONDo not connect/disconnect the power meter sensor cable with AC power applied to the meter.Disconnection could result in destruction of the sensing element or miscalibration.Make sure the power meter POWER pushbutton is OFF.2Connect the power sensor cable to the SENSOR input.3Set the POWER pushbutton to ON.NOTEAllow the power meter and sensor to warm up and stabilize for a minimum of 60 minutes beforeperforming the calibration procedure.4Connect the power sensor to the CALIBRATOR output connector.5 Press ZERO.– Wait for the process to complete. Sensor factory calibration data is read to power meter during thisprocess.6When the zeroing process is complete, disconnect the power sensor from the CALIBRATOR output.Figure F-16: Gigatronics 8541C Power MeterCONNECT POWER SENSORWITH POWER METERTURNED OFFCONNECT POWER SENSOR TOCALIBRATOR POWER REFERENCEWHEN CALIBRATING/ZEROING UNITFRONT View REAR ViewGPIB CONNECTIONAC POWERFW00564F
Test Equipment Calibration – continued F-26 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTNotesF
5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATPDRAFTAppendix G: VSWR Appendix ContentTHIS IS THE GENERAL APPENDIX TOC. USE THIS FOR ALLAPPENDICES EXCEPT APPENDIX A.Guide Book 1–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Document Overview 1–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What Is In This Guide? 1–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Book Catalogs and Organization 1–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Book Directory 1–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Catalogs 1–5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Physical Page Layouts 1–6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A/A4 Page and Margin Sizes 1–6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A/A4 Page Text Area 1–7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A/A4 Page Components 1–9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frame and Table Components 1–10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frames With Tools 1–10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flow Charts and Block Diagrams 1–10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line Drawings 1–11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table Types In This Template 1–12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Item/Description Table 1–12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Step Table 1–13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Step/Check Table 1–14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Component Descriptions 1–15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conclusions 1–16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Map Title Goes Here lkjsfdg Sfdkgj Msfd N lkas K lkjsdfl kB lkj fgcb 1–17. . . . . . Block Label Goes Here 1–17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Label Goes Here 1–17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Label Goes Here 1–18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Label Goes Here 1–19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Map Title Goes Here 1–22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G
Table of Contents – continued1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTNotesG
Transmit & Receive Antenna VSWR5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP G-1DRAFTPurposeThe following procedures will verify that the Voltage Standing WaveRatio (VSWR) of all antennas and associated feed lines fall withinacceptable limits. The tests will be performed on all antennas in asequential manner (i.e., ANT 1, then ANT 2) until all antennas/feedlineshave been verified.These procedures should be performed periodically by measuring eachrespective antenna’s VSWR (reflected power) to verify that the antennasystem is within acceptable limits. This will ensure continued peaksystem performance.The antenna VSWR will be calculated at the CDMA carrier frequencyassigned to each antenna. Record and verify that they meet the testspecification of less than or equal to 1.5:1.Motorola recommends that the installer be familiar withthe following procedure in its entirety before beginning theactual procedure. Ensure that the entire site is currently notin service.This test is used to test RX antennas by substituting RXfrequencies for TX frequencies.NOTEStudy the site engineering documents and perform the following testsonly after first verifying that the RF cabling configuration required tointerconnect the BTS frames and antennas meet requirements called outin the BTS Installation Manual.Test equipmentThe following pieces of test equipment will be required to perform thistest:SLMFSDirectional couplerSCommunications test setPrior to performing antenna tests, insure that no CDMABBX channels are keyed. Failure to do so could result inpersonal injury or serious equipment damage.WARNINGEquipment Setup – HP Test SetFollow the procedure in Table G-1 to set up test equipment required tomeasure and calculate the VSWR for each antenna.G
Transmit & Receive Antenna VSWR – continued G-2 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTTable G-1: VSWR Measurement Procedure – HP Test SetStep Action HP TEST SET1For manual VSWR testing, using external directional coupler, refer to Figure G-1.– Connect the communications test set RF IN/OUT port to the INPUT port of the directionalcoupler.– Connect the ANT IN port of the communication test set to the reverse (RVS) port on thedirectional coupler. Terminate the forward port with a 50 ohm load.– Install the antenna feed line to the output port on the directional coupler.NOTEManual Communications Analyzer test setup (fields not indicated remain at default):SSet screen to RF GEN.– Set the RF Gen Freq to center frequency of actual CDMA carrier between 869–894 MHz forTX and 824–849 MHz for RX.– Set Amplitude to –30 dBm.– Set Output Port to RF OUT.– Set AFGen1 & AFGen2 to OFF.2Remove the antenna feed line and install an “RF short” onto the directional coupler output port.NOTESet–up communication test set as follows (fields not indicated remain at default):SSet screen to SPEC ANL.– Under Controls, set input port to ANT.–Set Ref Level to –40 dBm.– Under Controls, select Main, select Auxiliary.– Under Controls, select AV G . Set Avg = 20.3– Record the reference level on the communications analyzer and Note as PS for reference. – Replace the short with the antenna feedline. Record the reference level on the communicationsanalyzer and Note for as PA reference.– Record the difference of the two readings in dB.4Calculate the VSWR per the equation shown to the right.Where:RL(dB) =PA(dBm) – PS(dBm) PA = Power reflected from antennaPS = Power reflected from shortA calculated value of –13.98 dB equates to VSWR of better than 1.5:1.VSWR +ȧȧȡȢ1)10RL201–10RL20ȧȧȣȤ5If the readings indicate a potential problem, verify the physical integrity of all cables (including anyin–line components, pads, etc.) and associated connections up to the antenna. If problem still persists,consult antenna OEM documentation for additional performance verification tests or replacementinformation.. . . continued on next pageG
Transmit & Receive Antenna VSWR – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP G-3DRAFTTable G-1: VSWR Measurement Procedure – HP Test SetStep HP TEST SETAction6Repeat steps 1 through 5 for all remaining TX sectors/antennas.7Repeat steps 1 through 5 for all remaining RX sectors/antennas. Figure G-1: Manual VSWR Test Setup Using HP8921 Test SetFWD (INCIDENT)PORT 50–OHMTERMINATED LOADRVS(REFLECTED)PORTFEED LINE TOANTENNAUNDER TESTRF SHORT30 DBDIRECTIONALCOUPLER OUTPUTPORTINPUTPORTFW00343Equipment Setup – AdvantestTest SetFollow the procedure in Table G-2 to set up test equipment required tomeasure and calculate the VSWR for each antenna.Table G-2: VSWR Measurement Procedure – Advantest Test SetStep Action ADVANTEST1If you have not already done so, refer to the procedure in Table 3-5 on page 3-15 to set up testequipment and interface the LMF computer to the BTS.2For manual VSWR testing using external directional coupler, refer to Figure G-2.– Connect the communications test set RF OUT port to the input port of the directional coupler.– Connect the INPUT port of the communication test set to the forward port on the directionalcoupler. Terminate the forward port with a 50 Ohm load.– Connect the RF short to the directional coupler output port.. . . continued on next pageG
Transmit & Receive Antenna VSWR – continued G-4 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTTable G-2: VSWR Measurement Procedure – Advantest Test SetStep ADVANTESTAction3Preform the following to instruct the calibrated test set to generate a CDMA RF carrier (RVL call)with all zero longcode at the assigned RX frequency at –10 dBm:SPush the ADVANCE Measurement key.SPush the CDMA Sig CRT menu key.SPush the FREQ Entry key:– Set RF Gen Freq to center frequency of actual CDMA carrier between 869–894 MHz for TXand 824–849 MHz for RX.SPush the LEVEL Entry key; set to 0 dBm (by entering 0 and pushing the –dBm key).SVerify that ON is active in the Output CRT menu key.SVerify that OFF is active in the Mod CRT menu key.SPush the CW Measurement key.SPush the FREQ Entry key.– Push the more 1/2 CRT menu key.– Set Preselect CRT menu key to 3.0G.SPush the Transient Measurement key.– Push the Tx Power CRT menu key.– Push the LEVEL entry key (set to 7 dBm by entering 7 and pushing the the dBm key).– Set Avg Times CRT menu key to ON. Set to 20 (by entering 20 and pushing the Hz ENTERkey).SPush the REPEAT Start key to take the measurement.4Record the Burst Power display on the communications analyzer and Note as PS for reference.5Install the antenna feedline to the output port of the directional coupler.6SPush the Auto Level Set CRT menu key.SPush the REPEAT Start key to take the measurement.7Record the Burst Power on the communications analyzer and Note as PA level for reference.Record the difference of the two readings in dBm.8Calculate the VSWR per the equation shown to the right.Where:RL(dB) =PA(dBm) – PS(dBm) PA = Power reflected from antennaPS = Power reflected from shortA calculated value of –13.98 dB equates to VSWR of better than 1.5:1.VSWR +ȧȧȡȢ1)10RL201–10RL20ȧȧȣȤ9If the readings indicate a potential problem, verify the physical integrity of all cables (including anyin–line components, pads, etc.) and associated connections up to the antenna. If problem still persists,consult antenna OEM documentation for additional performance verification tests or replacementinformation.. . . continued on next pageG
Transmit & Receive Antenna VSWR – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP G-5DRAFTTable G-2: VSWR Measurement Procedure – Advantest Test SetStep ADVANTESTAction10 Repeat steps 2 through 9 for all remaining TX sectors/antennas.11 Repeat steps 2 through 9 for all remaining RX sectors/antennas. Figure G-2: Manual VSWR Test Setup Using Advantest R3465RVS(REFLECTED)PORTFEED LINE TOANTENNAUNDER TESTRF SHORT30 DBDIRECTIONALCOUPLEROUTPUTPORTFWD (INCIDENT)PORT 50–OHMTERMINATED LOADINPUTPORTRF OUTRF INFW00332G
Transmit & Receive Antenna VSWR – continued G-6 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTNotesG
5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATPDRAFTAppendix H: Download ROM Code Appendix ContentTHIS IS THE GENERAL APPENDIX TOC. USE THIS FOR ALLAPPENDICES EXCEPT APPENDIX A.Guide Book 1–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Document Overview 1–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What Is In This Guide? 1–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Book Catalogs and Organization 1–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Book Directory 1–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Catalogs 1–5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Physical Page Layouts 1–6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A/A4 Page and Margin Sizes 1–6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A/A4 Page Text Area 1–7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A/A4 Page Components 1–9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frame and Table Components 1–10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frames With Tools 1–10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flow Charts and Block Diagrams 1–10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line Drawings 1–11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table Types In This Template 1–12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Item/Description Table 1–12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Step Table 1–13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Step/Check Table 1–14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Component Descriptions 1–15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conclusions 1–16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Map Title Goes Here lkjsfdg Sfdkgj Msfd N lkas K lkjsdfl kB lkj fgcb 1–17. . . . . . Block Label Goes Here 1–17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Label Goes Here 1–17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Label Goes Here 1–18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Label Goes Here 1–19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Map Title Goes Here 1–22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H
Table of Contents – continued1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTNotesH
Download ROM Code5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP H-1DRAFTDownload ROM CodeROM code can be downloaded to a device that is in any state. After thedownload is started, the device being downloaded changes toOOS_ROM (blue) and remains OOS_ROM (blue). The same R–levelRAM code must then be downloaded to the device. This procedureincludes steps for both the ROM code download and the RAM codedownload.ROM code files cannot be selected automatically. The ROM code filemust be selected manually. Follow the procedure in Table H-1 todownload ROM code.PrerequisiteSROM and RAM code files exist for the device to be downloaded.The R–level of the ROM code to be downloaded must bethe same as the R–level of the ROM code for other devicesin the BTS. Code must not be mixed in a BTS. Thisprocedure should only be used to upgrade replacementdevices for a BTS and it should not be used to upgrade alldevices in a BTS. If a BTS is to be upgraded from oneR–level to another, the optimization and ATP proceduresmust first be performed with the BTS in the originalconfiguration. The upgrade should then be done by theCBSC.CAUTIONTable H-1: Download ROM CodeStep Action1Click on the device to be downloaded.NOTEMore than one device of the same type can be selected for download by either clicking on each one tobe downloaded or from the BTS menu bar Select pull–down menu, select the device item that applies.Where: device = the type of device to be loaded (BBX, CSM, GLI, MCC)2Click on the Device menu.3Click on the Status menu item.A status report window appears.4Make a note of the number in the HW Bin Type column.NOTE“HW Bin Type” is the Hardware Binary Type for the device. This code is used as the last four digits inthe filename of a device’s binary ROM code file. Using this part of the filename, the ROM code filecan be matched to the device in which it is to be loaded.. . . continued on next pageH
Download ROM Code – continued H-2 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTTable H-1: Download ROM CodeStep Action5Click on the OK button to dismiss the status report window.NOTEROM code is automatically selected for download from the <x>:\<lmf homedirectory>\version folder>\<code folder> specified by the NextLoad property inthe bts–#.cdf file. To check the value of the NextLoad property, click onUtil>Examine>Display Nextload. A pop–up message will show the value of the NextLoad.6Click on the Download Code Manual menu item.A file selection window appears.7Double–click on the version folder that contains the desired ROM code file.8Double–click on the Code folder.A list of ROM and RAM code files is displayed.! CAUTIONA ROM code file having the correct hardware binary type (HW Bin Type) needs to be chosen. Thehardware binary type (last four digits in the file name) was determined in step 4. Unpredictable resultscan happen and the device may be damaged (may have to be replaced) if a ROM code file with wrongbinary type is downloaded.9Choose a ROM code file having the correct hardware binary type (HW Bin Type).The hardware binary type (last four digits in the file name) was determined in step 4.10 Click on the ROM code file that matches the device type and HW Bin Type (e.g., bbx_rom.bin.0604for a BBX having a HW Bin Type of 0604).The file should be highlighted.11 Click on the Load button.A status report window displays the result of the download.NOTEIf the ROM load failed for some devices, load them individually by clicking on one device, performsteps 6 through 11 for it, and repeat the process for each remaining device.12 Click on the Ok button to close the status report window.13 Click on the Util menu.14 Select the Tools menu item.15 Click on the Update NextLoad>CDMA menu item.16 Select the version number of the folder that was used for the ROM code download.17 Click on the Save button.A pop–up message indicates that the CDF file has been updated.18 Click on the OK button to dismiss the pop–up message.19 Click on the device that was downloaded with ROM code.20 Click on the Device menu.. . . continued on next pageH
Download ROM Code – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP H-3DRAFTTable H-1: Download ROM CodeStep Action21 Click on the Download Code menu item to download RAM code.A status report window displays the result of the download.NOTEData is automatically downloaded to GLI devices when the RAM code is downloaded. Use theDownload Data procedure to download data to other device types after they have been upgraded.22 Click on the Ok button to close the status report window.The downloaded device should be OOS_RAM (yellow) unless it is a GLI in which case it should beINS (green).23 Click on the device that was downloaded.24 Click on the Device menu.25 Click on the Status menu item.Verify that the status report window displays the correct ROM and RAM version numbers.26 Click on the Ok button to close the status report window. H
Download ROM Code – continued H-4 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTNotesH
5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATPDRAFTAppendix I: Packet Backhaul Configuration Appendix ContentTHIS IS THE GENERAL APPENDIX TOC. USE THIS FOR ALLAPPENDICES EXCEPT APPENDIX A.Guide Book 1–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Document Overview 1–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What Is In This Guide? 1–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Book Catalogs and Organization 1–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Book Directory 1–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Catalogs 1–5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Physical Page Layouts 1–6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A/A4 Page and Margin Sizes 1–6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A/A4 Page Text Area 1–7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A/A4 Page Components 1–9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frame and Table Components 1–10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frames With Tools 1–10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flow Charts and Block Diagrams 1–10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line Drawings 1–11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table Types In This Template 1–12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Item/Description Table 1–12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Step Table 1–13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Step/Check Table 1–14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Component Descriptions 1–15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conclusions 1–16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Map Title Goes Here lkjsfdg Sfdkgj Msfd N lkas K lkjsdfl kB lkj fgcb 1–17. . . . . . Block Label Goes Here 1–17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Label Goes Here 1–17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Label Goes Here 1–18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Label Goes Here 1–19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Map Title Goes Here 1–22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I
Table of Contents – continued1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTNotesI
BTS Router Initial Configuration5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP I-1DRAFTOverviewThis appendix contains information and operations related to loading anMWR 1900 or MWR 1941 BTS router with the minimum standard(canned) configuration necessary for network communications. Once therouter is communicating on the network, the full, site–specific,operational configuration can be downloaded to the router over thenetwork. This appendix includes sections on:SSetting up communications with a router using a MicrosoftrWindowsr–based computerSDownloading BTS router canned configuration files from the OMC–RSTransferring the canned configuration files from the Windows–basedcomputer to the BTS routerSVerifying and replacing/upgrading the IOS version loaded on the CFmemory cardSVerifying and, if necessary, replacing/upgrading the ROM monitorlow–level operating system version loaded in the BTS routerSRecovery from BTS router initialization with the ROM monitorlow–level operating system and troubleshooting to locate and correctthe causeSChanging the router FE interface IP addressesSSample listings of the BTS router canned configuration filesI
Terminal Set Up I-2 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTCreating a Terminal SessionGeneral – This section provides the procedures to configure and save aterminal session for communicating with the MWR 1900 BTS router.Terminal settings are the same as those used for BTS card and moduleMan–Machine Interface (MMI) communication sessions. The proceduresare for a Pentiumr processor–based computer operating with eitherWindows 98 Second Edition (SE) or Windows 2000.Using the LMF computer – LMF computer platforms can be used forcommunicating with the routers, and the MMI terminal connectioncreated for BTS card/module optimization actions will operate with theBTS routers. See the “Establishing a BTS Router CommunicationSession” section of this appendix for additional interface hardwarerequired for BTS router communication.Terminal SettingsFollow the procedure in Table I-1 to create a named HyperTerminalconnection for BTS router interface and generate a Windows desktopshortcut for it.There are differences between Windows 2000 and Windows98 in the menus and screens used for creating aHyperTerminal connection. In the following procedure,items applicable to:SWindows 2000 will be identified with Win2000SWindows 98 will be identified with Win98NOTETable I-1: Establish HyperTerminal ConnectionStep Action1From the Windows Start menu, select:Programs > Accessories2Perform one of the following:SFor Win2000, select Hyperterminal and then click on HyperTerminalSFor Win98, select Communications, double click the Hyperterminal folder, and then double clickon the Hypertrm.exe icon in the window which opens.NOTESIf a Location Information Window appears, enter the required information, then click on theClose button. (This is required the first time a HyperTerminal connection is configured, even if amodem is not to be used.)SIf a You need to install a modem..... message appears, click on NO.. . . continued on next pageI
Terminal Set Up – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP I-3DRAFTTable I-1: Establish HyperTerminal ConnectionStep Action3When the Connection Description box opens:– Type a name for the connection being defined (for example, BTSRTR Session, MMI) in theName: window,– Highlight any icon preferred for the named connection in the Icon: chooser window, and– Click OK.4From the Connect using: pick list in the Connect To box displayed, select the RS–232 port to beused for the connection (e.g., COM1 or COM2 – Win2000 or Direct to Com 1 or Direct to Com 2 –Win98), and click OK.5In the Port Settings tab of the COM# Properties window displayed, configure the RS–232 portsettings as follows:SBits per second: 9600SData bits: 8SParity: NoneSStop bits: 1SFlow control: None6 Click OK.7With the HyperTerminal window still open and the connection running, select:File > Properties8Click the Settings tab, click the arrow in the Emulation window, and select VT100 from thedropdown list.9Click the ASCII Setup button, uncheck all boxes in the ASCII Setup window which appears, andclick OK.10 Click OK for the connection Properties box.11 Save the defined connection by selecting:File > Save12 Close the HyperTerminal window by selecting:File > Exit13 Click the Yes button to disconnect when prompted.14 Perform one of the following:SIf the Hyperterminal folder window is still open (Win98), proceed to step 16, orSFrom the Windows Start menu, select Programs > Accessories15 Perform one of the following:SFor Win2000, select Hyperterminal and release any pressed mouse buttons.SFor Win98, select Communications and double click the Hyperterminal folder.. . . continued on next pageI
Terminal Set Up – continued I-4 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTTable I-1: Establish HyperTerminal ConnectionStep Action16 Highlight the newly–created connection icon by moving the cursor over it (Win2000) or clicking on it(Win98).17 Right click and drag the highlighted connection icon to the Windows desktop and release the rightmouse button.18 From the popup menu displayed, select Create Shortcut(s) Here.19 If desired, reposition the shortcut icon for the new connection by dragging it to another location on theWindows desktop.NOTEThe shortcut icon can now be double–clicked to open a BTS router or BTS card/module MMIHyperTerminal session without the need to negotiate multiple menu levels. I
Establishing a BTS Router Communication Session5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP I-5DRAFTBTS Router SerialCommunicationFor those procedures which require serial communication with BTSrouters, follow the procedures in Table I-2 to initiate the communicationsession. This procedure calls out the LMF computer platform, but anyVT100–equivalent terminal or computer equipped with terminalemulation software and a hardware serial connector may be used.Required ItemsThe following items are required to perform the verification:SLMF computer platform or equivalent (see 1X SC4812T BTSOptimization/ATP; 68P09260A62 for requirements)SEight–conductor (four–pair, unshielded twisted pair is acceptable)rollover cable, two 8–contact modular plugs (see Figure I-1 for cablewiring requirements)SAdapter, DB–9 plug–to–8–contact modular plug, Global ComputerSupplies C4717 or equivalent (see Figure I-2 for adapter wiringrequirements)Figure I-1: Wiring Diagram, BTS Router Communication Rollover Cable8–contact PlugContact Numbering(Insertion End)1234567812345678123456788–contactModularPlug8–contactModularPlugLockingClipI
Establishing a BTS Router Communication Session – continued I-6 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTFigure I-2: Wiring Diagram, DB–9 Plug–to–8–contact Modular Plug AdapterAdapterDB–9 Receptacle Socket Numbering(Mating Side)Adapter8–contact ReceptacleContact Numbering(Mating Side)1234567891234567812345678912345678NCNCDB–9Receptacle8–contactModularReceptacleTable I-2: Establishing BTS Router Serial CommunicationStep Action1If it has not been done, start the computer and allow it to complete boot–up.2If a named HyperTerminal connection for BTS router serial communication or BTS card/module MMIcommunication has not been created on the LMF computer, create one as described in Table I-1 in the“Terminal Set–up” section of this appendix.3Connect the computer to the BTS router as shown in Figure I-3.4Start the named HyperTerminal connection for BTS router communication sessions by double clickingon its Windows desktop shortcut.NOTEIf a Windows desktop shortcut was not created for the communication session, access the connectionfrom the Windows Start menu by selecting:Programs > Accessories > Hyperterminal > HyperTerminal > <Named HyperTerminalConnection (for example, BTSRTR)>5Once the connection window opens, establish communication with the BTS router by pressing thecomputer Enter key until the prompt identified in the applicable procedure is obtained. I
Establishing a BTS Router Communication Session – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP I-7DRAFTTo BTS routerCONSOLEreceptacleCOM1ORCOM2LMF COMPUTEROR EQUIVALENTFigure I-3: LMF Computer Connections to BTS RouterOPTOATP0001–0ROLLOVERCABLEDB9–TO–RJ48CADAPTERI
Download Canned Configuration Files from the OMC–R I-8 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTObtaining BTS RouterMinimum (Canned)Configuration FilesAfter they are generated on the OMC–R, the BTS router cannedconfiguration files must be transfered to another computer platform fromwhich they can be installed into the BTS routers. A number ofprocedures may be used to move the canned configuration files from theOMC–R to a platform from which they can be loaded into the routers.Some alternatives are:1. If a floppy diskette drive is available at the OMC–R, such as the onefor UNO workstations, the configuration files can be transferred toan LMF computer or similar machine using the CDF file transferprocedure in the Preparing the LMF section of 1X SC4812T BTSOptimization/ATP; 68P09260A62. Directories identified in Table I-3must be used rather than those in the CDF file transfer procedure.2. If a Windows–based server connection is available in the operator’snetwork and it can provide an FTP or telnet connection to theOMC–R, files may be transferred by either the FTP or telnetmethods.3. If a dial–up connection is available for accessing the OMC–R, anFTP or telnet session may be possible to transfer files to thecomputer used to load the CF memory cards.The procedure provided in this section covers FTP transfer using aWindows–based server in the operator’s network. Coordinate with thelocal network administrator to determine the method and procedure touse on a specific network.PrerequisitesThe following must be obtained from the local network administratorbefore performing the canned configuration file FTP procedure inTable I-3:SUser ID and password to log onto the OMC–RSName of the sub–directory where the specific BTS router groupcanned configuration files to be downloaded were createdFTP File Transfer from theOMC–RThis procedure uses the Windows–based LMF computer platform todownload BTS router canned configuration files from the OMC–R.Follow the procedure in Table I-3.I
Download Canned Configuration Files from the OMC–R – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP I-9DRAFTTable I-3: BTS Router Canned Configuration File FTP Transfer from the OMC–RStep Action1If it has not been done, create a directory on the LMF computer where the BTS router cannedconfiguration files will be stored.2If it has not been done, obtain the OMC–R logon user ID and password from the local networkadministrator.3Connect the LMF computer to the local network and log on.4NOTEThis procedure uses the command line FTP client supplied with Windows 98, Second Edition (Win98SE) and Windows 2000 (Win2K); however, any commercially available FTP client application can beused. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for operation of an alternative application.Open a command line (MS DOS) window by clicking on Start > Programs > Command Prompt.5When the command line window opens, change to the directory where the canned configuration fileswill be stored on the LMF computer by entering:cd pathnameWhere pathname = the path to the required directoryA response similar to the following will be displayed:C:\> cd Can_CfgC:\Can_Cfg>6Check the contents of the directory by entering the following:dirA response similar to the following will be displayed:C:\Can_Cfg>dir Volume in drive C is MAIN Volume Serial Number is F2AA–1721 Directory of C:\Can_Cfg>08/22/2002 03:46p <DIR> .08/22/2002 03:46p <DIR> ..08/22/2002 03:46p 2,223 btsrtr_canned.blue08/22/2002 03:47p 2,223 btsrtr_canned.red 2 File(s) 4,644 bytes 2 Dir(s) 2,556,045,312 bytes freeC:\Can_Cfg>. . . continued on next pageI
Download Canned Configuration Files from the OMC–R – continued I-10 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTTable I-3: BTS Router Canned Configuration File FTP Transfer from the OMC–RStep Action7If either or both of the following files are found in the directory, delete them or move them to anotherdirectory:Sbtsrtr_config.blueSbtsrtr_config.red8Begin the FTP session by entering the following:ftp hostnameWhere hostname = the OMC–R hostname or IP addressA response similar to the following will be displayed:C:\Can_Cfg> ftp OMCR–1C:\Can_Cfg>Connected to OMCR–1.220 OMCR–1 FTP server (SunOS 5.6) ready.User (OMCR–1:(none)):9Enter the User ID and password when prompted, pressing the Enter key after each.A response similar to the following will be displayed:User (OMCR–1:(none)): scadm331 Password required for scadm.Password:230 User scadm logged in.ftp>10 Change to the directory where the BTS router canned configuration file sub–directories are created andverify the present working directory by entering the following, pressing the Enter key after each:cd /home/scadm/btsrtr_canned_configspwdA response similar to the following will be displayed:ftp> cd /home/scadm/btsrtr_canned_configs240 CWD command successful.ftp> pwd245 ”/home/scadm/btsrtr_canned_configs” is current directory.. . . continued on next pageI
Download Canned Configuration Files from the OMC–R – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP I-11DRAFTTable I-3: BTS Router Canned Configuration File FTP Transfer from the OMC–RStep Action11 Enter the following to list the contents of the directory and be sure the specific canned configurationdirectory name provided by the administrator exists:lsA response similar to the following will be displayed:ftp> ls200 PORT command successful.150 ASCII data connection for /bin/ls (10.182.29.117,80) (0 bytes).Mon_Jul_2_01:55:07_CDT_2002Wed_Jul_24_09:35:41_CDT_2002Tue_Aug_04_10:35:22_CDT_2002226 ASCII Transfer complete.ftp: 30 bytes received in 0.02Seconds 1.50Kbytes/sec.ftp>NOTEDirectory names where canned configuration files are located will consist of theweekday_month_day_time_year when the canned configuration files were created on the OMC–R.12 Change to the directory specified for the BTS router group to be configured and list the directorycontents by entering the following, pressing the Enter key after each command:cd weekday_month_day_time_yearlsA response similar to the following will be displayed:ftp> cd Wed_Jul_24_09:35:41_CDT_2002250 CWD command successful.ftp> ls200 PORT command successful.150 ASCII data connection for /bin/ls (10.182.29.117,80) (0 bytes).btsrtr_canned.bluebtsrtr_canned.red226 ASCII Transfer complete.ftp: 39 bytes received in 0.05Seconds 0.78Kbytes/sec.ftp>. . . continued on next pageI
Download Canned Configuration Files from the OMC–R – continued I-12 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTTable I-3: BTS Router Canned Configuration File FTP Transfer from the OMC–RStep Action13 Change to the binary transfer mode and, if desired, turn on hash mark printing for transfer progress byentering the following, pressing the Enter key after each command:binhashA response similar to the following will be displayed:ftp> bin200 Type set to I.ftp> hashHash mark printing On ftp: (2048 bytes/hash mark) .ftp>NOTEWith Win98 SE, turning on hash mark printing can slow down file transfer in certain circumstances,but the canned configuration files are quite small (approximately 2.5 KB) so there should be littlenoticeable effect.14 Download the BTS router canned configuration files to the LMF computer by performing the follow-ing:14a – Enter the following to download the first canned configuration file:get btsrtr_canned.blueA response similar to the following will be displayed:ftp> get btsrtr_canned.blue200 PORT command successful.150 Binary data connection for btsrtr_canned.blue (10.182.29.117,80)(2223 bytes).#226 Binary Transfer complete.ftp: 2223 bytes received in 0.59Seconds 3.76Kbytes/sec.ftp>. . . continued on next pageI
Download Canned Configuration Files from the OMC–R – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP I-13DRAFTTable I-3: BTS Router Canned Configuration File FTP Transfer from the OMC–RStep Action14b – Enter the following to download the second BTS router canned configuration file:get btsrtr_canned.redA response similar to the following will be displayed:ftp> get btsrtr_canned.red200 PORT command successful.150 Binary data connection for btsrtr_canned.red (10.182.29.117,80) (2223bytes).#226 Binary Transfer complete.ftp: 2223 bytes received in 0.59Seconds 3.76Kbytes/sec.ftp>15 Before terminating the FTP session, open Windows Explorer and view the contents of the directorywhere the canned configuration files are to be stored to be sure the files are present. Perform thefollowing:15a – Click Start > Programs > Windows Explorer.15b – In the left–hand pane of Windows Explorer, perform one of the following depending on the LMFcomputer operating system:–– Win98 SE: If necessary, expand the directory display for the drive where the canned configu-ration file storage directory is located by clicking on the + next to the drive icon.–– Win2K: Expand the user profile and directory display for the drive where the canned configu-ration file storage directory is located by clicking on the + next to each icon, respectively.15c – Expand any sub–directories as required to display the directory folder where the cannedconfiguration files are to be stored.15d – Click on the directory folder icon where the canned configuration files are to be stored.15e – In the right–hand pane, verify that the files btsrtr_canned.blue and btsrtr_canned.redappear.15f – If the files appear, proceed to step 16.15g – If the files do not appear, repeat step 14, its sub–steps, step 15 and its sub–steps.16 Close Windows Explorer, and, in the command line window, enter the following to terminate the FTPsession:byeA response similar to the following will be displayed:ftp> bye221 Goodbye.C:\Can_Cfg>. . . continued on next pageI
Download Canned Configuration Files from the OMC–R – continued I-14 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTTable I-3: BTS Router Canned Configuration File FTP Transfer from the OMC–RStep Action17 Close the command line window by entering the following:exit18 BTS router canned configuration files are now ready for transfer to a BTS router. I
Verify IOS Version and Install Canned Configuration5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP I-15DRAFTIntroductionOverviewThis section covers the procedures and commands required to verify theIOS version loaded on BTS router CF memory cards and copy standardcanned configuration files to the routers. Because of the set–up requiredand the length of some of the procedures, Motorola recommendsperforming the actions covered in this section at a central location toprepare the BTS routers for installation prior to the site visit.IOS Version Verification and File Sequence PositionVersion verification – The IOS version loaded on the BTS router CFmemory card should be verified as the version required for operation onthe network where the routers will be installed. If the loaded IOS versionis not correct, it can be replaced with a different version. There areseveral methods available to accomplish version verification. Thesedepend on the equipment and software applications the user selects touse in installing the canned configuration files in the BTS routers.Appropriate verification procedures are included in each of the twocanned configuration installation methods covered in this section.Methods to change or upgrade the loaded IOS version are provided inthe Change or Upgrade BTS Router IOS Version section of this appendixand are referenced at the appropriate places in the canned configurationinstallation methods.File sequence position – During initialization, the MWR 1900 or MWR1941 router will first search the startup–config file for a boot systemcommand line telling it in what directory and file to find the boot loader.If this line is not found, the router will default to attempting to boot fromthe first file in its flash memory. Flash memory for the MWR 1900 orMWR 1941 is the CF memory card (software identifier slot0:). Thecanned configuration files used for BTS router installation do notcontain a boot system command line because of the need to maintainflexibility for IOS version changes. Because of this, it is critical that theIOS file is the first file listed on the CF memory card. The cannedconfiguration installation procedures contain steps to assure that this isthe case, and, if it is not, provide guidance to correct the condition. It isimportant to remember that, if the router boots and displays a rommon 1> prompt, the IOS file is missing, out of sequence, has a corrupted flashmemory image or the startup–config file contains a boot system linewhich specifies a missing or incorrect IOS pathname/filename.Canned Configuration File InstallationFilename and installation location requirements – The cannedconfiguration files for the BTS routers must be copied to the CF memorycard. The filename of the file on the CF memory card must becanned–config. Canned configuration file location and filenameI
Verify IOS Version and Install Canned Configuration – continued I-16 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTrequirements are a result of Mobile Wireless Center (MWC) actionsduring the process of switching a BTS from packet to circuit mode orduring BTS re–parenting to another OMC–R. In this process, the MWCwill query the BTS routers’ slot0: directory for a file namedcanned–config. A missing or mis–named file will cause problemswith execution of the mode–switching process.Installation Method – The startup–config configuration file usedby the BTS router during initialization is stored in NVRAM. This is amemory device internal to the router and is separate from the CFmemory card. To install the canned configuration file so the router willuse it during boot–up, the file must be copied into thestartup–config file in NVRAM. This requires copying the cannedconfiguration file from the Windows–based LMF computer to the CFmemory card installed in a router, and then copying it to thestartup–config file in the router’s NVRAM. The onlyMotorola–supported method to copy files to the BTS router CF memorycard is through tftp file transfer.Motorola does not support using a CF memory card readerto copy files to the BTS router CF memory card. Do notuse a CF memory card reader for either of the followingactions:SFormatting a BTS router CF memory cardSCopying files to a BTS router CF memory cardCAUTIONDo not format BTS router CF memory cards using a CFmemory card reader. Only format CF memory cards in aBTS router. Using a card reader to format the CF memorycard will result in improper BTS router initialization whichrequires special recovery procedures.CAUTIONUsing a TFTP Server to CopyFiles to CF Memory CardRequired Equipment and SoftwareThe following items are required to perform this procedure:SA Windows–based computer which meets the requirements of theLMF computer platform as specified in 1X SC4812T BTSOptimization/ATP; 68P09260A62 original design frame, or 1XSC4812T–CLPA BTS Optimization/ATP; 68P64115A06 for updateddesign frames.SOne of the following operating systems for the Windows–basedcomputer:I
Verify IOS Version and Install Canned Configuration – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP I-17DRAFT–Windows 2000–Windows 98 Second Edition (SE) using the FAT32 file systemBTS router CF memory cards loaded using computersequipped with Windows 98 versions earlier than Windows98 SE and using the FAT16 file system will not operateproperly, resulting in a complete site outage.CAUTIONSOne of the following for the Windows–based computer:– Internal 10/100baseT Network Interface Card (NIC)– PCMCIA 10/100baseT NICSCable, rollover, as described in the Establishing a BTS RouterCommunication Session section of this AppendixSDB–9 plug–to–8–contact modular plug adapter as described in theEstablishing a BTS Router Communication Session section of thisAppendixSCable, Ethernet crossover, Category 5E or better, unshielded twistedpair, two 8–contact modular plugs, in one of the following lengths, asdetermined necessary:– 0.3 m (11.8 in) (Motorola pn 3088643C07)– 0.6 m (23.6 in)(Motorola pn 3088643C13)– 1.0 m (39.4 in) (Motorola pn 3088643C15)– 2.1 m (84 in) (Motorola pn 3088643C08)– 3.0 m (120 in) (Motorola pn 3088643C09)SA +27 Vdc power supply to power the BTS router duringconfiguration file operationsSA tftp server software application (refer to the Setting Up the TFTPServer – Procedure in Cellular System Administration – CDMAOnLine Documentation, 68P09259A20) such as:– Cisco tftp server– PumpKIN tftp server– Any other equivalent tftp server applicationSA copy of the MWR 1900 or MWR 1941 router IOS version requiredfor the network where the routers are to be installed (contact thenetwork administrator or the Motorola account team for informationon obtaining the required MWR 1900 or MWR 1941 IOS version)Required MaterialsThe following material is required to perform this method:SMarking material to identify the BTS router and CF memory card withthe installed configuration (blue or red)Required PublicationsThe following publications are required to perform procedures in thissection:I
Verify IOS Version and Install Canned Configuration – continued I-18 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTS1X SC4812T BTS Optimization/ATP; 68P09260A62 original framedesign or 1X SC4812T–CLPA BTS Optimization/ATP; 68P64115A06for updated design framesSCellular System Administration – CDMA OnLine Documentation,68P09259A20SMWR1900 Wireless Mobile Edge Router Software ConfigurationGuide; part number 78–13983–01Preparation for Canned Configuration File TFTP Transfer to CFMemory CardPreparation for a canned configuration file tftp transfer consists of thefollowing activities:1. Determining the speed of the LMF computer NIC (10 or 100 MHz)2. Setting the LMF computer NIC IP address3. Creating a directory (folder) on the LMF computer to be used for alltftp file transfers4. Installing the tftp server application on the LMF computer, andsetting the tftp server application root directory to the directorycreated in 2, above5. Connecting the LMF computer to the BTS router for bothHyperTerminal (serial) and Ethernet communication6. BTS router power–up and initial configuration for EthernetcommunicationThe following procedures are used to accomplish all of these preparatoryactions.Set LMF computer NIC TCP/IP address and create the defaultTFTP directory – Follow the procedure in Table I-4 to set the NIC IPaddress.If the IP address for the LAN connection on an LMFcomputer is being changed to support tftp downloads to aBTS router, the BTS 10base–2 LAN IP address and subnetmask for the NIC must be restored before the LMF can loginto a BTS to perform an optimization or ATP.IMPORTANT*There are differences between Windows 2000 and Windows98 in the menus and screens used for setting or changing aNIC connection. In the following procedure, itemsapplicable to:SWindows 2000 will be identified with Win2000SWindows 98 will be identified with Win98NOTEI
Verify IOS Version and Install Canned Configuration – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP I-19DRAFTTable I-4: Determine LMF Computer NIC Speed, Set NIC IP Address, and Create a Default TFTP DirectoryStep Action1If it is not known, determine and record the speed of the LMF computer NIC (10 or 100 MHz) for use instep 7 of Table I-6.2Start the computer.3Login and allow the computer to boot to the desktop.4Depending on the installed operating system, from the Windows Start menu, select one of thefollowing:SWin2000: Settings > Network and Dial–up ConnectionsSWin98: Settings > Control Panel and double–click Network.5Perform one of the following as applicable for the installed operating system:SFor Win2000, in the list of displayed connections, locate the Local Area Network connection for theNIC to be used for BTS router Ethernet communication.SFor Win98, in the Configuration tab of the Network dialog box, locate the TCP/IP connection forthe installed NIC.– If TCP/IP does not appear in the displayed list of installed network components, refer to theoperating system documentation and install TCP/IP.6Perform one of the following as applicable for the installed operating system:SFor Win2000, highlight the connection for the NIC and right click the highlighted connection, andselect Properties from the pop–up menu.SFor Win98:– Highlight the TCP/IP NIC connection in the displayed list of installed network components.– Click the Properties button.– Skip to step 9.7 For Win2000 , in the Local Area Connection Properties dialog box which appears, if InternetProtocol (TCP/IP) is not showing in the Components checked are used by this connection: listbox,refer to the operating system documentation and install TCP/IP.8 For Win2000, if the checkbox next to the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) entry is not checked, click in thebox to check it.9Perform one of the following:SWin2000: Highlight the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) entry, and click on the Properties button belowthe Components checked are used by this connection: listbox.SWin98: From the tabs displayed in the TCP/IP Properties dialog box which opens, select the IPAddress tab if it is not at the front.10 In the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties dialog box which appears (Win2000) or the IP Addresstab of the TCP/IP Properties dialog box (Win98), perform the following:10a – If a black dot is not showing in the the radio button circle next to Use the following IP address:(Win2000) or Specify an IP address (Win98), click on the radio button.–– A black dot will appear in the circle.. . . continued on next pageI
Verify IOS Version and Install Canned Configuration – continued I-20 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTTable I-4: Determine LMF Computer NIC Speed, Set NIC IP Address, and Create a Default TFTP DirectoryStep Action10b – If using an LMF computer, record the IP address and subnet mask used for LMF–BTScommunication so they can be re–entered when tftp transfer activities for the BTS router arecompleted.10c – Enter 100.100.100.1 in the IP address: box.10d – Enter 255.255.255.252 in the Subnet mask: box.11 Click the OK button for the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties dialog box (Win2000) or theTCP/IP Properties box (Win98).12 Click the OK button for the Local Area Connection Properties box (Win2000) or the Network box(Win98).13 In Win98, click File > Close to close the Control Panel window.14 Click Start > Programs > Windows Explorer to open Windows Explorer.15 If the default tftp directory will be the same directory in which the files downloaded from the OMC–Rare stored, proceed to step 23.16 In the left–hand pane of Windows Explorer, locate the icon for the drive where the default tftpdirectory is to be created.17 Highlight the drive icon and click Files > New > Folder.18 While observing the new folder icon in the right–hand pane, type the name for the folder (for example,tftp_files), and press the Enter key.19 In Windows Explorer, locate the directory where the canned configuration files downloaded from theOMC–R are stored.20 In the left–hand pane, highlight the directory where the files are stored.21 Scroll the left–hand pane until the newly–created default tftp directory is visible.22 In the right–hand pane, highlight the canned configuration files and drag them to the default tftpdirectory.23 In the left–hand pane, click on the default tftp directory, and verify that the canned configuration filesappear in the right–hand pane.24 Load a copy of the required BTS router IOS version into the default tftp directory using FTP, internetdownload, or media such as a Zip disk (file size is over 7 MB).25 Click Files > Close to close Windows Explorer. Install and configure tftp server application – To obtain, install, andconfigure the Cisco or PumpKIN tftp software applications, refer to theSetting Up the TFTP Server – Procedure in Cellular SystemAdministration – CDMA OnLine Documentation, 68P09259A20 Forother tftp server applications, install and configure the applicationaccording to the manufacturer’s instructions.I
Verify IOS Version and Install Canned Configuration – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP I-21DRAFTWhen entering the name of the tftp server root directorywhile configuring the tftp server application, be sure to usethe name of the directory identified in Table I-4, step 15, orcreated in Table I-4, step 18, above.IMPORTANT*Connect the LMF computer to the BTS router – Connect the LMFcomputer to the BTS router by following the procedure in Table I-5 andreferring to Figure I-4.To BTS routerCONSOLEreceptacleCOM1ORCOM2LMF COMPUTEROR EQUIVALENTFigure I-4: LMF Computer TFTP Connections to BTS RouterROLLOVERCABLEDB9–TO–RJ48CADAPTERBTSRTR0025ETHERNETCROSSOVERCABLE10/100BASE TNIC PORTFAST ETHERNET PORT FE 0(SOFTWARE DESIGNATION FA0/0)CONSOLEPORTI
Verify IOS Version and Install Canned Configuration – continued I-22 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTTable I-5: Connecting the LMF Computer to the BTS Router for TFTP File TransferStep Action1If the BTS router has not been connected to a power source, be sure the +27 Vdc power source is noton, and connect it to the router.2Connect the LMF computer to the BTS router as shown in Figure I-4, referring to the list of requiredequipment in this section as required.3If the LMF computer has not been started, turn it on, login, and allow it to boot to the desktop.4Refer to the procedure in Table I-2 of this appendix, and start a HyperTerminal communication sessionfor the BTS router.5Start the tftp server application as specified for the software (refer to the Setting Up the TFTP Server –Procedure in Cellular System Administration – CDMA OnLine Documentation, 68P09259A20 or themanufacturer’s instructions). BTS router power–up and initial configuration for Ethernetcommunication – Follow the procedure in Table I-6 to apply power tothe router and set an initial configuration for Ethernet communication.SThe required version of the IOS is loaded on the CF memory cardSThe CF memory card is installed in the BTS routerTable I-6: BTS Router Power–up and Initial Ethernet ConfigurationStep Action* IMPORTANTThis procedure does not cover all aspects of BTS router operation and programming. Before performing thisprocedure, review BTS router initialization, operation, and programming information and procedures inMWR1900 Wireless Mobile Edge Router Software Configuration Guide; part number 78–13983–01. Have thispublication available for reference while performing this procedure.1Be sure a CF memory card loaded with the Cisco IOS is installed in the BTS router (refer to the BTS RouterCF Memory Card Removal and Replacement section of this Appendix for instructions to access the CFmemory card slot).2* IMPORTANTIn this step do not touch the computer keyboard until the router completes the boot process. The routerwill buffer any keystrokes made during the boot process and interpret them as commands to beexecuted immediately following boot completion.Apply power to the router and allow it to complete boot–up.3If a message similar to the following, is displayed, press the Enter key and proceed to step 5:Press RETURN to get started!. . . continued on next pageI
Verify IOS Version and Install Canned Configuration – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP I-23DRAFTTable I-6: BTS Router Power–up and Initial Ethernet ConfigurationStep Action4If a message similar to the following, is displayed type no and press the Enter key:Basic management setup configures only enough connectivityfor management of the system, extended setup will ask youto configure each interface on the systemWould you like to enter basic management setup? [yes/no]:A response similar to the following will be displayed:Would you like to enter basic management setup? [yes/no]: noCisco Internetwork Operating System SoftwareIOS (tm) 1900 Software (MWR1900–I–M), Version 12.2(20020127:101239Copyright (c) 1986–2002 by cisco Systems, Inc.Compiled Sun 27–Jan–02 06:08 by walrobinRouter> 5At the Router> user EXEC mode prompt, enter the following to access the privileged EXEC mode:enableA response similar to the following will be displayed:Router>enableRouter#6At the Router# privileged EXEC mode prompt, enter the following to access the configure submode:configure terminalA response similar to the following will be displayed:Router#conf tEnter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.Router(config)# The router is now in the global configuration mode and ready to accept configuration changes enteredfrom the keyboard.. . . continued on next pageI
Verify IOS Version and Install Canned Configuration – continued I-24 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTTable I-6: BTS Router Power–up and Initial Ethernet ConfigurationStep Action7At the global configuration mode prompt, type each of the following commands, pressing the Enterkey after each command:hostname btsrtr1interface fa0/0ip address 100.100.100.2 255.255.255.252speed 100 or 10 depending on the speed of the LMF computer NICduplex fullno shutdownline con 0exec–timeout 0 0no loginline vty 0 4no loginResponses similar to the following will be displayed:Router(config)#hostname BTSRTR1BTSRTR1(config)#interface fa0/0BTSRTR1(config–if)#ip address 100.100.100.2 255.255.255.252BTSRTR1(config–if)#speed 100BTSRTR1(config–if)#duplex fullBTSRTR1(config–if)#no shutdownBTSRTR1(config–if)#line con 0BTSRTR1(config–line)#exec–timeout 0 0BTSRTR1(config–line)#no loginBTSRTR1(config–line)#line vty 0 4BTSRTR1(config–line)#no loginBTSRTR1(config–line)#8Once the correct parameters have been set, return to the privileged EXEC mode prompt by holdingdown the Ctrl key and pressing z (Ctrl+z).A response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR1(config–line)# ^z01:11:27: %SYS–5–CONFIG_I: Configured from console by consoleBTSRTR1# NOTEEntering exit twice, pressing the Enter key after each entry, will also complete the configurationprocess and return the router to the privileged EXEC mode.. . . continued on next pageI
Verify IOS Version and Install Canned Configuration – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP I-25DRAFTTable I-6: BTS Router Power–up and Initial Ethernet ConfigurationStep Action9Verify port FE 0 (fa0/0) is configured with the correct IP address by entering the following:show ip interface briefA response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR1#sh ip int brInterface IP Address OK? Method Status ProtocolFastEthernet0/0 100.100.100.2 YES manual up upSerial0:0 unassigned YES unset administratively down downFastEthernet0/1 unassigned YES unset administratively down downSerial1:0 unassigned YES unset administratively down downBTSRTR1# 10 The router is now configured for Ethernet communication on FE 0, and the canned configuration filecan be transferred by tftp. Proceed to Table I-7. Verifying IOS Version and Canned Configuration File TFTPTransfer to the BTS RouterPrerequisites – The following is required prior to performing thisprocedure:SA copy of the required MWR 1900 or MWR 1941 router IOS versionfile is installed in the default tftp directory (transfer the file to theLMF computer using FTP, internet download, or media such as a Zipdisk; file size is approximately 7–8 MB)MWR 1941 routers must be loaded with IOS versionmwr1900–i–mz.122–8.MC2d.bin or later. This routermodel will not function properly with earlier IOS versions.IMPORTANT*IOS verification and canned configuration file transfer – Follow theprocedure in Table I-7 to verify the loaded IOS version and transfer thecanned configuration files from the LMF computer to the BTS router CFmemory card.I
Verify IOS Version and Install Canned Configuration – continued I-26 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTThis procedure does not cover all aspects of BTS routeroperation and programming. Before performing thisprocedure, review BTS router initialization, operation, andprogramming information and procedures in MWR1900Wireless Mobile Edge Router Software ConfigurationGuide; part number 78–13983–01. Have this publicationavailable for reference while performing this procedure.IMPORTANT*Table I-7: Transfer Canned Configuration Files to the BTS Router Using a TFTP ServerStep Action! CAUTIONIf personal firewall and/or intrusion detection software such as Black ICE is running on the LMF computer,shut it down before performing this procedure. If this is not done, the tftp transfer process will not operate.1On the LMF computer, if it has not been done, start the tftp server according to the manufacturer’sdirections (refer to the Setting Up the TFTP Server – Procedure in the Cellular System Administration– CDMA OnLine Documentation, 68P09259A20).2If a HyperTerminal communication session with the BTS router is not running, start one following theprocedure in Table I-2.3In the HyperTerminal window, the router must be in the privileged EXEC mode, as indicated by anumber sign at the end of the prompt:BTSRTR1# 4Be sure the Ethernet crossover cable is connected between the LMF computer NIC port and the BTSrouter FE 0 port (Figure I-4).. . . continued on next pageI
Verify IOS Version and Install Canned Configuration – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP I-27DRAFTTable I-7: Transfer Canned Configuration Files to the BTS Router Using a TFTP ServerStep Action5Begin verification that the CF memory card contains the correct version of the Cisco IOS by enteringthe following:dir slot0:A response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR1#dir slot0:Directory of slot0:/ 1 –rw– 7051976 Mar 01 1993 00:11:34 mwr1900–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin31932416 bytes total (24879104 bytes free)BTSRTR1#NOTE1. The IOS defaults to the CF memory card (slot0:) directory unless the present working directory hasbeen changed using the cd command. Determine the present working directory by entering pwd.If the present working directory has been changed, enter the command cd slot0: to return to thedefault setting.2. If slot0: is included in the command, be sure to include the colon (:) after slot0 when typing thecommand.3. The IOS filename will be similar to the following:mwr1900–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin. . . continued on next pageI
Verify IOS Version and Install Canned Configuration – continued I-28 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTTable I-7: Transfer Canned Configuration Files to the BTS Router Using a TFTP ServerStep Action6Direct the router to show the version information by entering the following:show versionA response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR1#sh verCisco Internetwork Operating System Software IOS (tm) 1900 Software (MWR1900–I–M), Version 12.2(8)MC2a, EARLY DEPLOY-MENT RELEASE SOFTWARE (fc1)TAC Support: http://www.cisco.com/tacCopyright (c) 1986–2002 by cisco Systems, Inc.Compiled Mon 05–Aug–02 11:07 by nmasaImage text–base: 0x60008940, data–base: 0x60B54000ROM: System Bootstrap, Version 12.2(20020113:235343) [sbose–wilma 109],DEVELOPMENT SOFTWAREROM: 1900 Software (MWR1900–I–M), Version 12.2(8)MC2a, EARLY DEPLOYMENTRELEASE SOFTWARE (fc1)Router uptime is 1 minuteSystem returned to ROM by power–onSystem image file is ”slot0:mwr1900–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin”cisco mwr1900 (R7000) processor (revision 0.1) with 121856K/18432K bytesof memory.Processor board ID JMX0611K5TSR7000 CPU at 240Mhz, Implementation 39, Rev 3.3, 256KB L2 CacheBridging software.X.25 software, Version 3.0.0.Primary Rate ISDN software, Version 1.1.Toaster processor tmc is running.2 FastEthernet/IEEE 802.3 interface(s)2 Serial network interface(s)2 Channelized T1/PRI port(s)DRAM configuration is 64 bits wide with parity disabled.55K bytes of non–volatile configuration memory.31360K bytes of ATA Slot0 CompactFlash (Read/Write)Configuration register is 0x101BTSRTR1#7Compare the IOS filename returned in step 5 and the second line of the version information in step 6.Note the correspondence between the filename and IOS version information.* IMPORTANTMWR 1941 routers must be loaded with IOS version mwr1900–i–mz.122–8.MC2d.bin or later. Thisrouter model will not function properly with earlier IOS versions.. . . continued on next pageI
Verify IOS Version and Install Canned Configuration – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP I-29DRAFTTable I-7: Transfer Canned Configuration Files to the BTS Router Using a TFTP ServerStep Action8If the IOS filename from the CF memory card returned in step 5 is different than the filename of therequired IOS version loaded in the LMF computer default tftp directory, perform the procedure inTable I-8 to load the required version, and then return to step 9, below.9! CAUTIONThe file sequence on the CF memory card can not be verified with application programs which placethe listed file names in alphabetical order (for example, certain Unix telnet applications, Unixdirectory listing commands, and Windows file managers such as Windows Explorer). This portion ofthe procedure is intended for use only with applications, such as HyperTerminal, which do not listdirectory contents alphabetically.If the IOS version is correct and there is more than one file loaded on the CF memory card, be sure theIOS file is the first file listed in the directory content display. If it is not, perform the following:9a – Backup all files on the CF memory card to the LMF computer default tftp directory by performingsteps 3 through 10 of Table I-8.9b – Perform steps 25 through 29 of Table I-8, as applicable.9c – Type the following to delete a possible boot system line in the startup–config file, pressing theEnter key after the command and at each prompt to confirm the filename and deletion operation:del nvram:startup–configA response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR1#del nvram:startup–configDelete filename [startup–config]? Delete nvram:startup–config? [confirm][OK]BTSRTR1#NOTEBe sure to include the colon (:) after nvram when typing the command.. . . continued on next pageI
Verify IOS Version and Install Canned Configuration – continued I-30 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTTable I-7: Transfer Canned Configuration Files to the BTS Router Using a TFTP ServerStep Action9d – Verify the startup–config file size has been reduced to a minimum by entering the following:dir nvram:A response similar to the following will be displayed:Router#dir nvram:Directory of nvram:/ 53 –rw– 5 <no date> startup–config 54 –––– 5 <no date> private–config57336 bytes total (57274 bytes free)BTSRTR1#10 At the privileged EXEC mode prompt, enter the following:copy tftp:btsrtr_canned.color slot0:canned–configWhere color = blue or red, as applicable.A response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR1#copy tftp:btsrtr_canned.blue slot0:canned–configAddress or name of remote host []?11 At the prompt for the remote host address or name, enter the IP address of the LMF computer NIC:100.100.100.1A response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR1#copy tftp:btsrtr_canned.blue slot0:canned–configAddress or name of remote host []? 100.100.100.1Destination filename [canned–config]?12 At the prompt for the destination filename, press the Enter key.A response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR1#copy tftp:btsrtr_canned.blue slot0:canned–configAddress or name of remote host []? 100.100.100.1Destination filename [canned–config]?Loading btsrtr_canned.blue from 100.100.100.1 (via Ethernet0/0): ![OK – 2457/4096 bytes]2457 bytes copied in 84.724 secs (29 bytes/sec)BTSRTR1#. . . continued on next pageI
Verify IOS Version and Install Canned Configuration – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP I-31DRAFTTable I-7: Transfer Canned Configuration Files to the BTS Router Using a TFTP ServerStep Action13 Verify that the canned configuration file is saved on the CF memory card by entering the following:dirA response similar to the following will be displayed:Directory of slot0:/ 1 –rw– 7051976 Mar 01 1993 00:11:34 mwr1900–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin 2 –rw– 2457 Mar 01 1993 00:14:48 canned–config31932416 bytes total (24877983 bytes free)BTSRTR1#14 To allow the BTS router to boot using the canned configuration, enter the following:copy canned–config startup–configA response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR1#copy canned–config startDestination filename [startup–config]?15 When prompted for the destination file name, press the Enter key.A response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR1#copy canned–config startDestination filename [startup–config]?2457 bytes copied in 3.52 secsBTSRTR1#16 Display and note the file size of startup–config by entering the following:dir nvram:A response similar to the following will be displayed:Directory of nvram:/ 26 –rw– 2457 <no date> startup–config 27 –––– 5 <no date> private–config29688 bytes total (24774 bytes free)BTSRTR1#. . . continued on next pageI
Verify IOS Version and Install Canned Configuration – continued I-32 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTTable I-7: Transfer Canned Configuration Files to the BTS Router Using a TFTP ServerStep Action17 Scroll the HyperTerminal window back to the slot0: directory display obtained in step 13, above.18 Compare the file size of startup–config to the canned configuration file to verify the copy operation.File sizes should be the same.19 If desired, the contents of the startup–config file may be verified against the file listings at the end ofthis appendix for the blue or red canned configuration, as applicable, by entering the following:show startup–configNOTEPressing the space bar at the MORE prompt will scroll another screen–full of data. Pressing the Enterkey will scroll the screen one line at a time.20 Verify the router will boot properly on the IOS and revised startup–config files by entering thefollowing:reloadA response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR1#reloadSystem configuration has been modified. Save? [yes/no]: nProceed with reload? [confirm]21 If prompted to save a modified configuration, enter n for “no,” and press the Enter key.22 When prompted to proceed with reload, press the Enter key to continue the reload operation.23 NOTEReloading the router with the revised startup–config file will change router FE port speed to 100. Ifthe router FE port speed was changed to 10 to communicate with the LMF computer NIC, thecomputer may indicate that the FE LAN connection has been lost at this point.Verify the router reboots without displaying the rommon 1 > prompt or error messages related to portconfigurations. If the router boots to the rommon prompt, proceed to the Recovery from BTS RouterBoot to rommon section of this appendix.24 Using the tagging materials, tag the router to clearly identify the installed configuration (blue(BTSRTR1) or red (BTSRTR2)).25 Remove the CF memory from the router following the procedure in Table I-13, mark the installedconfiguration (blue or red) on the card label, and install the card in the router following the procedurein Table I-14.26 If an additional router must have the canned configuration installed, perform the following:. . . continued on next pageI
Verify IOS Version and Install Canned Configuration – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP I-33DRAFTTable I-7: Transfer Canned Configuration Files to the BTS Router Using a TFTP ServerStep Action26a – Disconnect the cabling from the BTS router.26b – Remove power from the router and disconnect it from the power supply.26c – Repeat the procedures in Table I-5, Table I-6, and this table (Table I-7) using the additional router.27 If no additional routers must be configured, perform steps 26a and 26b.28 On the LMF computer, shut down the tftp server application and exit the HyperTerminal session.29 If no additional tftp transfer activities will be performed, change the NIC IP address and subnet maskback to those for LMF–BTS communication recorded in Table I-4, step 10b.! CAUTIONIf the BTS 10base–2 LAN IP address and subnet mask for the LMF computer’s NIC are not restored,the LMF can not log into a BTS when attempting to perform a BTS optimization or ATP. I
Change or Upgrade BTS Router IOS Version I-34 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTBackgroundBTS routers are supplied with CF memory cards pre–loaded with aversion of the IOS. Prior to installing the routers in a BTS, the loadedIOS version should be verified as being the one required for the network.It is critical to also verify that the IOS file is the first file on the CFmemory card. If another file precedes the IOS file, the BTS router willnot boot properly and will not function in the network.Equipment and SoftwareRequiredThe following items are required to perform this procedure:SA Windows–based computer which meets the requirements of theLMF computer platform as specified in 1X SC4812T BTSOptimization/ATP; 68P09260A62 for original design frames or 1XSC4812T–CLPA BTS Optimization/ATP; 68P64115A06 for updateddesign frames.SOne of the following operating systems for the Windows–basedcomputer:–Windows 2000–Windows 98 Second Edition (SE) using the FAT32 file systemBTS router CF memory cards loaded using computersequipped with Windows 98 versions earlier than Windows98 SE and using the FAT16 file system will not operateproperly, resulting in a complete site outage.CAUTIONSCable, rollover, as described in the Establishing a BTS RouterCommunication Session section of this AppendixSDB–9 plug–to–8–contact modular plug adapter as described in theEstablishing a BTS Router Communication Session section of thisAppendixSCable, Ethernet crossover, Category 5E or better, unshielded twistedpair, two 8–contact modular plugs, in one of the following lengths, asdetermined necessary:– 0.3 m (11.8 in) (Motorola pn 3088643C07)– 0.6 m (23.6 in)(Motorola pn 3088643C13)– 1.0 m (39.4 in) (Motorola pn 3088643C15)– 2.1 m (84 in) (Motorola pn 3088643C08)– 3.0 m (120 in) (Motorola pn 3088643C09)SA +27 Vdc power supply to power the BTS router duringconfiguration file operationsSA tftp server software application (refer to the Setting Up the TFTPServer – Procedure in Cellular System Administration – CDMAOnLine Documentation, 68P09259A20) such as:I
Change or Upgrade BTS Router IOS Version – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP I-35DRAFT– Cisco tftp server– PumpKIN tftp server– Any other equivalent tftp server applicationSA copy of the MWR 1900 or MWR 1941 router IOS version requiredfor the network where the routers are to be installedContact the network administrator or the Motorola AccountTeam for assistance in determining and obtaining a copy ofthe required IOS version.NOTEMWR 1941 routers must be loaded with IOS versionmwr1900–i–mz.122–8.MC2d.bin or later. This routermodel will not function properly with earlier IOS versions.IMPORTANT*Required PublicationsThe following publication is required to perform procedures in thissection:SMWR1900 Wireless Mobile Edge Router Software ConfigurationGuide; part number 78–13983–01Upgrade/Replace Installed IOSVersion and Verify FileSequence PositionDescription – This procedure covers using an LMF computer equippedwith a tftp server application to perform the following activities:1. Verify the IOS version loaded on a CF memory card and running ona BTS router2. Upgrade or replace the IOS version installed in a BTS router3. Ensure the IOS file is the first file on the CF memory cardPrerequisites – The following are required prior to performing thisprocedure:SThe LMF computer and BTS router have been prepared for tftp filetransfer and are operating as they would be after performing theprocedures in Table I-4, Table I-5, Table I-6, and steps 1 through 8 ofTable I-7SA copy of the required IOS version is loaded into the tftp defaultdirectory of the LMF computerUpgrading/replacing installed IOS version and verifying filesequence position – Follow the procedure in Table I-8 to replace orI
Change or Upgrade BTS Router IOS Version – continued I-36 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTupgrade the installed IOS version using the tftp server application, andensure the IOS file is first in the stored file sequence on the CF memorycard.Table I-8: Using a TFTP Server Application for Upgrading/Replacing Loaded IOS Version and Verifying File Sequence PositionStep Action* IMPORTANTThis procedure does not cover all aspects of BTS router operation and programming. Before performing thisprocedure, review BTS router initialization, operation, and programming information and procedures inMWR1900 Wireless Mobile Edge Router Software Configuration Guide; part number 78–13983–01. Have thispublication available for reference while performing this procedure.1This procedure assumes the LMF computer and BTS router are configured, connected, and operatingas they would be after performing the procedures in Table I-4, Table I-5, Table I-6, and steps 1 through8 of Table I-7. If necessary, perform these procedures now.2NOTEThe IOS present working directory defaults to the CF memory card (slot0:) directory unless thepresent working directory has been changed using the cd command. Determine the present workingdirectory by entering pwd. If the present working directory has been changed, enter the command cdslot0: to return to the default setting.Identify the filename of the currently loaded IOS which must be replaced by entering the following:dirA response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR1#dirDirectory of slot0:/ 1 –rw– 7051844 Sep 23 2002 07:15:08 mwr1900–i–mz.07022002.bin 2 –rw– 2212 Mar 01 1993 00:11:00 canned–config31932416 bytes total (24878360 bytes free)BTSRTR1#3Begin to backup the currently installed version of the router’s IOS to the LMF computer’s default tftpdirectory by entering the following:copy old_IOS_filename tftp:Where old_IOS_filename = the filename of the IOS currently loaded on the BTS router CFmemory card.A response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR1#copy mwr1900–i–mz.07022002.bin tftp:Address or name of remote host []?. . . continued on next pageI
Change or Upgrade BTS Router IOS Version – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP I-37DRAFTTable I-8: Using a TFTP Server Application for Upgrading/Replacing Loaded IOS Version and Verifying File Sequence PositionStep Action4At the remote host prompt, enter the following:100.100.100.1A response similar to the following will be displayed:Address or name of remote host []? 100.100.100.1Destination filename [mwr1900–i–mz.07022002.bin]?5If the default filename displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter key to accept it. If it ismissing or not correct, enter the correct filename.A response similar to the following will be displayed if the default filename is selected:Address or name of remote host []? 100.100.100.1Destination filename [mwr1900–i–mz.07022002.bin]?!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!7051844 bytes copied in 109.92 secs (64697 bytes/sec)BTSRTR1#. . . continued on next pageI
Change or Upgrade BTS Router IOS Version – continued I-38 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTTable I-8: Using a TFTP Server Application for Upgrading/Replacing Loaded IOS Version and Verifying File Sequence PositionStep Action6If additional files are stored on the CF memory card, begin backing them up to the LMF computer’sdefault tftp directory by entering the following:copy additional_filename tftp:Where additional_filename = the filename of an additional file loaded on the BTS router CFmemory card.A response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR1#copy canned–config tftp:Address or name of remote host [100.100.100.1]?7If the default IP address displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter key to accept it. If it ismissing or not correct, enter the correct IP address for the LMF computer.A response similar to the following will be displayed if the default filename is selected:Address or name of remote host [100.100.100.1]? Source filename [canned–config]?8If the default filename displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter key to accept it. If it ismissing or not correct, enter the correct filename.A response similar to the following will be displayed if the default filename is selected:Source filename [canned–config]? Destination filename [canned–config]?9If the default filename displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter key to accept it. If it ismissing or not correct, enter the correct filename.A response similar to the following will be displayed:Destination filename [canned–config]?![OK – 2212/4096 bytes]2212 bytes copied in 0.152 secsBTSRTR1#10 If more files are stored on the CF memory card, repeat steps 6 through 9 until all files have beenbacked up to the LMF computer.. . . continued on next pageI
Change or Upgrade BTS Router IOS Version – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP I-39DRAFTTable I-8: Using a TFTP Server Application for Upgrading/Replacing Loaded IOS Version and Verifying File Sequence PositionStep Action11 Delete all files from the CF memory card by entering the following command:format slot0:A response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR1#format slot0:Format operation may take a while. Continue? [confirm]12 Press the Enter key to continue the format operation.A response similar to the following will be displayed:Format operation may take a while. Continue? [confirm]Format operation will destroy all data in ”slot0:”. Continue? [confirm]13 Press the Enter key to continue the format operation.A response similar to the following will be displayed:Format operation will destroy all data in ”slot0:”. Continue? [confirm]Format: Drive communication & 1st Sector Write OK...Writing Monlibsec-tors....................................................................................Monlib write complete.Format: All system sectors written. OK...Format: Total sectors in formatted partition: 62560Format: Total bytes in formatted partition: 32030720Format: Operation completed successfully.Format of slot0 completeBTSRTR1#. . . continued on next pageI
Change or Upgrade BTS Router IOS Version – continued I-40 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTTable I-8: Using a TFTP Server Application for Upgrading/Replacing Loaded IOS Version and Verifying File Sequence PositionStep Action14 Verify all files have been deleted from the CF memory card by entering the following:dirA response similar to the following will be displayed:Directory of slot0:/No files in directory31932416 bytes total (31932416 bytes free)BTSRTR1#15 Begin to copy the required version of the IOS from the LMF computer to the BTS router by entering thefollowing:copy tftp:new_IOS_filename slot0:Where new_IOS_filename = the filename of the required IOS for the BTS router.A response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR1#copy tftp:mwr1900–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin slot0:Address or name of remote host [100.100.100.1]?16 If the default IP address displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter key to accept it. If it ismissing or not correct, enter the correct IP address for the LMF computer.A response similar to the following will be displayed if the default filename is selected:Address or name of remote host [100.100.100.1]? Source filename [mwr1900–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin]?17 If the default filename displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter key to accept it. If it ismissing or not correct, enter the correct filename.A response similar to the following will be displayed if the default filename is selected:Source filename [mwr1900–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin]? Destination filename [mwr1900–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin]?. . . continued on next pageI
Change or Upgrade BTS Router IOS Version – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP I-41DRAFTTable I-8: Using a TFTP Server Application for Upgrading/Replacing Loaded IOS Version and Verifying File Sequence PositionStep Action18 If the default filename displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter key to accept it. If it is notcorrect, enter the correct filename.A response similar to the following will be displayed if the default filename is selected:Destination filename [mwr1900–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin]? Accessing tftp://100.100.100.1/mwr1900–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin...Loading mwr1900–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin from 100.100.100.1 (via FastEther-net0/0): !!!!Loading mwr1900–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin from 100.100.100.1 (via FastEther-net0/0):!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!![OK – 7051976/14103552 bytes]7051976 bytes copied in 145.108 secs (48634 bytes/sec)BTSRTR1#. . . continued on next pageI
Change or Upgrade BTS Router IOS Version – continued I-42 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTTable I-8: Using a TFTP Server Application for Upgrading/Replacing Loaded IOS Version and Verifying File Sequence PositionStep Action19 Display the CF memory card directory to verify that the new IOS file is there by entering thefollowing:dirA response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR1#dirDirectory of slot0:/ 1 –rw– 7051976 Sep 23 2002 07:25:36mwr1900–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin31932416 bytes total (24880440 bytes free)BTSRTR1#20 If any additional files previously stored on the CF memory card are to be copied to the card, performthe following:copy tftp:filename slot0:Where filename = the filename of the file to be copied to the CF memory cardA response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR1#copy tftp:canned–config slot0:Address or name of remote host [100.100.100.1]?21 If the default IP address displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter key to accept it. If it ismissing or not correct, enter the correct IP address for the LMF computer.A response similar to the following will be displayed if the default IP address is selected:Address or name of remote host [100.100.100.1]? Destination filename [canned–config]? 22 If the default filename displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter key to accept it. If it ismissing or not correct, enter the correct filename.A response similar to the following will be displayed if the default filename is selected:Destination filename [canned–config]? Accessing tftp://100.100.100.1/canned–config...Loading basic_config from 100.100.100.1 (via FastEthernet0/0): ![OK – 2212/4096 bytes]2212 bytes copied in 0.152 secsBTSRTR1#. . . continued on next pageI
Change or Upgrade BTS Router IOS Version – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP I-43DRAFTTable I-8: Using a TFTP Server Application for Upgrading/Replacing Loaded IOS Version and Verifying File Sequence PositionStep Action23 After the additional file is copied to the CF memory card, display the CF memory card directory byentering the following:dirA response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR1#dirDirectory of slot0:/ 1 –rw– 7051976 Sep 23 2002 07:24:18mwr1900–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin 2 –rw– 2212 Mar 01 1993 00:09:06 canned–config24 The IOS file must be the first file listed for the BTS router to boot properly. If it is, proceed to step 29.25 ! CAUTIONThe file sequence on the CF memory card can not be verified with application programs which placethe listed file names in alphabetical order (for example, certain Unix telnet applications, Unixdirectory listing commands, and Windows file managers such as Windows Explorer). This portion ofthe procedure is intended for use only with applications, such as HyperTerminal, which do not listdirectory contents alphabetically.If another file is listed before the IOS file, delete the file by performing steps 11 through 13 anddisplay the directory of the CF memory card as described in step 23 to be sure the file is deleted.26 Copy the file from the LMF computer to the CF memory card again by performing steps 20 through23.27 If the file is again listed before the IOS file in the CF memory card directory display, format the CFmemory card by performing steps 11 through 14 of this table.28 Copy the IOS file and any other required file to the formatted CF memory card by performing steps 15through 24.29 If additional files are to be transferred to the CF memory card, perform steps 20 through 24 for eachone.. . . continued on next pageI
Change or Upgrade BTS Router IOS Version – continued I-44 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTTable I-8: Using a TFTP Server Application for Upgrading/Replacing Loaded IOS Version and Verifying File Sequence PositionStep Action30 After making sure the IOS file is the first file on the CF memory card, restart the BTS router with thenew IOS version by entering the following:reloadA response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR1#reloadSystem configuration has been modified. Save? [yes/no]: nProceed with reload? [confirm]31 If prompted to save a modified configuration, enter n for “no,” and press the Enter key.32 When prompted to proceed with reload, press the Enter key to continue the reload operation.33 Once the router has completed rebooting, change to the privileged EXEC mode and confirm thebooted IOS version is correct by entering the following:show versionA response similar to the following partial example will be displayed:BTSRTR1#sh verCisco Internetwork Operating System Software IOS (tm) 1900 Software (MWR1900–I–M), Version 12.2(8)MC2a, EARLY DEPLOY-MENT RELEASE SOFTWARE (fc1)...BTSRTR1#34 Verify the version number displayed in the second line of the version information is the correct IOSversion.35 If this procedure was entered from step 8 of Table I-7, return to Table I-7, step 9.36 If no other BTS router file operations or configuration actions are required, perform the following:36a – Remove power from the router and disconnect it from the power supply.36b – Disconnect all other cabling from the BTS router.36c – On the LMF computer, exit the HyperTerminal communications session.. . . continued on next pageI
Change or Upgrade BTS Router IOS Version – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP I-45DRAFTTable I-8: Using a TFTP Server Application for Upgrading/Replacing Loaded IOS Version and Verifying File Sequence PositionStep Action37 If no additional tftp transfer activities will be performed, change the NIC IP address and subnet maskback to those for LMF–BTS communication recorded in Table I-4, step 10b.! CAUTIONIf the BTS 10base–2 LAN IP address and subnet mask for the LMF computer’s NIC are not restored,the LMF can not log into a BTS when attempting to perform a BTS optimization or ATP. I
Verify and Upgrade ROMmon Version I-46 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTIntroductionBTS routers are supplied pre–loaded with a version of the ROM monitor(ROMmon) low–level operating system. Along with the IOS version, theloaded ROMmon version should be verified as being the one requiredfor the network. Procedures in this section are used to verify the loadedROMmon version, and, if necessary, upgrade or change it to the requiredversion. Methods are provided for using either a tftp server or CFmemory card reader to transfer the required ROMmon version to a BTSrouter’s CF memory card.Required Equipment andSoftwareThe following items are required to perform ROMmon versionverification and upgrade for both verification/upgrade methods:SA Windows–based computer which meets the requirements of theLMF computer platform as specified in 1X SC4812T BTSOptimization/ATP; 68P09260A62 original design frames or 1XSC4812T–CLPA BTS Optimization/ATP; 68P64115A06 for updateddesign frames.SOne of the following operating systems for the Windows–basedcomputer:–Windows 2000–Windows 98 Second Edition (SE) using the FAT32 file systemBTS router CF memory cards loaded using computersequipped with Windows 98 versions earlier than Windows98 SE and using the FAT16 file system will not operateproperly, resulting in a complete site outage.CAUTIONSCable, rollover, as described in the Establishing a BTS RouterCommunication Session section of this AppendixSDB–9 plug–to–8–contact modular plug adapter as described in theEstablishing a BTS Router Communication Session section of thisAppendixSCable, Ethernet crossover, Category 5E or better, unshielded twistedpair, two 8–contact modular plugs, in one of the following lengths, asdetermined necessary:– 0.3 m (11.8 in) (Motorola pn 3088643C07)– 0.6 m (23.6 in)(Motorola pn 3088643C13)– 1.0 m (39.4 in) (Motorola pn 3088643C15)– 2.1 m (84 in) (Motorola pn 3088643C08)– 3.0 m (120 in) (Motorola pn 3088643C09)SA +27 Vdc power supply to power the BTS router duringconfiguration file operationsI
Verify and Upgrade ROMmon Version – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP I-47DRAFTSA tftp server software application (refer to the Setting Up the TFTPServer – Procedure in Cellular System Administration – CDMAOnLine Documentation, 68P09259A20) such as:– Cisco tftp server– PumpKIN tftp server– Any other equivalent tftp server applicationSA copy of the MWR 1900 or MWR 1941 router ROMmon versionrequired for the network where the routers are to be installedContact the network administrator or the Motorola AccountTeam for assistance in determining and obtaining a copy ofthe required ROMmon version.NOTERequired PublicationsThe following publication is required to perform procedures in thissection:SMWR1900 Wireless Mobile Edge Router Software ConfigurationGuide; part number 78–13983–01Verification andUpgrade/Replacement ofInstalled ROMmon VersionDescription – This procedure covers using an LMF computer equippedwith a tftp server application to perform the following activities:1. Verify the ROMmon version loaded and running on a BTS router2. Upgrade or replace the ROMmon version installed in a BTS routerPrerequisites – The following are required prior to performing thisprocedure:SThe LMF computer and BTS router have been prepared for tftp filetransfer and are operating as they would be after performing theprocedures in Table I-4, Table I-5, Table I-6, and steps 1 through 8 ofTable I-7SA copy of the required ROMmon version is loaded into the tftpdefault directory of the LMF computerVerifying and Upgrading/replacing installed ROMmon version –Follow the procedure in Table I-8 to verify and, if necessary, replace orupgrade the installed ROMmon version using the tftp server application.I
Verify and Upgrade ROMmon Version – continued I-48 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTTable I-9: Verify and Upgrade/Replace Installed ROMmon Version Using a tftp ServerStep Action* IMPORTANTThis procedure does not cover all aspects of BTS router operation and programming. Before performing thisprocedure, review BTS router initialization, operation, and programming information and procedures inMWR1900 Wireless Mobile Edge Router Software Configuration Guide; part number 78–13983–01. Have thispublication available for reference while performing this procedure.1This procedure assumes the LMF computer and BTS router are configured, connected, and operatingas they would be after performing the procedures in Table I-4, Table I-5, Table I-6, and steps 1 through4 of Table I-7. If necessary, perform these procedures now.. . . continued on next pageI
Verify and Upgrade ROMmon Version – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP I-49DRAFTTable I-9: Verify and Upgrade/Replace Installed ROMmon Version Using a tftp ServerStep Action2Determine the currently installed ROMmon version by entering the following at the router privilegedEXEC mode prompt:show versionA response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR1#sh verCisco Internetwork Operating System Software IOS (tm) 1900 Software (MWR1900–I–M), Version 12.2(8)MC2b, EARLY DEPLOY-MENT RELEASE SOFTWARE (fc3)TAC Support: http://www.cisco.com/tacCopyright (c) 1986–2002 by cisco Systems, Inc.Compiled Mon 05–Aug–02 11:07 by nmasaImage text–base: 0x60008940, data–base: 0x60B54000ROM: System Bootstrap, Version 12.2(20020113:235343) [sbose–wilma 109],DEVELOPMENT SOFTWAREROM: 1900 Software (MWR1900–I–M), Version 12.2(8)MC2b, EARLY DEPLOYMENTRELEASE SOFTWARE (fc3)Router uptime is 1 minuteSystem returned to ROM by power–onSystem image file is ”slot0:mwr1900–i–mz.122–8.MC2b.bin”cisco mwr1900 (R7000) processor (revision 0.1) with 121856K/18432K bytesof memory.Processor board ID JMX0611K5TSR7000 CPU at 240Mhz, Implementation 39, Rev 3.3, 256KB L2 CacheBridging software.X.25 software, Version 3.0.0.Primary Rate ISDN software, Version 1.1.Toaster processor tmc is running.2 FastEthernet/IEEE 802.3 interface(s)2 Serial network interface(s)2 Channelized T1/PRI port(s)DRAM configuration is 64 bits wide with parity disabled.55K bytes of non–volatile configuration memory.31360K bytes of ATA Slot0 CompactFlash (Read/Write)Configuration register is 0x101BTSRTR1#3To determine the currently installed ROMmon version, examine the ROM: System Bootstrap linein the response.. . . continued on next pageI
Verify and Upgrade ROMmon Version – continued I-50 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTTable I-9: Verify and Upgrade/Replace Installed ROMmon Version Using a tftp ServerStep Action4Compare the installed ROMmon version information with the filename of the ROMmon versionrequired for the network.NOTE1. Rommon filename format is similar to the following:MWR1900_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin2. The ROMmon filename reflects the version number of the software (122–8r.MC3).5If the installed version is the one required for the network skip to step 26.6If the installed ROMmon version is not the one required for the network, backup the current BTSrouter configuration to the LMF computer by entering the following:copy nvram:startup–config tftpA response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR1#copy nvram:start tftpAddress or name of remote host []?NOTEBe sure to include the colon (:) after nvram when typing the command.7At the prompt for the remote host address or name, enter the IP address of the LMF computer NIC:100.100.100.1A response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR1#copy copy nvram:start tftpAddress or name of remote host []? 100.100.100.1Source filename [startup–config]?8If the default filename displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter key to accept it. If it ismissing or not correct, enter the correct filename.A response similar to the following will be displayed if the default filename is selected:Source filename [startup–config]? Destination filename [startup–config]?. . . continued on next pageI
Verify and Upgrade ROMmon Version – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP I-51DRAFTTable I-9: Verify and Upgrade/Replace Installed ROMmon Version Using a tftp ServerStep Action9If the default filename displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter key to accept it. If it ismissing or not correct, enter the correct filename.A response similar to the following will be displayed:Destination filename [startup–config]?![OK – 2212/4096 bytes]2212 bytes copied in 0.152 secsBTSRTR1#10 NOTEThe IOS defaults to the CF memory card (slot0:) directory unless the present working directory hasbeen changed using the cd command. Determine the present working directory by entering pwd. Ifthe present working directory has been changed, enter the command cd slot0: to return to the defaultsetting.Determine the amount of memory available (bytes free) on the CF memory card by entering thefollowing:dirA response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR1#dirDirectory of slot0:/ 1 –rw– 7051976 Sep 23 2002 07:24:18mwr1900–i–mz.122–8.MC2b.bin 2 –rw– 2212 Mar 01 1993 00:14:48 canned–config31932416 bytes total (24885606 bytes free)Router#11 Be sure there is at least 1 MB (1048580) of free memory.NOTEA ROMmon version file requires approximately 0.7 MB.. . . continued on next pageI
Verify and Upgrade ROMmon Version – continued I-52 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTTable I-9: Verify and Upgrade/Replace Installed ROMmon Version Using a tftp ServerStep Action12 Begin to copy the required version of the ROMmon file from the LMF computer to the BTS router by enter-ing the following:copy tftp:new_rommon_filename slot0:Where new_rommon_filename = the filename of the required ROMmon version for the BTSrouter.A response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR1#copy tftp:MWR1900_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin slot0:Address or name of remote host [100.100.100.1]?13 If the default IP address displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter key to accept it. If it ismissing or not correct, enter the correct IP address for the LMF computer.A response similar to the following will be displayed if the default filename is selected:Address or name of remote host [100.100.100.1]? Source filename [MWR1900_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin]?14 If the default filename displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter key to accept it. If it ismissing or not correct, enter the correct filename.A response similar to the following will be displayed if the default filename is selected:Source filename [MWR1900_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin]? Destination filename [MWR1900_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin]?15 If the default filename displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter key to accept it. If it is notcorrect, enter the correct filename.A response similar to the following will be displayed if the default filename is selected:Destination filename [MWR1900_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin]? Accessing tftp://100.100.100.1/MWR1900_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin...Loading MWR1900_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin from 100.100.100.1 (via FastE-thernet0/0): !!!!Loading MWR1900_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin from 100.100.100.1 (via FastE-thernet0/0):!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!![OK – 614306/14103552 bytes]614306 bytes copied in 13.059 secs (48634 bytes/sec)BTSRTR1#. . . continued on next pageI
Verify and Upgrade ROMmon Version – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP I-53DRAFTTable I-9: Verify and Upgrade/Replace Installed ROMmon Version Using a tftp ServerStep Action16 Display the CF memory card directory to verify that the new ROMmon version file is there byentering the following:dirA response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR1#dirDirectory of slot0:/ 1 –rw– 7051976 Sep 23 2002 07:25:36 mwr1900–i–mz.122–8.MC2b.bin 2 –rw– 2212 Mar 01 1993 00:09:06 canned–config 3 –rw– 614306 Dec 13 2002 14:59:36MWR1900_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin31932416 bytes total (24263922 bytes free)BTSRTR1#17 Replace the existing ROMmon version with the new one copied to the CF memory card by enteringthe following:upgrade rom–monitor file slot0:MWR1900_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3A response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR1#This command will reload the router. Continue?[yes/no]18 When prompted to continue, enter yes and press the Enter key.A response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR1#This command will reload the router. Continue?[yes/no] yesROMMON image upgrade in progressErasing boot flasheeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeProgramming boot flash ppppNow reloading19 When the router has completed initialization, change to the router privileged EXEC mode by enteringthe following:enableA response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR1>enableBTSRTR1#. . . continued on next pageI
Verify and Upgrade ROMmon Version – continued I-54 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTTable I-9: Verify and Upgrade/Replace Installed ROMmon Version Using a tftp ServerStep Action20 Verify the router has initialized with the new ROMmon version by entering the following:show versionA response similar to the following partial response will be displayed:BTSRTR1#sh verCisco Internetwork Operating System Software IOS (tm) 1900 Software (MWR1900–I–M), Version 12.2(8)MC2b, EARLY DEPLOY-MENT RELEASE SOFTWARE (fc3)TAC Support: http://www.cisco.com/tacCopyright (c) 1986–2002 by cisco Systems, Inc.Compiled Mon 05–Aug–02 11:07 by nmasaImage text–base: 0x60008940, data–base: 0x60B54000ROM: System Bootstrap, Version 12.2(8r)MC3 RELEASE SOFTWARE (fc1)21 Compare the version displayed in the response ROM: System Bootstrap line to the filename of thenew ROMmon version file copied to the CF memory card.22 If the router successfully rebooted with the new ROMmon version, the ROMmon file can be deletedfrom the CF memory card by entering the following:delete slot0:new_rommon_filenameWhere new_rommon_filename = the filename of the required ROMmon version copied to the CFmemory card in steps 12 through 15, above.A response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR1#del slot0:MWR1900_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.binDelete filename [MWR1900_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin]? 23 If the default filename displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter key to accept it. If it ismissing or not correct, enter the correct filename.A response similar to the following will be displayed if the default filename is selected:Delete filename [MWR1900_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin]? Delete slot0:MWR1900_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin? [confirm]. . . continued on next pageI
Verify and Upgrade ROMmon Version – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP I-55DRAFTTable I-9: Verify and Upgrade/Replace Installed ROMmon Version Using a tftp ServerStep Action24 Press the Enter key to confirm the deletion.A response similar to the following will be displayed if the default filename is selected:Delete filename [MWR1900_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin]? Delete slot0:MWR1900_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin? [confirm]BTSRTR1#25 ! CAUTIONIn this step, do not delete the IOS and canned–config files from the CF memory card. The BTSrouter must have these files on the card to properly boot or switch between packet and circuit mode.If additional unnecessary files, such as a backup of the startup–config file, are also on the CFmemory card, delete them by repeating steps 22 through 24 for each file.26 If no other BTS router file operations or configuration actions are required, perform the following:26a – Remove power from the router and disconnect it from the power supply.26b – Disconnect all cabling from the BTS router.26c – On the LMF computer, exit the HyperTerminal communications session.27 If no additional tftp transfer activities will be performed, change the NIC IP address and subnet maskback to those for LMF–BTS communication recorded in Table I-4, step 10b.! CAUTIONIf the BTS 10base–2 LAN IP address and subnet mask for the LMF computer’s NIC are not restored,the LMF can not log into a BTS when attempting to perform a BTS optimization or ATP. I
Recovery from BTS Router Boot to ROMmon I-56 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTROM monitor boot conditions – Under certain circumstances the BTSrouter will initialize with the ROM monitor (ROMmon) operatingsystem rather than the IOS. These circumstances include:SThe hexadecimal value in the router’s configuration register has beenchanged from the factory default (can change the location from wherethe router attempts to load code for boot–up).SIOS file is missing from the CF memory cardSIOS file is not the first file on the CF memory cardSStartup–config file contains an outdated boot system line specifyingan IOS file which has been replaced with an updated versionSStartup–config file contains boot system line with typographicalerror(s) in the IOS filenameSIOS file image on the CF memory card is corruptedDescription – Router operation on ROMmon is signalled by the displayof the rommon # > prompt, where # is a number which incrementseach time a command is issued. ROMmon is a low–level operatingsystem which provides limited capabilities for router testing andtroubleshooting operations, including viewing directory contents andbooting from a specified file.Recovery methods – Two recovery methods are included in this section.The first is the simplest and requires that a valid, uncorrupted IOSversion is installed on the CF memory card. The second method requiresadditional equipment and must be used in instances such as when an IOSfile is not installed on the CF memory card or the installed IOS image iscorrupted.Simple Recovery from Boot toROMmonRequirements – Unless it is certain that the IOS image on the CFmemory card is corrupted, this method should always be the first triedfor router recovery from ROMmon initialization. This method does notrequire any additional equipment beyond the items necessary to loadcanned configuration files into the BTS router. To be effective, thismethod does require that a valid, uncorrupted IOS image file is installedon the router’s CF memory card.Recovery – Follow the procedure in Table I-10 to attempt a simplerecovery from a BTS router ROMmon initialization.I
Recovery from BTS Router Boot to ROMmon – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP I-57DRAFTTable I-10: Simple Recovery from BTS Router ROMmon BootStep Action* IMPORTANTThis procedure does not cover all aspects of BTS router operation and programming. Before performing thisprocedure, review BTS router initialization, operation, and programming information and procedures inMWR1900 Wireless Mobile Edge Router Software Configuration Guide; part number 78–13983–01. Have thispublication available for reference while performing this procedure.1This procedure assumes the LMF computer is set up and connected to the BTS router with an activeHyperTerminal communication session. If it is not, follow the procedure in Table I-2 to establish aHyperTerminal communication session.2With the rommon 1 > prompt displayed in the HyperTerminal window, enter the following todetermine if the router’s configuration register is set to the factory default value:confregA response similar to the following will be displayed:rommon 4 > confreg Configuration Summary (Virtual Configuration Register: 0x100)enabled are:load rom after netboot failsconsole baud: 9600boot: image specified by the boot system commands or default to: cisco2–mwr1900do you wish to change the configuration? y/n [n]: NOTESThe configuration register setting is shown in the (Virtual Configuration Register: 0x____) lineS0x in the Virtual Configuration Register line indicates the numbers following are hexadecimal3If the value shown for the configuration register is 2102, skip to step 6.4If the value shown for the configuration register is not 2102, perform the following:4a Press the Return key to accept the default of n (for no).. . . continued on next pageI
Recovery from BTS Router Boot to ROMmon – continued I-58 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTTable I-10: Simple Recovery from BTS Router ROMmon BootStep Action4b Enter the following at the rommon prompt:confreg 0x2102A response similar to the following will be displayed:rommon 3 > confreg 0x2102You must reset or power cycle for new config to take effectrommon 4 >4c Enter the following at the rommon prompt:resetA response which begins and ends similar to the following will be displayed:rommon 4 > reset System Bootstrap, Version 12.2(20020113:235343) [sbose–wilma 109], DE-VELOPMENT SOFTWARECopyright (c) 1994–2002 by cisco Systems, Inc.mwr1900 processor with 131072 Kbytes of main memoryMain memory is configured to 64 bit mode with parity disabledReadonly ROMMON initialized....<output omitted>....Press RETURN to get started!5If the router reboots with the IOS, skip to step 21.. . . continued on next pageI
Recovery from BTS Router Boot to ROMmon – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP I-59DRAFTTable I-10: Simple Recovery from BTS Router ROMmon BootStep Action6If the configuration register is set properly and/or the router does not reboot with the IOS, enter thefollowing at the rommon # > prompt to identify the IOS file on the CF memory card:dir slot0:A response similar to the following will be displayed:rommon 1 > dir slot0:program load complete, entry point: 0x80008000, size: 0xb2a0Directory of slot0:2 2212 –rw– canned–config3 7051976 –rw– mwr1900–i–mz.122–8.MC2b.bin4 614306 –rw– MWR1900_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.binrommon 2 >NOTEThe IOS filename will be similar to the following:mwr1900–i–mz.122–8.MC2b.bin7If there is no IOS file on the CF memory card, proceed to Table I-11 and perform the extendedrecovery procedure.. . . continued on next pageI
Recovery from BTS Router Boot to ROMmon – continued I-60 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTTable I-10: Simple Recovery from BTS Router ROMmon BootStep Action8If an IOS file is found, note the IOS filename, and enter the following to begin recovery to an IOSboot:boot slot0:IOS_filenameWhere IOS_filename = the filename of the IOS noted in step 6, above.A successful IOS re–boot operation will result in display of a response which begins and ends similarto the following:rommon 2 > boot slot0:mwr1900–i–mz.122–8.MC2b.binprogram load complete, entry point: 0x80008000, size: 0xb2a0program load complete, entry point: 0x80008000, size: 0x6b99acSelf decompressing the image :################################################################### [OK]Smart Init is enabledsmart init is sizing iomem ID MEMORY_REQ TYPE00031A 0X005F3C00 MWR1900 Mainboard 0X000F3BB0 public buffer pools 0X00211000 public particle poolsTOTAL: 0X008F87B0....<output omitted>....Press RETURN to get started!9If the router successfully reboots with the IOS, skip to step 12.10 If the router does not reboot with the IOS, perform the following:10a – Scroll the HyperTerminal display down until the directory display from step 6, above, is visible.10b – Compare the IOS filename from the directory display with the filename entered when performingstep 8, above.10c – If the filename was typed incorrectly, repeat step 8, using care to type the filename correctly.. . . continued on next pageI
Recovery from BTS Router Boot to ROMmon – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP I-61DRAFTTable I-10: Simple Recovery from BTS Router ROMmon BootStep Action11 If the router still does not reboot with the IOS after typing the filename correctly, proceed to Table I-11and perform the extended recovery procedure.12 ! CAUTIONThe file sequence on the CF memory card can not be verified with application programs which placethe listed file names in alphabetical order (for example, certain Unix telnet applications, Unixdirectory listing commands, and Windows file managers such as Windows Explorer). This portion ofthe procedure is intended for use only with applications, such as HyperTerminal, which do not listdirectory contents alphabetically.After a successful reboot with IOS, perform the following to correct the cause of the boot toROMmon:12a – At the BTSRTR1> user EXEC mode prompt, enter the following to access the privileged EXECmode:enableA response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR1>enableBTSRTR1#12b – Enter the dir slot0: command to display the CF memory card directory, and, if the IOS file isnot the first file listed, perform the procedure in Table I-8, steps 25 through 32, to correct thesituation.. . . continued on next pageI
Recovery from BTS Router Boot to ROMmon – continued I-62 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTTable I-10: Simple Recovery from BTS Router ROMmon BootStep Action12c – If the IOS file is the first file, enter the following command to display the contents of thestartup–config file:show startup–configA response which begins similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR1#sh startUsing 1589 out of 57336 bytes!version 12.2service timestamps debug uptimeservice timestamps log uptimeno service password–encryption!hostname BTSRTR1!boot system slot0:mwr1900–i–mz.07132002.binno logging console!username cisco password 0 cisco!redundancy mode y–cable standalone!13 Review the startup–config file listing for a “boot system” line and perform the following:13a – If the startup–config file does not contain a boot system line, skip to step 14.13b – If the file listing contains a “boot system” line, examine it for the correct IOS filename.13c – If the boot system slot0: filename is incorrect, enter the following, using care to type the filenamecorrectly:boot system slot0:IOS_filenameWhere IOS_filename = the filename of the IOS noted in step 6, above.13d – Replace the boot system line in the startup–config file with the line entered in step 13c, above, byentering the following:copy runing–config startup–config. . . continued on next pageI
Recovery from BTS Router Boot to ROMmon – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP I-63DRAFTTable I-10: Simple Recovery from BTS Router ROMmon BootStep Action13e – Verify the correct IOS filename is now included in the listing by entering the following:show startup–configA response which begins similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR1#sh startUsing 1589 out of 57336 bytes!version 12.2service timestamps debug uptimeservice timestamps log uptimeno service password–encryption!hostname BTSRTR1!boot system slot0:mwr1900–i–mz.122–8.MC2b.binno logging console!username cisco password 0 cisco!redundancy mode y–cable standalone!. . . continued on next pageI
Recovery from BTS Router Boot to ROMmon – continued I-64 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTTable I-10: Simple Recovery from BTS Router ROMmon BootStep Action14 Re–verify the router’s configuration register setting by entering the following:show versionA response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR1#sh verCisco Internetwork Operating System Software IOS (tm) 1900 Software (MWR1900–I–M), Version 12.2(8)MC2b, EARLY DEPLOY-MENT RELEASE SOFTWARE (fc1)TAC Support: http://www.cisco.com/tacCopyright (c) 1986–2002 by cisco Systems, Inc.Compiled Mon 05–Aug–02 11:07 by nmasaImage text–base: 0x60008940, data–base: 0x60B54000ROM: System Bootstrap, Version 12.2(20020113:235343) [sbose–wilma 109],DEVELOPMENT SOFTWAREROM: 1900 Software (MWR1900–I–M), Version 12.2(8)MC2b, EARLY DEPLOYMENTRELEASE SOFTWARE (fc1)Router uptime is 1 minuteSystem returned to ROM by power–onSystem image file is ”slot0:mwr1900–i–mz.122–8.MC2b.bin”cisco mwr1900 (R7000) processor (revision 0.1) with 121856K/18432K bytesof memory.Processor board ID JMX0611K5TSR7000 CPU at 240Mhz, Implementation 39, Rev 3.3, 256KB L2 CacheBridging software.X.25 software, Version 3.0.0.Primary Rate ISDN software, Version 1.1.Toaster processor tmc is running.2 FastEthernet/IEEE 802.3 interface(s)2 Serial network interface(s)2 Channelized T1/PRI port(s)DRAM configuration is 64 bits wide with parity disabled.55K bytes of non–volatile configuration memory.31360K bytes of ATA Slot0 CompactFlash (Read/Write)Configuration register is 0x101BTSRTR1#NOTEThe configuration register value is shown in the last line of the show version response.15 If the value shown for the configuration register is 0x2102, skip to step 18.. . . continued on next pageI
Recovery from BTS Router Boot to ROMmon – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP I-65DRAFTTable I-10: Simple Recovery from BTS Router ROMmon BootStep Action16 If the value shown for the configuration register is not 0x2102, enter the following command in theorder shown to change it:configure terminalconfig–register 0x2102A response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR1#conf tEnter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.BTSRTR1(config)#config–register 0x2102BTSRTR1(config)#17 Verify the change was entered properly by entering the following commands in the order shown:exitshow versionA response which begins and ends similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR1(config)#exitBTSRTR1#sh verCisco Internetwork Operating System Software IOS (tm) 1900 Software (MWR1900–I–M), Version 12.2(8)MC2b, EARLY DEPLOY-MENT RELEASE SOFTWARE (fc1)TAC Support: http://www.cisco.com/tacCopyright (c) 1986–2002 by cisco Systems, Inc.....<output omitted>....Configuration register is 0x101 (will be 0x2102 at next reload)BTSRTR1#18 If the filename is correctly written in the boot system line (step 13e) and the configuration register isproperly set to the factory default of 0x2102, enter the following to determine if the router will rebootto IOS:reloadA response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR1#reloadSystem configuration has been modified. Save? [yes/no]: nProceed with reload? [confirm]. . . continued on next pageI
Recovery from BTS Router Boot to ROMmon – continued I-66 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTTable I-10: Simple Recovery from BTS Router ROMmon BootStep Action19 If prompted to save a modified configuration, enter n for “no,” and press the Enter key.20 When prompted to proceed with reload, press the Enter key to continue the reload operation.21 After a successful reboot with IOS, proceed with other BTS router activities or remove power from therouter and disconnect it22 If the router still will not successfully boot with IOS, proceed to Table I-11 and perform the extendedrecovery procedure. Extended Recovery from Bootto ROMmonRequirements – If ROMmon boot recovery attempts fail using thesimple recovery method, this method must be used to reboot a BTSrouter which has initialized with ROMmon. This method requiresadditional equipment beyond the items necessary to load cannedconfiguration files into the BTS router. Extended recovery requiresformatting the CF memory card from the ROMmon–initialized routerand reloading the reformatted CF memory card with the required IOSversion.Additional equipment required – An additional, formatted, 32 MB CFmemory card with the required version of the IOS installed is required inaddition to the equipment and software required for BTS router cannedconfiguration installation. This card may be:SA spare CF memory card which is loaded with the required IOSversionSA CF memory card from an additional BTS router which is loadedwith the required IOS versionRecovery – Follow the procedure in Table I-10 to perform an extendedrecovery from a BTS router ROMmon initialization.Table I-11: Extended Recovery from BTS Router ROMmon BootStep Action1This procedure assumes the BTS router is powered and operating on ROMmon with the LMFcomputer set up and connected to the router with an active HyperTerminal communication session. Ifit is not, follow the procedure in Table I-2 to establish a HyperTerminal communication session.2Remove the CF memory card from the BTS router following the procedure in Table I-13.3Install the additional CF memory card in the router following the procedure in Table I-14.. . . continued on next pageI
Recovery from BTS Router Boot to ROMmon – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP I-67DRAFTTable I-11: Extended Recovery from BTS Router ROMmon BootStep Action4Enter the following to obtain the filename of the IOS version loaded on the CF memory card:dir slot0:A response similar to the following will be displayed:rommon 1 > dir slot0:program load complete, entry point: 0x80008000, size: 0xb2a0Directory of slot0:1 7051976 –rw– mwr1900–i–mz.122–8.MC2b.binrommon 2 > 5Note the exact filename displayed for the IOS version.. . . continued on next pageI
Recovery from BTS Router Boot to ROMmon – continued I-68 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTTable I-11: Extended Recovery from BTS Router ROMmon BootStep Action6Enter the following to initialize the router with the IOS on the additional CF memory card:boot slot0:IOS_filenameWhere IOS_filename = the filename of the IOS noted in step 5, above.A successful IOS re–boot operation will result in display of a response which begins and ends similarto the following:rommon 2 > boot slot0:mwr1900–i–mz.122–8.MC2b.binprogram load complete, entry point: 0x80008000, size: 0xb2a0program load complete, entry point: 0x80008000, size: 0x6b99acSelf decompressing the image :################################################################### [OK]Smart Init is enabledsmart init is sizing iomem ID MEMORY_REQ TYPE00031A 0X005F3C00 MWR1900 Mainboard 0X000F3BB0 public buffer pools 0X00211000 public particle poolsTOTAL: 0X008F87B0... ––– System Configuration Dialog –––Would you like to enter the initial configuration dialog? [yes/no]: n7If the router prompts with a question to enter the initial dialog as shown in step 6, above, type no andpress the Enter key to obtain the user EXEC mode prompt.8If the router prompts with Press RETURN to get started!, press the Enter key to obtain theuser EXEC mode prompt.. . . continued on next pageI
Recovery from BTS Router Boot to ROMmon – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP I-69DRAFTTable I-11: Extended Recovery from BTS Router ROMmon BootStep Action9At the user EXEC mode prompt, enter the following to access the privileged EXEC mode:enableA response similar to the following will be displayed:Router> enableRouter#10 Remove the additional CF memory card from the BTS router following the procedure in Table I-13.11 Install the original CF memory card in the router following the procedure in Table I-14.12 Format the original CF memory card by entering the following:format slot0:A response similar to the following will be displayed:Router#format slot0:Format operation may take a while. Continue? [confirm]13 Press the Enter key to continue the format operation.A response similar to the following will be displayed:Format operation may take a while. Continue? [confirm]Format operation will destroy all data in ”slot0:”. Continue? [confirm]. . . continued on next pageI
Recovery from BTS Router Boot to ROMmon – continued I-70 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTTable I-11: Extended Recovery from BTS Router ROMmon BootStep Action14 Press the Enter key to continue the format operation.A response similar to the following will be displayed:Format operation will destroy all data in ”slot0:”. Continue? [confirm]Format: Drive communication & 1st Sector Write OK...Writing Monlibsec-tors....................................................................................Monlib write complete.Format: All system sectors written. OK...Format: Total sectors in formatted partition: 62560Format: Total bytes in formatted partition: 32030720Format: Operation completed successfully.Format of slot0 completeRouter#15 Copy the required IOS version to the formatted original CF memory card using the LMF computerand a tftp server following the procedure in Table I-8.16 If applicable, perform IOS initialization troubleshooting as described in Table I-10, steps 12 through21. I
Entering or Changing BTS Router FE Interface IP Addresses5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP I-71DRAFTFE Interface IP Addresses andOperating ParametersIt may be necessary to enter or change the IP addresses and/or operatingparameters for BTS router FE interfaces FE 0 and FE1 without makingother changes in the router configuration files. Procedures in this sectioncover these operations.PrerequisitesThe following must be accomplished before entering or changing BTSrouter FE port IP addresses and/or operating parameters:SThe user has read and understands the content of MWR1900 WirelessMobile Edge Router Software Configuration Guide; part number78–13983–01SBTS routers must have the required version of the IOS saved on theirinstalled CF memory cardSBTS routers must have power applied, be operating without alarmsother than span alarms, and have completed boot–up to the user EXECmode prompt (BTSRTR–bts#–1–1>)SThe BTS router privileged EXEC mode password has been obtainedfrom the network administratorEntering or Changing FEInterface IP AddressesTo enter or change FE interface IP addresses, follow the procedure inTable I-12.Table I-12: Entering or Changing BTS Router FE Interface IP Addresses and Operating ParametersStep Action* IMPORTANTThis procedure does not cover all aspects of BTS router operation and programming. Before performing thisprocedure, review BTS router initialization, operation, and programming information and procedures inMWR1900 Wireless Mobile Edge Router Software Configuration Guide; part number 78–13983–01. Have thispublication available for reference while performing this procedure.1Obtain the correct IP addresses and subnet masks for the BTS router FE interfaces from the networkadministrator.2If a HyperTerminal connection for BTS card/module MMI or BTS router (BTSRTR) communicationhas not been created, create one as described in Table I-1 of this appendix.3Connect the LMF computer to the BTS router, and start a communication session as described inTable I-2 in this appendix.. . . continued on next pageI
Entering or Changing BTS Router FE Interface IP Addresses – continued I-72 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTTable I-12: Entering or Changing BTS Router FE Interface IP Addresses and Operating ParametersStep Action4NOTEExamples in this procedure show prompts for BTSRTR–bts#–1–1 and BTSRTR–bts#–1–2, but theprocedure can be used for any router in any BTS router group or a router running the cannedconfiguration file (BTSRTR1 or BTSRTR2).At the BTSRTR–bts#–1–1> user EXEC mode prompt, enter the following to access the privilegedEXEC mode:enableA response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR–bts#–1–1> enablePassword:5Enter the privileged EXEC mode password.A response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR–bts#–1–1> enablePassword:BTSRTR–bts#–1–1#6At the BTSRTR–bts#–1–1# privileged EXEC mode prompt, display the FE interface IP addresses bytyping:show ip interface briefA response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR–bts#–1–1# show ip interface briefInterface IP Address OK? Method Status ProtocolFastEthernet0/0 192.168.146.1 YES NVRAM up upSerial0:0 unassigned YES unset administratively down downFastEthernet0/1 unassigned YES unset administratively down downSerial1:0 unassigned YES unset administratively down downBTSRTR–bts#–1–1# . . . continued on next pageI
Entering or Changing BTS Router FE Interface IP Addresses – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP I-73DRAFTTable I-12: Entering or Changing BTS Router FE Interface IP Addresses and Operating ParametersStep Action7For a FastEthernet0/0 (fa0/0) or FastEthernet0/1(fa0/1) interface which does not have a correct or anassigned IP address, enter the following at the router prompt to access the global configuration mode:configure terminalA response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR–bts#–1–1# conf tEnter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.BTSRTR–bts#–1–1(config)# 8At the global configure mode prompt, enter the following to access the configure interface submodefor the interface requiring IP address assignment/change:interface fastethernetinterface#Where interface# = 0/0 or 0/1, as applicable.A response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR–bts#–1–1(config)# int fa0/1BTSRTR–bts#–1–1(config–if)#9At the configure interface submode prompt, assign or change the interface IP address by entering:ip address IP_addr subnet_maskWhere:IP_addr = the required IP address for the interface; for example, 192.168.147.1subnet_mask = the required subnet mask for the interface; for example, 255.255.255.0A response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR–bts#–1–1(config–if)# ip address 192.168.147.1 255.255.255.0BTSRTR–bts#–1–1(config–if)#10 To complete configuration of the interface, enter the following parameter settings, one at a time,pressing Enter after each:duplex fullspeed 100keepalive 1no shutdown. . . continued on next pageI
Entering or Changing BTS Router FE Interface IP Addresses – continued I-74 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTTable I-12: Entering or Changing BTS Router FE Interface IP Addresses and Operating ParametersStep Action11 Return to the global configuration mode by entering the following:exitA response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR–bts#–1–1(config–if)# exitBTSRTR–bts#–1–1(config)#12 If the IP address and/or parameters for the other FE interface on the router must be assigned orchanged at this time, repeat steps 8 through 11 for the other FE interface.13 Once the correct parameters have been set for all FE interfaces, return to the privileged EXEC modeprompt by holding down the Ctrl key and pressing z (Ctrl +z).A response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR–bts#–1–1(config–if)# ^z01:11:27: %SYS–5–CONFIG_I: Configured from console by consoleBTSRTR–bts#–1–1# NOTEEntering exit twice, pressing the Enter key after each entry, will also complete the interfaceconfiguration and return the router to the privileged EXEC mode.14 Save the interface configuration changes to the startup configuration file on the CF memory card byentering the following:copy running–config startup–configA response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR–bts#–1–1# copy run startBTSRTR–bts#–1–1# Destination filename [startup–config]?15 Press EnterA response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR–bts#–1–1# copy run startBTSRTR–bts#–1–1# Destination filename [startup–config]?Building configuration...!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!![OK]BTSRTR–bts#–1–1# . . . continued on next pageI
Entering or Changing BTS Router FE Interface IP Addresses – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP I-75DRAFTTable I-12: Entering or Changing BTS Router FE Interface IP Addresses and Operating ParametersStep Action16 If all FE IP address entries/changes for the router are complete, enter the following to return the routerto user EXEC mode:disableA response similar to the following will be displayed:BTSRTR–bts#–1–1# disableBTSRTR–bts#–1–1> 17 If no other router requires the FE interfaces to be assigned/changed, proceed to step 20.18 If FE interfaces on another router must be assigned/changed, disconnect the 8–contact modular plugfrom the current router CONSOLE port and connect it to the CONSOLE port of the other router.19 Press the Enter key, and when the router user EXEC mode prompt appears repeat steps 3 through 16for the other router.20 When the router is in user EXEC mode, close the HyperTerminal session and disconnect the LMFcomputer and additional components from the BTS router. I
Example BTS Router Canned Configuration Files I-76 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTBTS Router CannedConfiguration FileThis section presents listings of the blue and red router cannedconfiguration file contents for the MWR 1900 BTS routers. The bluerouter is the primary router on the BTS LAN subnet 192.168.146.0, andthe red router is the primary on BTS LAN subnet 192.168.147.0. Thecanned configuration files allow communication with the BTS routersfor both on–site FE cabling connectivity verification and fordownloading the routers from the network with the full, site–specificoperational configuration.Obtaining the LatestConfiguration File ContentThe files included here are for example only. The correct cannedconfiguration file content for each BTS router should be generated at theOMC–R using the /screl/active/bin/gen_btsrtr_canned_config.ksh script.Configuration File ExamplesExamples of both configuration files are provided in the followingsubsections.I
Example BTS Router Canned Configuration Files – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP I-77DRAFT“Blue” BTS Router CannedConfiguration! Canned Config file for BTSRTR1version 12.2service timestamps debug uptimeservice timestamps log uptimeno service password–encryption!hostname BTSRTR1!no logging console!!ip subnet–zero ip classlessip pim bidir–enable!disable–eadimemory–size iomem 25!redundancy mode y–cable standby use–interface Loopback101 health standby use–interface Loopback102 revertive standby use–interface Multilink1 backhaulinterface loopback 101 description BTSRTR health loopback no ip address interface loopback 102 description BTSRTR revertive loopback no ip address !! configure 1 DS0 for BTSRTRLINK!controller T1 0/0 description 1st span on BTSRTR framing esf linecode b8zs cablelength short 133 clock source line channel–group 0 timeslots 1–24 speed 64! MLPPP bundle with BTSRTRLINK.! This performs IPCP with RPM when BTSRTR is rebootedinterface Multilink 1 ip address negotiated no ip route–cache no cdp enable ppp multilinkI
Example BTS Router Canned Configuration Files – continued I-78 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFT multilink–group 1 no shutdown!! Setup Serial Interface for PPP and IPCP, no MLPPP at this time!interface Serial0/0:0 no ip address encapsulation ppp keepalive 1 ppp multilink multilink–group 1 no shutdown!! Setup Ethernet Interfaces and HSRP between them!interface FastEthernet0/0 ip address 192.168.146.1 255.255.255.0 keepalive 1 speed 100 full–duplex standby 1 timers 1 3 standby 1 preempt standby 1 priority 100 standby 1 ip 192.168.146.3 standby 1 name one standby 1 track Fa0/1 10 standby 1 track Multilink1 10 ! Track the router health interface standby 1 track Loopback101 10 ! Track the router revertive (compensation) interface standby 1 track Loopback102 5 no shutdown!interface FastEthernet0/1 ip address 192.168.147.1 255.255.255.0 keepalive 1 speed 100 full–duplex standby 2 timers 1 3 standby 2 preempt standby 2 priority 100 standby 2 ip 192.168.147.3 standby 2 name two standby 2 track Fa0/0 10 standby 2 track Multilink1 10 ! Track the router health interface standby 2 track Loopback101 10 ! Track the router revertive (compensation) interface standby 2 track Loopback102 5 no shutdown!! Set a default route to RPM thru BTSRTRLINK!ip route 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 Multilink 1I
Example BTS Router Canned Configuration Files – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP I-79DRAFT!line con 0 exec–timeout 15 0 password ciscoline aux 0 login password ciscoline vty 0 4 login password ciscoendI
Example BTS Router Canned Configuration Files – continued I-80 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFT“Red” BTS Router CannedConfiguration! Canned Config file for BTSRTR2version 12.2service timestamps debug uptimeservice timestamps log uptimeno service password–encryption!hostname BTSRTR2!no logging console!!ip subnet–zero ip classlessip pim bidir–enable!disable–eadimemory–size iomem 25!redundancy mode y–cable standby use–interface Loopback101 health standby use–interface Loopback102 revertive standby use–interface Multilink1 backhaulinterface loopback 101 description BTSRTR health loopback no ip address interface loopback 102 description BTSRTR revertive loopback no ip address !! configure 1 DS0 for BTSRTRLINK!controller T1 0/0 description 1st span on BTSRTR framing esf linecode b8zs cablelength short 133 clock source line channel–group 0 timeslots 1–24 speed 64! MLPPP bundle with BTSRTRLINK.! This performs IPCP with RPM when BTSRTR is rebootedinterface Multilink 1 ip address negotiated no ip route–cache no cdp enableI
Example BTS Router Canned Configuration Files – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP I-81DRAFT ppp multilink multilink–group 1 no shutdown!! Setup Serial Interface for PPP and IPCP, no MLPPP at this time!interface Serial0/0:0 no ip address encapsulation ppp keepalive 1 ppp multilink multilink–group 1 no shutdown!! Setup Ethernet Interfaces and HSRP between them!interface FastEthernet0/0 ip address 192.168.146.2 255.255.255.0 keepalive 1 speed 100 full–duplex standby 1 timers 1 3 standby 1 preempt standby 1 priority 100 standby 1 ip 192.168.146.3 standby 1 name one standby 1 track Fa0/1 10 standby 1 track Multilink1 10 ! Track the router health interface standby 1 track Loopback101 10 ! Track the router revertive (compensation) interface standby 1 track Loopback102 5 no shutdown!interface FastEthernet0/1 ip address 192.168.147.2 255.255.255.0 keepalive 1 speed 100 full–duplex standby 2 timers 1 3 standby 2 preempt standby 2 priority 100 standby 2 ip 192.168.147.3 standby 2 name two standby 2 track Fa0/0 10 standby 2 track Multilink1 10 ! Track the router health interface standby 2 track Loopback101 10 ! Track the router revertive (compensation) interface standby 2 track Loopback102 5 no shutdown!! Set a default route to RPM thru BTSRTRLINK!I
Example BTS Router Canned Configuration Files – continued I-82 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTip route 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 Multilink 1!line con 0 exec–timeout 15 0 password ciscoline aux 0 login password ciscoline vty 0 4 login password ciscoendI
BTS Router CF Memory Card Removal and Replacement5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP I-83DRAFTBTS Router CF Memory CardRemoval and InstallationThe following procedures cover removal and installation of the CFmemory card used to store the IOS and configuration data for the BTSrouter.Figure I-5: Router CF Memory Card RemovalCF MemoryCard CoverSC4812T0012CaptiveScrewsACTLEDROTATE OUTPUSH INCard EjectorLeverCF MemoryCardTools RequiredThe following tool is required to perform procedures included in thissection:SNumber 2 cross–recess screwdriverRemoving a CF memory card – Refer to Figure I-5 and follow theprocedures in Table I-13 to remove the CF memory card from the BTSrouter.I
BTS Router CF Memory Card Removal and Replacement – continued I-84 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTThe CF memory card may be removed and installed whilepower is applied to the router.NOTETable I-13: Router Flash Memory Card RemovalStep Action1Refer to MWR1900 Wireless Mobile Edge Router Hardware Installation Guide; part number78–13982–01 for the latest information, cautions, and notes on BTS router CF memory card removaland installation prior to proceeding with the following steps.2! CAUTIONDo not remove the CF memory card while there are read or write operations occurring on the card.Removing the card during these operations will cause the router to shut down and damage the filesystem.If power is applied to the router, be sure there are no read or write operations in progress for the cardby verifying the ACT indicator LED is not lighted or lighting intermittently.3Using a cross–recess screwdriver, fully loosen the captive screws securing the flash memory card slotcover to the router, and remove the cover.4Remove the CF memory card by performing the following:4a – Rotate the end of the card ejector lever until it is pointing out 90_ to the router front panel (seeFigure I-5).4b – Push the card ejector lever straight into the router to unseat the CF memory card.4c – Carefully pull the card out of the slot.5Place the CF memory card on an anti–static surface or in an anti–static container. Installing a Flash Memory Card – Refer to Figure I-5 and follow theprocedures in Table I-13 to install the CF memory card in a BTS routerTable I-14: Router Flash Memory Card InstallationStep Action1Refer to MWR1900 Wireless Mobile Edge Router Hardware Installation Guide; part number78–13982–01 for the latest information, cautions, and notes on BTS router CF memory card removaland installation prior to proceeding with the following steps.2If the flash memory slot cover is installed, use a cross–recess screwdriver to fully loosen the captivescrews securing the cover to the router, and remove the cover (see NO TAG).3Install the CF memory card by performing the following:3a – Hold the CF memory card with the label facing up and the connector end pointing toward therouter.3b – Carefully insert the connector end into the flash memory card slot.. . . continued on next pageI
BTS Router CF Memory Card Removal and Replacement – continued5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP I-85DRAFTTable I-14: Router Flash Memory Card InstallationStep Action3c – Push the CF memory card into the slot to seat it in the slot connector.–– The card ejector lever will extend out of the router as the card is seated.3d – Pull on the card ejector lever to fully extend it from the router, and rotate it to the left to its stowedposition to latch the card in the slot (see Figure I-5). I
BTS Router CF Memory Card Removal and Replacement – continued I-86 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTNotesI
5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATPDRAFTAppendix J: Chapter Title Goes Here Appendix ContentTHIS IS THE GENERAL APPENDIX TOC. USE THIS FOR ALLAPPENDICES EXCEPT APPENDIX A.Guide Book 1–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Document Overview 1–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What Is In This Guide? 1–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Book Catalogs and Organization 1–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Book Directory 1–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Catalogs 1–5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Physical Page Layouts 1–6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A/A4 Page and Margin Sizes 1–6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A/A4 Page Text Area 1–7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A/A4 Page Components 1–9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frame and Table Components 1–10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frames With Tools 1–10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flow Charts and Block Diagrams 1–10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line Drawings 1–11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table Types In This Template 1–12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Item/Description Table 1–12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Step Table 1–13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Step/Check Table 1–14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Component Descriptions 1–15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conclusions 1–16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Map Title Goes Here lkjsfdg Sfdkgj Msfd N lkas K lkjsdfl kB lkj fgcb 1–17. . . . . . Block Label Goes Here 1–17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Label Goes Here 1–17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Label Goes Here 1–18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Label Goes Here 1–19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Map Title Goes Here 1–22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J
Table of Contents – continued1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTNotesJ
MMI Cable Fabrication5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP J-1DRAFTPurposeWhen the Motorola SLN2006A MMI Interface Kit is not available, acable can be fabricated by the user to interface a nine–pin serialconnector on an LMF computer platform with an MMI connector onGLI cards and other Motorola BTS assemblies. This section providesinformation necessary for fabricating this cable.Required PartsTable J-1: Parts Required to Fabricate MMI CableItem Part Number Qty DescriptionAMotorola 3009786R01 1Ribbon cable assembly, 1.524 M, one 8–contact MMIconnector, one 10–contact connectorBAMP 749814–1,Belkin A4B202BGC,or equivalent1Receptacle kit, unassembled, 9–position, socket contacts,unshielded, metal or plastic shell, solder or crimp–typecontacts Cable DetailsFigure J-1 illustrates the details of the fabricated MMI cable.Figure J-1: Fabricated MMI Cable DetailsDB–9 Plug Socket Numbering(Mating Side)123456789123456788–Contact MMI PlugSocket Numbering(Mating Side)Item A: Cable assembly 3009786R01 (with 10–contact plug removed)MMIFAB001–0FABRICATION NOTES:1. Remove 10–contact connector from ribbon cable of cable assembly 3009786R012. Separate wires at unterminated end of ribbon cable as required to connect to DB–9connector contacts3. Dark wire on ribbon cable of cable assembly 3009786R01 connects to pin 1 of the8–contact plug4. Strip three ribbon cable wires with connections specified in Table J-2 and connect toDB–9 plug contacts as specified in Table J-25. Shorten un–connected ribbon cable wires enough to prevent contacting DB–9contacts, leaving enough wire to egage any strain relief in the DB–9 connector shellItem BJ
MMI Cable Fabrication – continued J-2 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTWire Run ListTable J-2 provides the wire run/pin–out information for the fabricatedMMI cable.Table J-2: Fabricated MMI Cable Wire Run List8–CONTACT MMIPLUG CONTACTDB–9 PLUGCONTACT1 ––––––––––––––––– 52 ––––––––––––––––– 23 ––––––––––––––––– 34No Connection (NC)5 NC6 NC7 NC8 NC J
5/21/04 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP Index-1DRAFTIndexThis index supports 4 levels–Level 1 through Level 4 in a2–column format.B
Index – continued Index-2 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP 5/21/04DRAFTBBXAdding, 3-48–3-50Prerequisites, 3-48–3-50Logical data, 4-79–4-81
*68P09260A64−B*68P09260A64–B
DRAFT68P09260A64–B5/21/04ENGLISHCDMA2000 1XSOFTWARE RELEASE 2.16.4.XTechnicalInformation1X SC4812T–MC BTSOPTIMIZATION/ATP800 MHZ & 1.9 GHZ
SOFTWARE RELEASE 2.16.4.X800 MHZ & 1.9 GHZCDMA2000 1X1X SC4812T–MC BTS OPTIMIZATION/ATPENGLISH5/21/0468P09260A64–BDRAFT
Technical Information Products and Services11STANDARD MANUAL PRINTING INSTRUCTIONSSTANDARD SPECIFICATIONS – FOR REFERENCE–DO NOT MODIFYPart Number: 68P09260A64–B APC:Title: 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATPPAPER:Body: 70 lb.Inside Cover: 65 lb. CougarTabs: 110 lb. IndexBinder Cover: Standard TEDcover – 10 pt. Carolina1st. LEVEL TABS:Single Sided5 CutsClear MylarPantone 2706–CBlack Ink2nd. LEVEL TABS: FINISHING:3–Ring BinderSlant–D3–Hole Punched(5/16–in. dia.)Shrink Wrap BodyBlack ink for body, inside cover, and binder cover.SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONSTAB and SHEET SIZE/QUANTITY7X9 8.5x11 11x17NON–STANDARD SPECIFICATIONSTape Bound Corner Stitch Other: Meet with manager to determine the deliverable.Sheets = (Total Pages) / 2Single Sided7 CutsClear MylarWhiteBlack InkFilename:1st Level Tabs 2nd Level TabsVolume 5/21/04of DatePrint Vendor: eDOC
Map Title Goes HereMMM YYYY Manual Title -1PRELIMINARYB
Map Title Goes Here – continued -2 Manual Title MMM YYYYPRELIMINARYB
Map Title Goes HereMMM YYYY Manual Title -3PRELIMINARYB
Map Title Goes Here – continued -4 Manual Title MMM YYYYPRELIMINARYB
-1Using The TabsTo use these tabs, simply cut or copy the tab catalog and paste in the chapterbook in the first postion (in front of the chaptoc document).You will note that these are good for ten chapters. To build tabs for 11–20 or forappendix A–J, open the catalogs for the proper tab position and edit themicrodocument for the proper number/letter. Number 11 or alpha A start in thetop tab_1 position.
CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJMANUAL TITLEAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAABBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBPART NUMBERCLEAR MYLAR, COLOR–PANTONE 2706–C, INK–BLACKCUT 1 – IN FRONT OF CHAPTERORBETWEEN PAGESFor 8.5x11, use all tabs.For 7x9, use just cuts 1–4 68P09248A54–DSC 9640 BTS Install/Opto/ATP/FRU xxxxxxxx*** DO NOT HAVE 3 OR MORE LINES OF TEXT ON A TAB ***ANDCUT 2 – IN FRONT OF CHAPTERORBETWEEN PAGES ANDCUT 3 – IN FRONT OF CHAPTERORBETWEEN PAGES ANDCUT 4 – IN FRONT OF CHAPTERORBETWEEN PAGES ANDCUT 5 – IN FRONT OF CHAPTERORBETWEEN PAGES AND
AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAABBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGMANUAL TITLEPART NUMBERCLEAR MYLAR, COLOR–WHITE, INK–BLACKFor 8.5x11, use all tabs.For 7x9, use just cuts 1–5 68P09248A54–DSC 9640 BTS Install/Opto/ATP/FRU xxxxxxxx*** DO NOT HAVE 3 OR MORE LINES OF TEXT ON A TAB ***CUT 1 – IN FRONT OF CHAPTERORBETWEEN PAGES ANDCUT 2 – IN FRONT OF CHAPTERORBETWEEN PAGES ANDCUT 3 – IN FRONT OF CHAPTERORBETWEEN PAGES ANDCUT 4 – IN FRONT OF CHAPTERORBETWEEN PAGES ANDCUT 5 – IN FRONT OF CHAPTERORBETWEEN PAGES ANDCUT 6 – IN FRONT OF CHAPTERORBETWEEN PAGES ANDCUT 7 – IN FRONT OF CHAPTERORBETWEEN PAGES AND
Product Information i Manual Title MMM YYYYPRELIMINARYModel Chart Model Complement For Product A – Models X, Y, ZModel Description QuantityOptions Option Complement For Product AModel Description QuantitySpecifications General Specifications for Product ASpecification DescriptionReceiver Specifications for Product ASpecification DescriptionTransmitter Specifications for Product ASpecification Description
PRELIMINARYSPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICENoticeWhile reasonable efforts have been made to assure the accuracy of this document, Motorola, Inc. assumes no liability resulting from anyinaccuracies or omissions in this document, or from use of the information obtained herein. The information in this document has beencarefully checked and is believed to be entirely reliable. However, no responsibility is assumed for inaccuracies or omissions. Motorola,Inc. reserves the right to make changes to any products described herein and reserves the right to revise this document and to makechanges from time to time in content hereof with no obligation to notify any person of revisions or changes. Motorola, Inc. does notassume any liability arising out of the application or use of any product, software, or circuit described herein; neither does it conveylicense under its patent rights or the rights of others.It is possible that this publication may contain references to, or information about Motorola products (machines and programs),programming, or services that are not announced in your country. Such references or information must not be construed to meanthat Motorola intends to announce such Motorola products, programming, or services in your country.CopyrightsThis instruction manual, and the Motorola products described in this instruction manual may be, include or describe copyrightedMotorola material, such as computer programs stored in semiconductor memories or other media. Laws in the United States andother countries preserve for Motorola and its licensors certain exclusive rights for copyrighted material, including the exclusiveright to copy, reproduce in any form, distribute and make derivative works of the copyrighted material. Accordingly, anycopyrighted material of Motorola and its licensors contained herein or in the Motorola products described in this instruction manualmay not be copied, reproduced, distributed, merged or modified in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola.Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel, orotherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications of Motorola, as arises by operation of law in the sale of aproduct.Usage and Disclosure RestrictionsLicense AgreementThe software described in this document is the property of Motorola, Inc and its licensors. It is furnished by express licenseagreement only and may be used only in accordance with the terms of such an agreement.Copyrighted MaterialsSoftware and documentation are copyrighted materials. Making unauthorized copies is prohibited by law. No part of the software ordocumentation may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language orcomputer language, in any form or by any means, without prior written permission of Motorola, Inc.High Risk ActivitiesComponents, units, or third–party products used in the product described herein are NOT fault–tolerant and are NOT designed,manufactured, or intended for use as on–line control equipment in the following hazardous environments requiring fail–safecontrols: the operation of Nuclear Facilities, Aircraft Navigation or Aircraft Communication Systems, Air Traffic Control, LifeSupport, or Weapons Systems (“High Risk Activities”). Motorola and its supplier(s) specifically disclaim any expressed or impliedwarranty of fitness for such High Risk Activities.
PRELIMINARYSPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICETrademarksMOTOROLA and the Stylized M Logo are registered in the US Patent & Trademark Office. All other product or service names arethe property of their respective owners.© Copyright 2002 Motorola, Inc.Javat Technology and/or J2MEt: Java and all other Java–based marks are trademarks or registered trademarks of SunMicrosystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries.UNIXR: UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other countries.INSERT CONTRACTUAL LANGUAGE HEREREV073102

Navigation menu